Download pdf - B 64014 en-04

Fast Ethernet

OPERATOR'S MANUAL

B-64014EN/04

FANUC Series 30+-MODEL A/BFANUC Series 31+-MODEL A/BFANUC Series 32+-MODEL A/BFANUC Series 35+-MODEL B

Fast Data Server

• No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form. • All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. The products in this manual contain software controlled based on Japan’s “Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Law”. For this reason, the export of these products is subject to an export license based on that law.

In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters. However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be done, because there are so many possibilities. Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be regarded as ”impossible”.

This manual contains the program names or device names of other companies, some of which are registered trademarks of respective owners. However, these names are not followed by ® or ™ in the main body.

B-64014EN/04 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

s-1

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS This section describes the safety precautions related to the use of CNC units, to ensure safe operation of machines fitted with FANUC CNC units. Read this section carefully before attempting to use any function described in this manual. Users should also read the relevant descriptions in the User’s Manual of the CNC to become fully familiar with the functions to be used.

Contents DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE.........................................................................s-1 GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ............................................................................................s-1

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into Warnings and Cautions according to their bearing on safety. Also, supplementary information is described as Notes. Read the Warnings, Cautions, and Notes thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.

WARNING Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a danger

of both the user being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.

CAUTION

Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not observed.

NOTE The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and

Caution. • Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

WARNING 1 Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the entered data. Operating the

machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-64014EN/04

s-2

WARNING 2 Never attempt to machine a workpiece without first checking the programmed

value, compensation value, current position, and external signal settings. Also, never attempt to machine a workpiece without first checking the operation of the machine. Before starting a production run, ensure that the machine is operating correctly by performing a trial run using, for example, the single block, feedrate override, or machine lock function, or by operating the machine with neither a tool nor workpiece mounted. Failure to confirm the correct operation of the machine may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.

3 Ensure that the specified feedrate is appropriate for the intended operation. Generally, for each machine, there is a maximum allowable feedrate. The appropriate feedrate varies with the intended operation. Refer to the manual provided with the machine to determine the maximum allowable feedrate. If a machine is run at other than the correct speed, it may behave unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.

4 When using a tool compensation function, thoroughly check the direction and amount of compensation. Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.

5 The parameters for the CNC and PMC are factory-set. Usually, there is no need to change them. When, however, there is no alternative other than to change a parameter, ensure that you fully Failure to set a parameter correctly may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.

CAUTION

1 Immediately after switching on the power, do not touch any of the keys on the MDI panel until the position display or alarm screen appears on the CNC unit. Some of the keys on the MDI panel are dedicated to maintenance or other special operations. Pressing any of these keys may place the CNC unit in other than its normal state. Starting the machine in this state may cause it to behave unexpectedly.

2 The operator's manual for Fast Ethernet / Fast Data Server describes all the basic functions of the CNC, including the optional functions. The selected optional functions vary with the machine. Some functions described in this manual may not, therefore, be supported by your machine. Check the machine specifications before using Fast Ethernet / Fast Data Server.

B-64014EN/04 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

s-3

CAUTION 3 Some machine operations and screen functions are implemented by the machine

tool builder. For an explanation of their usage and related notes, refer to the manual provided by the machine tool builder. For example: • On some machines, executing a tool function causes the tool change unit to

operate. When executing a tool function on such a machine, stand well clear of the tool change unit. Otherwise, there is a danger of injury to the operator.

• Many auxiliary functions trigger physical operations, such as rotation of the spindle. Before attempting to use an auxiliary function, therefore, ensure that you are fully aware of the operation to be triggered by that function.

NOTE Command programs, parameters, and variables are stored in nonvolatile memory

in the CNC. Generally, the contents of memory are not lost by a power on/off operation. However, the contents of memory may be erased by mistake, or important data in nonvolatile memory may have to be erased upon recovering from a failure.

To enable the restoration of data as soon as possible if such a situation arises, always make a backup of the data in advance.

B-64014EN/04 TABLE OF CONTENTS

c-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS............................................................................s-1 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE ............................................. s-1 GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS............................................................... s-1

I. GENERAL

1 GENERAL ...............................................................................................3 1.1 ORGANIZATION ........................................................................................... 3 1.2 APPLICABLE MODELS................................................................................. 3 1.3 RELATED MANUALS.................................................................................... 4

II. SPECIFICATION

1 PREFACE................................................................................................7 1.1 DIFFERENCES IN FUNCTION BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED Ethernet

AND OPTIONAL BOARD .............................................................................. 7

2 ABOUT USE WITH Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B .........................................9 2.1 HARDWARE OPTIONS................................................................................. 9 2.2 SOFTWARE OPTIONS ................................................................................. 9 2.3 RELATED NC PARAMETERS ...................................................................... 9 2.4 SELECTION PROCEDURE OF HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE

OPTIONS .................................................................................................... 10 2.5 SCREEN LAYOUT ...................................................................................... 12

3 DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS ...............................................................13 3.1 DATA SERVER FILE MANAGEMENT ........................................................ 13

3.1.1 File Names of CNC File Management ...................................................................14 3.1.2 Number of Files Which Can Be Registered on a Data Server................................14 3.1.3 Text Files and Binary Files ....................................................................................15

3.2 DATA SERVER MODES ............................................................................. 15 3.3 DETAILS OF THE BUFFER MODE............................................................. 17 3.4 OPERATION FROM A DATA SERVER ...................................................... 20 3.5 NC PROGRAM FORMAT............................................................................ 20 3.6 LIST FILE FORMAT .................................................................................... 22 3.7 DATASERVER Explorer CONNECTION ..................................................... 24

4 FOCAS2/Ethernet FUNCTIONS...........................................................25 5 DNS/DHCP CLIENT FUNCTIONS ........................................................26 6 MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS...................................27 7 UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION ............................................28 8 FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION .......................................................30

TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64014EN/04

c-2

III. SETTING

1 SETTING THE COMMUNICATION FUNCTION ...................................33 1.1 BACKING UP/RESTORING COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS............... 33

2 SETTING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS.......................................36 2.1 OPERATING THE DATA SERVER SETTING SCREEN............................. 36 2.2 RELATED NC PARAMETERS .................................................................... 43 2.3 EXAMPLE OF SETTING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS ..................... 47

3 SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet FUNCTIONS ..................................48 3.1 OPERATING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet SETTING SCREEN ......................... 48 3.2 RELATED NC PARAMETERS .................................................................... 50 3.3 EXAMPLE OF SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet FUNCTIONS.................. 51

4 SETTING THE DNS/DHCP FUNCTION................................................52 4.1 SETTING OF DNS....................................................................................... 52 4.2 SETTING OF DHCP.................................................................................... 53 4.3 RELATED NC PARAMETERS .................................................................... 55 4.4 EXAMPLE OF SETTING DNS/DHCP.......................................................... 55

4.4.1 When DNS/DHCP is Used with the Data Server ...................................................55 4.4.2 When DHCP is Used with the FTP Server Function of the Data Server ...............56 4.4.3 When DHCP is Used with the FOCAS2/Ethernet Function ..................................57

5 SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS ..........60 5.1 OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS SETTING SCREEN. 60 5.2 RELATED NC PARAMETERS .................................................................... 64 5.3 CONTROLLING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS

FROM THE PMC......................................................................................... 65 5.3.1 Signals ....................................................................................................................65 5.3.2 Signal Timing Charts..............................................................................................67

5.3.2.1 When the start of machine remote diagnosis is accepted................................... 67 5.3.2.2 When the start of machine remote diagnosis is rejected.................................... 68 5.3.2.3 When machine remote diagnosis is forcibly terminated.................................... 68

5.4 EXAMPLE OF SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS................................................................................................ 69

6 SETTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION.................70 6.1 SETTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION.......................... 70

6.1.1 Selection of Mode ..................................................................................................73 6.1.2 Setting Method by CNC Screen .............................................................................74 6.1.3 Setting Method by Personal Computer...................................................................78

6.2 EXECUTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION..................... 78 6.2.1 When Using a PMC Address for Control (Response Notice method) ...................79 6.2.2 When Using a PMC Address for Control (Simple Method) ..................................81 6.2.3 When Using a Macro Variable for Control (Simple Method)................................82

6.3 RELATED NC PARAMETERS .................................................................... 84

7 SETTING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION...............................86 7.1 SETTING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION ..................................... 86 7.2 RELATED NC PARAMETERS .................................................................... 89


c-3

8 ERROR MESSAGES DISPLAYED DURING PARAMETER SETTING 91

IV. OPERATION

1 OPERATING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS.................................95 1.1 DEVICE CHANGE ON THE PROGRAM FOLDER SCREEN...................... 95 1.2 OPERATING THE DATA SERVER FILE LIST SCREEN ............................ 96

1.2.1 Displaying and Operating the File List ................................................................100 1.2.2 File Transfer Operation ........................................................................................106 1.2.3 Preparations for File Operation and Editing.........................................................107

1.3 OPERATING THE DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST SCREEN ............... 108 1.3.1 Displaying and Operating the File List ................................................................110 1.3.2 File Transfer Operation ........................................................................................113 1.3.3 Preparations for File Operation ............................................................................114

1.4 M198-BASED SUBPROGRAM CALL........................................................ 115 1.5 DNC OPERATION..................................................................................... 116 1.6 NC PROGRAM INPUT .............................................................................. 116 1.7 NC PROGRAM OUTPUT .......................................................................... 117 1.8 FTP SERVER FUNCTIONS ...................................................................... 118

2 OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS ..119 2.1 OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS SCREEN............... 119

2.1.1 Selecting an Inquiry Destination ..........................................................................120 2.1.2 Starting Diagnosis ................................................................................................120

2.1.2.1 Diagnosis status ............................................................................................... 120 2.1.2.2 Error numbers and error messages................................................................... 121

2.1.3 Forcibly Terminating Diagnosis...........................................................................122

3 OPERATING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION.......................123 3.1 DEVICE CHANGE ON THE PROGRAM FOLDER SCREEN.................... 124 3.2 OPERATING THE FTP TRANSFER HOST FILE LIST SCREEN.............. 125

3.2.1 Displaying and Operating the File List ................................................................126 3.3 NC PROGRAM INPUT .............................................................................. 129 3.4 NC PROGRAM OUTPUT .......................................................................... 129

V. CONNECTION

1 SETTING .............................................................................................133 1.1 Series 30i/31i/32i-A ................................................................................... 133

1.1.1 Specifications .......................................................................................................133 1.1.2 Installation ............................................................................................................133

1.1.2.1 Installation on an LCD-mounted type unit ...................................................... 133 1.1.2.2 Installation on a stand-alone type unit ............................................................. 134 1.1.2.3 Total connection diagram ................................................................................ 135 1.1.2.4 Installing a memory card ................................................................................. 135

1.2 Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B ............................................................................. 137 1.2.1 Specifications .......................................................................................................137 1.2.2 Installation ............................................................................................................138

1.2.2.1 Installation on an LCD-mounted type unit ...................................................... 138 1.2.2.2 Installation on a stand-alone type unit ............................................................. 139 1.2.2.3 Total connection diagram ................................................................................ 140 1.2.2.4 Installing a memory card ................................................................................. 140

TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64014EN/04

c-4

2 CABLE CONNECTION .......................................................................142 2.1 CONNECTING TO Ethernet ...................................................................... 142 2.2 LEADING OUT THE Ethernet CABLE ....................................................... 144 2.3 RJ-45 CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENTS ............................................... 144 2.4 TWISTED-PAIR CABLE SPECIFICATION................................................ 145

2.4.1 Cable Connection .................................................................................................145 2.4.2 Cable Materials.....................................................................................................145 2.4.3 Connector Specification .......................................................................................147

2.5 ELECTRICAL NOISE COUNTERMEASURES.......................................... 148 2.5.1 Separating Signal Lines........................................................................................148 2.5.2 Clamping and Shielding Cables ...........................................................................148 2.5.3 Grounding the Network........................................................................................150

2.6 CHECK ITEMS AT INSTALLATION .......................................................... 152

VI. MAINTENANCE

1 HARDWARE MAINTENANCE INFORMATION..................................157 1.1 Series 30i/31i/32i-A ................................................................................... 157

1.1.1 Component Layout ...............................................................................................157 1.1.2 LED Indications and Meanings ............................................................................158

1.2 Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B ............................................................................. 160 1.2.1 Component Layout ...............................................................................................160 1.2.2 LED Indications and Meanings ............................................................................161

2 SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE INFORMATION...................................164 2.1 Ethernet LOG ............................................................................................ 164 2.2 ETHERNET CONNECTION CONFIRMATION.......................................... 169 2.3 COMMUNICATION STATE CONFIRMATION........................................... 171 2.4 COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE CONFIRMATION.................................. 172 2.5 FTP SERVER MAINTENANCE ................................................................. 173 2.6 ALARM AND DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION............................................... 176 2.7 COMMUNICATION RETRY MONITORING FUNCTION........................... 177

APPENDIX

A TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................................181 A.1 CHECKING COMMUNICATION WITH A HUB.......................................... 181 A.2 CHECKING CONNECTION WITH THE TRUNK ....................................... 181 A.3 CHECKING SETTINGS............................................................................. 182 A.4 CHECKING COMMUNICATION................................................................ 182

B EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP .................................................185 B.1 SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows 2000 Professional (FOR

INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE)..................................................... 185 B.2 SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows XP Professional (FOR

INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE)..................................................... 196 B.3 SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows Vista (FOR INTERNET

INFORMATION SERVICE)........................................................................ 216


c-5

B.4 SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows 7 (FOR INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE)........................................................................ 233

C EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS/DHCP ...........................................254 C.1 EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DHCP SERVER OF Windows 2000 Server. 255 C.2 EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS SERVER OF Windows 2000 Server ... 261

D FTP CLIENT OPERATION..................................................................266 D.1 OPERATION USING THE FTP COMMAND.............................................. 266 D.2 OPERATION USING THE Explorer........................................................... 268

D.2.1 Displaying the File List ........................................................................................268 D.2.2 File Operation and File Transfer ..........................................................................281

D.3 SECURITY UNBLOCKING IN Windows XP (Service Pack 2) / Vista ........ 283

I. GENERAL

B-64014EN/04 GENERAL 1.GENERAL

- 3 -

1 GENERAL This part explains the organization of this manual.

1.1 ORGANIZATION This manual consists of the following parts: SAFETY PRECAUTIONS This section describes the precautions to be observed when reading this manual. I. GENERAL This part describes the chapter organization, applicable models, and related manuals. II. SPECIFICATION This part describes the specifications of the functions that operate on the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data

Server. III. SETTING This part describes the method of setting. IV. OPERATION This part describes the method of operating the Data Server functions, machine remote diagnosis

functions, and FTP file transfer function. V. CONNECTION This part describes the method of connection and provides notes. VI. MAINTENANCE This part provides an Ethernet board drawing number and describes the meanings of LED

indications. APPENDIX These appendixes describe additional information such as that related to troubleshooting, the

operation of the FTP client, and how to set up the FTP server.

1.2 APPLICABLE MODELS This Operator's Manual covers the following models. The abbreviations in the following table are sometimes used in text descriptions.

Model name Abbreviation FANUC Series 30i-MODEL A Series 30i -AFANUC Series 31i-MODEL A FANUC Series 31i-MODEL A5

Series 31i -A

FANUC Series 32i-MODEL A Series 32i -A

Series 30i/31i/32i -A

FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B Series 30i -BFANUC Series 31i-MODEL B FANUC Series 31i-MODEL B5

Series 31i -B

FANUC Series 32i-MODEL B Series 32i -B

Series 30i/31i/32i -B

FANUC Series 35i-MODEL B Series 35i -B Series 35i -B

Series 30i/31i/32i /35i -B

Series 30i/31i/32i -A/B

or Series

30i/31i/32i

1.GENERAL GENERAL B-64014EN/04

- 4 -

1.3 RELATED MANUALS The table below lists manuals related to this manual. Refer to these manuals when you use this manual. This manual is indicated by an asterisk(*).

Manual name Specification number

Related to Series 30i/31i/32i-A DESCRIPTIONS B-63942EN CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B-63943EN CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B-63943EN-1 OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System) B-63944EN OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe System) B-63944EN-1 OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Center System) B-63944EN-2 MAINTENANCE MANUAL B-63945EN PARAMETER MANUAL B-65950EN Related to Series 30i/31i/32i-B DESCRIPTIONS B-64482EN CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B-64483EN CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B-64483EN-1 OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System) B-64484EN OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe System) B-64484EN-1 OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Center System) B-64484EN-2 MAINTENANCE MANUAL B-64485EN PARAMETER MANUAL B-64490EN Related to Series 35i-B DESCRIPTIONS B-64522EN CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B-64523EN CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B-64523EN-1 OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64524EN MAINTENANCE MANUAL B-64525EN PARAMETER MANUAL B-64530EN PMC FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-63983EN FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-MODEL B PMCPROGRAMMING MANUAL B-64513EN Network PROFIBUS-DP Board CONNECTION MANUAL B-63993EN Fast Ethernet / Fast Data Server OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64014EN *DeviceNet Board CONNECTION MANUAL B-64043EN FL-net Board CONNECTION MANUAL B-64163EN CC-Link Board CONNECTION MANUAL B-64463EN Machine Remote Diagnosis Machine Remote Diagnosis Package OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-63734EN

II. SPECIFICATION

B-64014EN/04 SPECIFICATION 1.PREFACE

- 7 -

1 PREFACE In this manual, a board that has an ATA Flash card or a Compact Flash Card (collectively called a memory card hereinafter) mounted to enable the use of the Data Server functions is referred to as a "Fast Data Server" (or simply as a "Data Server"). On the other hand, a board that does not have a memory card mounted is referred to as a "Fast Ethernet".

Board name Usable function

Fast Data Server (or simply referred to as "Data Server")

- Data Server functions - FOCAS2/Ethernet functions - CNC screen display functions - Machine remote diagnosis functions - Unsolicited messaging function

(FOCAS2/Ethernet)

Fast Ethernet

- FOCAS2/Ethernet functions - CNC screen display functions - Machine remote diagnosis functions - Unsolicited messaging function

(FOCAS2/Ethernet) - FTP file transfer function

NOTE 1 To use the Data Server functions, the Data Server function option is required. To use the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions, CNC screen display functions, machine

remote diagnosis functions, unsolicited messaging function, and FTP file transfer function, the Ethernet function option is required.

To use the CNC screen display functions, the CNC screen display function option is additionally required.

2 The LCD-mounted type Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B has a Fast Ethernet circuit (Multi-function Ethernet) mounted on its main board. The circuit can be used as hardware for Fast Ethernet. For details, see Section 2.1, “HARDWARE OPTIONS” below.

3 The Data Server functions cannot be used with the Series 35i-B.

1.1 DIFFERENCES IN FUNCTION BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED Ethernet AND OPTIONAL BOARD

There are the following differences in Ethernet function between the embedded Ethernet and optional board.

Embedded Ethernet Optional board FOCAS2/Ethernet functions Note 1 Possible Possible DNC operation Impossible Possible FTP file transfer function Possible Possible Data Server functions Note 2 Impossible Possible Machine remote diagnosis functions Impossible Possible Unsolicited messaging function Note 3 Possible Possible DNS/DHCP client functions Possible Possible Ethernet display function Possible Impossible

1.PREFACE SPECIFICATION B-64014EN/04

- 8 -

NOTE 1 The number of FOCAS2/Ethernet clients that can be connected concurrently

with the embedded Ethernet is smaller than that with the optional board. Embedded Ethernet Optional board

Number of clients that can be connected concurrently Up to 5 Up to 20 Number of PCs that can be connected concurrently 1 (recommended)） Up to 20

2 The Data Server functions cannot be used on Multi-function Ethernet in the

Series 30i/31i/32i-B. For details of Multi-function Ethernet, see Section 2.1, “HARDWARE OPTIONS” below.

3 To use the unsolicited messaging function on the embedded Ethernet in the Series 30i/31i/32i-A, the Enhanced Embedded Ethernet function (R952) option is required.

4 Communication using embedded Ethernet is processed by the CPU in the CNC, which means that the CNC operation status may affect the communication performance of the embedded Ethernet and communication using embedded Ethernet may also affect CNC processing. The embedded Ethernet function operates with priority lower than that given to automatic or manual operation performed for each axis. Consequently, the communication rate may be slower during automatic operation or operation with many controlled axes. Meanwhile, the embedded Ethernet function operates with priority higher than that given to the CNC screen display processing, C Language Executor (other than high-level tasks), and other processing. Consequently, communication using embedded Ethernet may reduce the performance of the processing.

5 Carefully connect embedded Ethernet to an intracompany network handling much broadcast data because broadcast data processing takes time, which may affect the performance of the CNC screen display processing and others.

B-64014EN/04 SPECIFICATION

- 9 -

2.ABOUT USE WITH Series30i/31i/32i/35i-B

2 ABOUT USE WITH Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B The hardware of Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B is different from one of Series 30i/31i/32i-A. In this section, the difference of the specification is described.

2.1 HARDWARE OPTIONS In Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B, the following hardware is prepared for Fast Ethernet.

Kind of hardware Description

Multi-function Ethernet Fast Ethernet circuit mounted on the main board of the LCD-mounted type Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B (Connector name: CD38B)

Fast Ethernet board Option board mounted in the optional slot (Connector name: CD38R) The above hardware can be used as hardware for the FL-net according to the setting of the NC parameters (No.970-972). The information when the hardware is used as hardware for Fast Ethernet is described in this manual. Refer to “FL-net Board CONNECTION MANUAL” (B-64163EN) regarding the FL-net function.

2.2 SOFTWARE OPTIONS In Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B, the following software functions can be used by the hardware options shown in section 2.1.

Function name Drawing Description Ethernet function A02B-xxxx-S707 Ethernet function (ex. FOCAS2/Ethernet) can be used. Data Server function A02B-xxxx-S737 Data Server function can be used. (NOTE1) FL-net function A02B-xxxx-J692 FL-net function can be used. FL-net PORT2 function A02B-xxxx-R964 Two FL-net functions can be used simultaneously.

NOTE 1 The Data Server function cannot be used on Multi-function Ethernet.

The Data Server function cannot be used on the Series 35i-B. 2 In the Series 30i/31i/32i-A, the special software and software options are

necessary to use the FL-net/Ethernet coexisting function. But, in the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B, it is possible to use FL-net/Ethernet coexisting function by only Ethernet function and FL-net function. Please refer to “2.3 RELATED NC PARAMETERS” about the setting for FL-net/Ethernet coexisting function.

2.3 RELATED NC PARAMETERS 0970 Select hardware that operates Ethernet or Data Server function 0971 Select hardware that operates first FL-net function 0972 Select hardware that operates second FL-net function

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] -1 to 6

Hardware that operates each function is selected. Please refer to the next section, too.

SPECIFICATION B-64014EN/04

- 10 -

2. ABOUT USE WITH Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B

Value Hardware

-1 Not used 0 Unsetting (NOTE1) 1 Multi-function Ethernet (NOTE2) 2 (reserved) 3 Fast Ethernet board mounted in slot 1 4 Fast Ethernet board mounted in slot 2 5 Fast Ethernet board mounted in slot 3 6 Fast Ethernet board mounted in slot 4

NOTE 1 When one hardware option is mounted and the software option is

uniquely decided, the function can run even if NC parameters No.970-972 are set to 0.

2 The Data Server function cannot be used on Multi-function Ethernet. If using the Data Server function, don’t set 1 to NC parameter No.970.

3 When the Ethernet function and the FL-net function are available, these functions can operate on the same hardware by specifying the same hardware on the NC parameters No.970 and 971 as the FL-net/Ethernet coexisting function. And, each function can operate on the different hardware by specifying the different hardware. Please refer to “FL-net Board CONNECTION MANUAL” (B-64163EN) about FL-net/Ethernet coexisting function.

4 When the Ethernet function and the Data Server function are available, these functions must operate on the same hardware according to the NC parameter No.970. These functions cannot operate on the different hardware.

5 When the Ethernet function, the Data Server function, and the FL-net function are available, the NC parameters No.970 and 971 have to set the different hardware. In this case, the Ethernet function and the FL-net function cannot operate on the same hardware.

2.4 SELECTION PROCEDURE OF HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE OPTIONS

In Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B, when using the Ethernet function, Data Server function, and FL-net function, please select hardware and software basically according to the following procedure.


- 11 -

2.ABOUT USE WITH Series30i/31i/32i/35i-B

Three Ethernetscase1

One Ethernetcase5

Two Ethernetscase3

One Ethernetcase6

yes NOTE1)

yes

yes

no

no

no

No Ethernets

no

no

no

yes

no

yes

yes

yes

yes

no

Two Ethernetscase2

One Ethernetcase7

Two Ethernetscase4

yes

no

One Ethernetcase8

no

yes

Do you usetwo FL-net functions

at the same time?

Do you useData Server

function?

Do you useFL-net function?

Do you useEthernet function?



at the same time?

Do you useFL-net/Ethernet

coexistingfunction?


coexistingfunction?



at the same time?

Three Ethernetscase1

One Ethernetcase5

Two Ethernetscase3

One Ethernetcase6

yes NOTE1)

yes

yes

no

no

no

No Ethernets

no

no

no

yes

no

yes

yes

yes

yes

no

Two Ethernetscase2

One Ethernetcase7

Two Ethernetscase4

yes

no

One Ethernetcase8

no

yes


at the same time?


at the same time?


function?


function?








at the same time?


at the same time?


coexistingfunction?


coexistingfunction?


coexistingfunction?


coexistingfunction?




at the same time?


at the same time?

LCD-mounted type Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B

Required hardware Required software option NC parameters

case 1 Three Ethernets Multi-function Ethernet Fast Ethernet board (slot1) Fast Ethernet board (slot2)

J692 S737 (+S707) R964

No.970 = 3 No.971 = 1 No.972 = 4

case 2 Two Ethernets Multi-function Ethernet Fast Ethernet board (slot1)

J692 S737 (+S707)

No.970 = 3 No.971 = 1


S707 + J692 R964

No.970 = 1 No.971 = 1 No.972 = 3


J692 R964

No.971 = 1 No.972 = 3

case 5 One Ethernet Fast Ethernet board (slot1) S737 (+S707) No.970 = 3

case 6 One Ethernet Multi-function Ethernet S707 + J692 No.970 = 1 No.971 = 1

case 7 One Ethernet Multi-function Ethernet S707 No.970 = 1 case 8 One Ethernet Multi-function Ethernet J692 No.971 = 1

Stand-alone type Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B


case 1 (NOTE2)

Three Ethernets Fast Ethernet board (slot1) Fast Ethernet board (slot2) Fast Ethernet board (slot3)

J692 S737 (+S707) R964

No.970 = 3 No.971 = 4 No.972 = 5

case 2 Two Ethernets Fast Ethernet board (slot1) Fast Ethernet board (slot2)

J692 S737 (+S707)

No.970 = 3 No.971 = 4


S707 + J692 R964

No.970 = 3 No.971 = 3 No.972 = 4


- 12 -

2. ABOUT USE WITH Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B



J692 R964

No.971 = 3 No.972 = 4

case 5 One Ethernet Fast Ethernet board (slot1) S737 (+S707) No.970 = 3

case 6 One Ethernet Fast Ethernet board (slot1) S707 + J692 No.970 = 3 No.971 = 3

case 7 One Ethernet Fast Ethernet board (slot1) S707 No.970 = 3 case 8 One Ethernet Fast Ethernet board (slot1) J692 No.971 = 3

NOTE 1 When the Data Server function is selected, whether the Ethernet function is

selected does not affect the subsequent selection procedure because the Ethernet and Data Server functions always operate on the same hardware.

2 It is not selectable because only two option boards can be mounted in the stand-alone type of Series 35i-B.

2.5 SCREEN LAYOUT In this manual, each screen has described the example of the screen of Series 30i/31i/32i-A. A basic content is the same though a detailed layout might be different. The hardware can be confirmed in title part of each screen of Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B.

The kind of the hardware is shown on the title bar as the above example like [MULTI –FUNC ETHER].

Title Description

[MUTI-FUNC ETHER] Fast Ethernet circuit mounted on the main board of the LCD-mounted type Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B

[BOARD(SLOT1)] Option board mounted in the optional slot 1 [BOARD(SLOT2)] Option board mounted in the optional slot 2 [BOARD(SLOT3)] Option board mounted in the optional slot 3 [BOARD(SLOT4)] Option board mounted in the optional slot 4

B-64014EN/04 SPECIFICATION 3.DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS

- 13 -

3 DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS The Data Server functions use a memory card built into a board for storing files and can transfer files and perform DNC operation using FTP. A Data Server can operate on both FTP client and FTP server. When you use a Data Server to transfer files, the Data Server operates as an FTP client and communicates with the FTP server on the host computer. When you use the host computer to transfer files, the Data Server operates as an FTP server and communicates with the FTP client on the host computer.

NOTE 1 The Data Server functions cannot be used with the Series 35i-B. 2 Before communicating with the host computer using the Data Server functions,

completely confirm that there is no problem with the entire system including communication with the personal computer because the personal computer environment may affect communication operation.

3 When the host computer operates as an FTP server, FTP server software must be run on the host computer. When the host computer operates as an FTP client, FTP client software must be run on the host computer.

3.1 DATA SERVER FILE MANAGEMENT With the Data Server functions, you can format the built-in memory card in the CNC file management mode to manage NC programs.

CNC file management For NC programs managed in the CNC file management mode, memory operation such as custom macro commands and M98-based subprogram calling are available. Operate the NC programs using the PROGRAM FOLDER screen in the same way as for NC programs in the CNC memory. As a CNC external input/output device, DNC operation and M198-based subprogram calling are available. In this case, operate NC programs using the DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen.

PROGRAM FOLDER screen

DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen

CNC file management

Edit operation

File transfer operation

Memory operation

(DNC operation is also available.)

NOTE 1 The Data Server for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A/B allows editing and memory

operation of NC programs stored on the memory card, so the method of managing files on the memory card differs from the file management method of Data Servers for the Series 16i-B and so on. Note that, therefore, the memory card of the 30i-A is not compatible with the memory cards of Data Servers for the Series 16i-B and so on.

3.DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS SPECIFICATION B-64014EN/04

- 14 -

NOTE 2 For operation and details of the PROGRAM FOLDER screen, refer to Chapter,

"PROGRAM MANAGEMENT" in the "OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System)."

3 For operation and details of the DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen, refer to Chapter 1, "OPERATING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS," in Part IV, "OPERATION."

3.1.1 File Names of CNC File Management You can assign a file name to a file managed in the CNC file management mode in the same way as for CNC memory. • Up to 32 characters • Alphabetic characters (in upper and lower cases), numeric characters, and four symbols (+, -, _,

and .)

NOTE 1 File names are case-sensitive. 2 Any file name or folder name cannot begin with a period (.). 3 It is impossible to assign the same name to a file and a folder.

File names and program numbers

When a file name assigned to a file consists of uppercase O and a numeric value, the file name is treated as a program number. Values ranging from 1 to 9999 can be used (values ranging from 1 to 99999999 can be used according to the parameter setting). A value beyond this range cannot be used for a file name in the program number format. Example) File names that can be used as program numbers “O0123” Program number 123 “O0001” Program number 1 “O3000” Program number 3000 “O9999” Program number 9999 File names that cannot be used as program numbers “ABC” (Does not have the format "O plus a numeric value") “o123” (Does not begin with uppercase letter "O") “O123.4” (Uses a character other than numeric characters)

NOTE When files on a Data Server are managed by program number, their program

numbers always consist of "O" plus a 4-digit number ("O" plus a 8-digit number). So, even if there are files managed with different file names such as "O1" and "O01" on a personal computer, their program numbers are regarded as the same when these files are transferred to the Data Server.

3.1.2 Number of Files Which Can Be Registered on a Data Server In the initial status, the maximum number of files which can be registered on a memory card on a Data Server is 2047 and the maximum file size is 512 MB. Each folder is counted as one file. The maximum number of files and the maximum file size can be changed using NC parameter No. 930.


- 15 -

For details, see Section 2.2, "RELATED NC PARAMETERS," in Part III, "SETTING."

3.1.3 Text Files and Binary Files You can store the following two types of files on a memory card on a Data Server: text files and binary files. For a text file, memory operation and edit operation as well as DNC operation can be performed by selecting it as a main program. For binary files, only DNC operation is available, but binary input operation in the high-speed remote buffer A format is available. If NC data other than an NC program is not handled as a binary file, it may not be able to be input or output correctly. NC data output and stored on a memory card on a Data Server from the CNC is automatically handled as a binary file. A file to be transferred from a personal computer to a memory card on a Data Server must be specified explicitly as a binary file. More specifically, for GET operation on a Data Server operation screen, you can use soft key [GET] or [BGET] to specify whether to handle the file as a text file or a binary file. When the Data Server is used as an FTP server, you can execute an ASCII (text file) command or a BIN (binary file) command on your personal computer (FTP client) to specify whether to handle the file as a text file or a binary file.

NOTE 1 An NC program stored as a text file is converted to an editable file format so that

the file can be edited on the CNC. For this reason, when a text file is read from the host computer to the memory card on the Data Server, then the file is transferred to the host computer, binary compatibility can no longer be maintained.

2 The file name of a text file and the O number or arbitrary file name in the program are always the same. See Section 3.5, “NC PROGRAM FORMAT” for details

3.2 DATA SERVER MODES Each Data Server mode determines the input or output destination when a Data Server is operated as a CNC external input/output device. You can select one of the following three modes.

NOTE Data Server modes are valid only when the Data Server is operated as an

external storage device of the CNC. In case of main program operation for editing and a memory operation and an M98-based subprogram call, programs on the memory card of the Data Server are selected regardless of the Data Server mode.

Storage mode

The memory card built into the Data Server is selected as the external input/output device. For example, when DNC operation or M198-based subprogram calling is executed, the relevant NC program is called from the memory card built into the Data Server. When input operation is executed for the Data Server, the relevant NC program is read from the memory card built into the Data Server. Conversely, when NC program output operation is executed for the Data Server, the output NC program is written on the memory card built into the Data Server.


- 16 -

Data Server Memory card

CNC memory Input

DNC operation

Output

FTP mode The host computer connected to the Data Server is selected as the external input/output device. For example, when DNC operation or M198-based subprogram calling is executed, the relevant NC program is called from the host computer. When input operation is executed for the Data Server, the relevant NC program is read from the host computer connected to the Data Server. Conversely, when NC program output operation is executed for the Data Server, the output NC program is directly written on the host computer.

Data Server

CNC memoryInput

DNC operation

Output

Host computer

CAUTION

1 In the FTP mode, an NC program is transferred from the host computer to the CNC. For this reason, if the line is disconnected during communication for some reason such as noise on the network, the disconnection directly affects the CNC operation as compared with the storage mode. Before DNC operation in the FTP mode, surely take measures to prevent noise and make sure that good communication conditions are present.

2 When feed hold is performed during DNC operation in the FTP mode, communication with the host computer may be stopped. In this case, the host computer may disconnect the communication. Perform feed hold during a trial run and completely confirm that the communication with the host computer is not disconnected.

Buffer mode

The host computer connected to the Data Server is selected as the external input device. In the buffer mode unlike the FTP mode, however, areas on the memory card built into the Data Server are used as intermediate buffers. For details of the buffer mode, see Section 2.3, "DETAILS OF THE BUFFER MODE," which is the following section. As the external output device, the memory card built into the Data Server is selected. When NC program output operation is performed, the operation equivalent to that in the storage mode is performed.


- 17 -

Data Server Memory card

CNC memory

DNC operation

Output

Input Intermediate

buffers

Host computer

NOTE 1 With the Series 30i/31i-A, to use the buffer mode, the buffer mode function

option (J728) is required. 2 With the Series 32i-A, the buffer mode cannot be used.

3.3 DETAILS OF THE BUFFER MODE In the buffer mode, two areas (areas A and B) are prepared on the memory card. While the NC program data stored in one area is being supplied to the CNC, the subsequent NC program data is read in the other area from the host computer using FTP transfer. When all data in the former area has been supplied to the CNC, the data in the latter area is supplied to the CNC. In the former area, which becomes empty, the subsequent NC program data is read from the host computer using FTP transfer. Repeating this operation enables an NC program larger than the capacity of the memory card to be handled. To use the buffer mode, however, the original NC program must be divided into some files on the host computer in advance. The size of a divided file must be smaller than half the remaining capacity of the memory card. If the size of a divided file is too large (for example, 100 MB or more), it takes much time to read the first file from the host computer and it also takes time until operation starts.

Using the buffer mode In the buffer mode, a file (such as Oxxxx) called by DNC operation or M198-based subprogram calling is a file list. The file list contains the names of files to be called in the order in which they are to be called. In the buffer mode, the Data Server sequentially calls the files specified in the file list from the host computer and supplies data to the CNC.

Contents of Oxxxx

file1 file2 file3 file4 file5

Hard disk get (FTP)

Program call Oxxxx Oxxxx



Memory card

Area A

Area B

CNC Data Server Host computer


- 18 -

Files (file1 to file5) specified in the file list on the host computer are stored on the memory card built into the Data Server using FTP transfer and supplied to the CNC. In the buffer mode, after the CNC issues a request to read an NC program to the Data Server, the specified file list is read from the host computer. When the first file has been read, the Data Server starts supplying data to the CNC. For this reason, it takes time from when the CNC issues a request to read a program to when the Data Server starts supplying data. While the Data Server is supplying the data in one area to the CNC, it stores data into the other area using FTP transfer. For this reason, divide the original program data so that two consecutive files can be contained on the memory card built into the Data Server. Although the data in one area has been supplied to the CNC, FTP transfer may not terminate for the other area. In this case, program calling terminates abnormally because the subsequent data cannot be supplied. You can use a parameter not to cause the abnormal termination. In the file list, you can specify any file name allowed by the host computer that consists of up to 255 single-byte alphanumeric characters. Be sure to specify at least one LF (0A in hexadecimal) or CR (0D in hexadecimal) following each file name in the file list to delimit the file names.

NOTE In the buffer mode, you can also register a new file on the memory card built into

the Data Server by the "NC program GET" or "NC program output" operation. By this operation, however, the remaining capacity of the memory card built into

the Data Server that is required for operation in the buffer mode may be exhausted, resulting in an error in DNC operation in the buffer mode.

For this reason, during DNC operation in the buffer mode, do not register any new file on the memory card built into the Data Server.

Dividing an NC program into files

To perform operation in the buffer mode, divide an original NC program into several files on the host computer and create a file list indicating the order in which the divided files are to be transferred in advance.


- 19 -

Example) Dividing an NC program into three files

%

O1234(SAMPLE);

:

:

:

X1.Y1.Z1.;

%

O1234(SAMPLE);

:

:

:

X1.Y1.Z1.;

X2.Y2.Z2.;

:

:

:

X3.Y3.Z3.;

X4.Y4.Z4.;

:

:

:

M30;

%

X2.Y2.Z2.;

:

:

:

X3.Y3.Z3.;

X4.Y4.Z4.;

:

:

:

M30;

%

file1

file2

file3

file1

Dividing the program into three files

file2

file3

O1234

As shown above, divide an original NC file into three files, file1, file2, and file3. Specify the divided file names in the file list (file name: O1234).

CAUTION In the above example, the NC program is divided into files so that any block is

not divided. You can divide a program at a point in a block. When dividing a program at a point in a block, be careful so that any unnecessary character is not inserted at the end of each file.

If an unnecessary character is inserted at the end of a file, the NC program may perform unexpected operation when executed. Be very careful when preparing and editing an NC program on the host computer.

NOTE 1 Divide an NC program into files so that each file size is about 20 to 30 MB. If the

file size is too large, it takes time until DNC operation starts. If the file size is too small, data transmission may stop between files and operation may stop.

2 Although you can divide an NC program at a point in a block, divide the program in block units whenever possible and retract the tool at the end of each divided file. This prevents data transmission from stopping at the end of a file and cutter marking from being made.

3 Store the file list and relevant divided files in the same directory on the same host computer.


- 20 -

3.4 OPERATION FROM A DATA SERVER

NOTE The Data Server functions produce an effect when large NC programs are

operated. Use the Data Server Functions to handle large NC programs.

Memory operation You can perform memory operation for an NC program on the memory card built into a Data Server in the same way as for an NC program in the CNC memory. You can also supply an NC program simultaneously for a multipath CNC system.

NOTE When memory operation is performed, a selected NC program on the Data

Server must be a text file. It is impossible to use a binary file for memory operation.

M198 subprogram operation

In the storage mode, you can perform M198 calling from the memory card built into a Data Server. In the FTP or buffer mode, you can perform M198 calling form the host computer. On the DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen, set an M198 folder in advance. When M198 calling is specified, the set M198 folder is searched for the target subprogram.

DNC operation In the storage mode, you can perform DNC operation from the memory card built into a Data Server. In the FTP or buffer mode, you can perform DNC operation from the host computer. On the DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen, set the file name for DNC operation in advance. When DNC operation starts, the set DNC operation file is called.

3.5 NC PROGRAM FORMAT NC programs prepared on the host computer must have the following format:

% TITLE ; O0001(COMMENT) ; ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ M30 ; %

An NC program starts with a start file mark (%). In the subsequent part (leader section) until EOB (;, program start) is encountered, a comment such as a title can be inserted as necessary. At the beginning of the program section, be sure to specify an O number or arbitrary file name consisting of up to 32 characters that is enclosed with “<” and “>” as the program name. This O number or file name must be used for management on the personal computer. If the O number or arbitrary file name in an NC program and the file name in the personal computer are not the same, the file name in the personal computer is used basically when the program is transferred from the personal computer to the Data Server (NOTE 2).


- 21 -

The semicolon ";" used at the end of each block means EOB (end of block) and actually functions as LF (LF: 0A in hexadecimal), CR-LF (CR: 0D in hexadecimal), or LF-CR-CR. The NC program must end with "M code ; %". When performing binary input operation, insert data for binary input operation, enclosed with the start code and end code of binary input operation, into the part ". . ." in the above figure. For details of the NC program configuration and binary input operation, refer to the relevant CNC OPERATOR’S MANUAL.

WARNING If an NC program prepared on the host computer does not use the program

format specified by the CNC, executing the NC program can cause an unpredictable operation. So, special care should be taken when an NC program is prepared on the host computer.

NOTE 1 Any unrecognizable character codes in an NC program registered as a text file

on a memory card on a Data Server are ignored. Do not use any unrecognizable character code. A 2-byte code used for Japanese and others may be recognized as an invalid character code when the system recognizes it on a byte-by-byte basis. Do not use any 2-byte code used for Japanese and others.

2 The system always manages each text file on the memory card so that the file name and the O number or arbitrary file name in the program are the same. For this reason, if they are different, the system sets the O number or arbitrary file name to the file name when transferring the file. The O number or arbitrary file name in the program can also be set as the file name when the file is transferred according to the parameter setting, however.


- 22 -

3.6 LIST FILE FORMAT In the LIST-GET, LIST-PUT, and LIST-DELETE functions described later, one of the following list file formats must be used:

Format 1 Format 3 % ; O0001(COMMENT) ; N111 ; N222 ; N333 ; : : N999 ; %

% ; O0001(COMMENT) ; (Dtsvr-File) ; (Dtsvr-File) ; (Dtsvr-File) ; : : (Dtsvr-File) ; %

Format 2 Format 4 % ; O0001(COMMENT) ; N111 (PC-File) ; N222 (PC-File) ; N333 (PC-File) ; : : N999 (PC-File) ; %

% ; O0001(COMMENT) ; (Dtsvr-File, PC-File) ; (Dtsvr-File, PC-File) ; (Dtsvr-File, PC-File) ; : : (Dtsvr-File, PC-File) ; %

Specifications common to all formats

<1> A list file begins with a start file mark "%". <2> In the next block, be sure to specify an O number. Assign this O number as the file name. A comment enclosed in parentheses "(" and ")" can be inserted between the O number and EOB. <3> In the subsequent blocks, specify files to be processed. <4> The list file must end with "%".

Specifications of format 1 The following describes the specifications of list file format 1: <1> This specification method applies when the file names of files to be processed have the format

"Oxxxx" (where "xxxx" denotes a 4-digit number). In this case, change "O" in file name "Oxxxx" to "N" when specifying the file name. The 4-digit number can be zero-suppressed. The example shows that files O0111, O0222, O0333, and so on up to O0999 are processed sequentially.

<2> The LIST-GET service transfers "Oxxxx" files stored on the built-in hard disk of the host computer to the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server without modifying file names "Oxxxx". The LIST-PUT service transfers "Oxxxx" files stored on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server to the built-in hard disk of the host computer without modifying file names "Oxxxx". The LIST-DELETE service deletes "Oxxxx" files stored on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server.


- 23 -

Specifications of format 2 The following describes the specifications of list file format 2: <1> This specification method applies when files to be processed are named "Oxxxx" (where "xxxx"

denotes a 4-digit number) on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server and are named arbitrary file names on the built-in hard disk of the host computer. In this case, change "O" in file name "Oxxxx" to "N" when specifying the file name on the Fast Data Server. The 4-digit number can be zero-suppressed. The example shows that files O0111, O0222, O0333, and so on up to O0999 are processed sequentially.

A file name on the built-in hard disk of the host computer can be specified by enclosing it with parentheses "(" and ")" following the corresponding "Nxxxx". The characters that can be used in file names depend on the OS of the host computer.

<2> The LIST-GET service transfers files with arbitrary file names "PC-File" stored on the built-in hard disk of the host computer to the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server as "Oxxxx" files. The LIST-PUT service transfers "Oxxxx" files stored on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server to the built-in hard disk of the host computer as files with arbitrary file names "PC-File". The LIST-DELETE service deletes "Oxxxx" files stored on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server.

Specifications of format 3

The following describes the specifications of list file format 3: <1> This specification method applies when the file names of files to be processed are arbitrary file

names. In this case, file names on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server and on the built-in hard disk of the host computer are assumed to be the same. Specify an arbitrary file name enclosed with parentheses "(" and ")". The characters that can be used in arbitrary file names are the following 66 ASCII characters only:

Numeric characters 0 to 9 Lowercase letters a to z Uppercase letters A to Z Four symbols (+, -, _, .) <2> The LIST-GET service transfers files with arbitrary file names "Dtsvr-File" stored on the built-in

hard disk of the host computer to the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server with the file names kept unchanged.

The LIST-PUT service transfers "Dtsvr-File" files stored on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server to the built-in hard disk of the host computer with the file names "Dtsvr-File" kept unchanged. The LIST-DELETE service deletes "Dtsvr-File" files stored on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server.

Specifications of format 4

The following describes the specifications of list file format 4: <1> This specification method applies when files to be processed have arbitrary file names. In this case,

file names on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server and file names on the built-in hard disk of the host computer are assumed to be different. Specify a file name on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server and a file name on the built-in hard disk of the host computer in parentheses, separated by a comma ",".

The characters that can be used in file names on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server are the following 66 ASCII characters only:

Numeric characters 0 to 9 Lowercase letters a to z Uppercase letters A to Z Four symbols (+, -, _, .) The characters that can be used in arbitrary file names on the built-in hard disk of the host computer

depend on the OS of the host computer. <2> The LIST-GET service transfers files with arbitrary file names "PC-File" stored on the built-in hard

disk of the host computer to the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server as "Dtsvr-File" files.


- 24 -

The LIST-PUT service transfers "Dtsvr-File" files stored on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server to files with file name "PC-File" on the built-in hard disk of the host computer.

The LIST-DELETE service deletes "Dtsvr-File" files stored on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server.

Limitations on file names in a list file

The following limitations apply when file names are specified in a list file: <1> The characters that can be used in file names on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server are

the following 66 ASCII characters only: Numeric characters 0 to 9 Lowercase letters a to z Uppercase letters A to Z Four symbols (+, -, _, .) The characters that can be used in arbitrary file names on the built-in hard disk of the host computer

depend on the OS of the host computer. <2> Up to 255 characters can be used as an arbitrary file name on the built-in hard disk of the host

computer. However, the number of characters that can actually be used depends on the OS of the host computer.

Storage locations of list files

The LIST-GET, LIST-PUT, and LIST-DELETE services are useful functions for managing NC programs in groups. The places where list files are prepared vary depending on the service to be executed. For the LIST-GET service, NC programs to be operated on are present on the built-in hard disk of the host computer, so list files are placed also on the built-in hard disk of the host computer. For the LIST-PUT and LIST-DELETE services, NC programs to be operated on are present on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server, so list files are also prepared on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server.

3.7 DATASERVER Explorer CONNECTION The following functions are added to FTP Server function of Data Server. • Increase of FTP Server connections.

The number of FTP server connections can be increased from five to ten by this feature. • Connection with Windows Explorer.

When you use the Windows Explorer as an FTP client software, you can make a new folder and overwrite a file. For the FTP client operation using the Explorer, see APPENDIX D.2, "OPERATION USING THE Explorer."

• Addition of maintenance screen for FTP server. You can monitor the state of FTP server. And you can disconnect the connection of FTP client forcedly. For the operation of the maintenance screen, see Section 2.5, "FTP SERVER MAINTENANCE" in Part VI, "MAINTENANCE."

NOTE 1 To use the DataServer Explorer connection, the DataServer Explorer connection

option (R953) is required. 2 Some FTP client software programs may each internally use two or more FTP

clients. Note, therefore, that the number of FTP clients is not always equal to the number of applications.

B-64014EN/04 SPECIFICATION 4.FOCAS2/Ethernet FUNCTIONS

- 25 -

4 FOCAS2/Ethernet FUNCTIONS The FOCAS2/Ethernet functions can remotely control and monitor the CNC by using a personal computer. For details, refer to the manual delivered with the FOCAS2 library software.

NOTE 1 In the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions, the CNC operates as a server and waits for a

communication start request from a personal computer that operates as a client. As communication with the personal computer starts, two sockets are used for

control and monitoring from the personal computer and for file transfer. 2 For the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions, the machine tool builder or end user can

create desired software operated on each personal computer using the FOCAS2 library software. Communication timing and other factors may vary depending on the personal computer environment. Before starting communication, completely confirm that there is no problem with the entire system including communication with the personal computer.

5.DNS/DHCP CLIENT FUNCTIONS SPECIFICATION B-64014EN/04

- 26 -

5 DNS/DHCP CLIENT FUNCTIONS If DNS/DHCP is used for communication setting of the Data Server functions and FOCAS2/Ethernet functions, Ethernet addresses (IP address and subnet mask) can be set at a time on the host computer to facilitate Ethernet address control.

DNS With the DNS function, a fully qualified domain name (e.g., www.fanuc.co.jp) can be specified instead of a hard-to-remember IP address just consisting of numbers (e.g., 192.168.0.10) when a TCP/IP communication destination is to be specified.

NOTE To use the DNS function, a personal computer having the DNS server function is

additionally required. See Chapter 4, "SETTING THE DNS/DHCP FUNCTION," in Part III, "SETTING," and APPENDIX C, "EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS/DHCP."

DHCP

With the DHCP function, Ethernet addresses (IP address and subnet mask) that need to be set on the CNC can be set on the host computer.

NOTE To use the DHCP function, a personal computer having the DHCP server

function is additionally required. See Chapter 4, "SETTING THE DNS/DHCP FUNCTION," in Part III, "SETTING," and Appendix C, "EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS/DHCP."


- 27 -

6.MACHINE REMOTEDIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS

6 MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS

With the machine remote diagnosis functions, checking of the internal CNC status, ladder program editing, and other operations can be performed as necessary by using a personal computer through a LAN. For details, refer to “Machine Remote Diagnosis Package OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-63734EN).”


- 28 -

7. UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION

7 UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION With the unsolicited messaging function, the CNC transmits messages (CNC/PMC data) in an unsolicited manner to application software on the personal computer according to a command from an NC program or ladder program. By using this function, the need for application processing on the personal computer to periodically inquire about the state of the CNC can be eliminated.

When the conventional function is used

Application checks for CNC/PMC data changes.

Application software

Response

Inquiry

When the unsolicited messaging function is used

NC program or ladder program checks for CNC/PMC data changes.

アプリケーションソフトウェア

Application receives notification from CNC.

Application software

Notification

NC program or ladder program

NOTE The unsolicited messaging function is a part of the FOCAS2/Ethernet function.

Unsolicited messaging function execution procedure

The execution procedure for the unsolicited messaging function is described below. 1 Preparation on the personal computer Create an application using the FOCAS2 function for the unsolicited messaging function and install

the unsolicited message server on a personal computer. For the method of creating an application using the FOCAS2 function for the unsolicited messaging function and the method of installing the unsolicited message server, refer to Chapter 5, "UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION", in "FANUC Open CNC FOCAS1/FOCAS2 CNC/PMC Data Window Library Operator's Manual".

2 Preparation on the CNC Create an NC program or ladder program for controlling unsolicited messaging. For the method of creating an NC program or ladder program, see Section 6.2, "EXECUTING THE

UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION" in Part III, “OPERATION.” 3 Setting of the communication parameters for the unsolicited messaging function

To use the unsolicited messaging function, the following communication parameter settings are needed: (1) Setting for using the FOCAS2/Ethernet function (2) Setting of the parameters for the unsolicited messaging function


- 29 -

7.UNSOLICITED MESSAGINGFUNCTION

For (2), a choice can be made from two modes of setting: CNC mode for setting on the CNC screen and the PC mode for setting on the personal computer.

For the setting method of (1) and (2), see Section 6.1, "SETTING OF THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION” in Part III, “OPERATION.”

4 Starting the NC program or ladder program

Start the NC program or ladder program created in step 2, "Preparation on the CNC". At this time, no unsolicited message is transmitted to the personal computer until step 5, "Starting the unsolicited messaging function", is executed.

5 Starting the unsolicited messaging function Execute the FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstart on the personal computer. This execution places

the CNC in the state (named "Ready") where a transmission request from the NC program or ladder program is awaited. Each time a transmission request is made from the NC program or ladder program, an unsolicited message is automatically transmitted to the personal computer.

6 Ending the unsolicited messaging function To end unsolicited message transmission, execute the FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstop on the

personal computer. This execution places the CNC in the state (named "Not Ready") where no unsolicited message is transmitted even when a request for transmission is made from the NC program or ladder program.


- 30 -

8. FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION

8 FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION The FTP file transfer function is operated from the CNC to transfer a file. It works as an FTP client and communicates with the FTP server on the host computer.

NOTE 1 Before communicating with the host computer using the FTP file transfer

function, completely confirm that there is no problem with the entire system including communication with the personal computer because the personal computer environment may affect communication operation.

2 To operate the host computer as the FTP server, FTP server software must be operated on the host computer.

III. SETTING

B-64014EN/04 SETTING

- 33 -

1.SETTING THE COMMUNICATION FUNCTION

1 SETTING THE COMMUNICATION FUNCTION

This part describes the settings required to operate the following Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server functions: • Data Server functions • FOCAS2/Ethernet functions • CNC screen display functions • Machine remote diagnosis functions • Unsolicited messaging function • FTP file transfer function

Notes on using the functions for the first time

CAUTION When setting the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server for the first time, carefully set

data such as an IP address and conduct a sufficient communication test, consulting with your network administrator.

If data such as an IP address is not set correctly, a communication failure can affect the entire network. Take sufficient care.

The load on the network may become greater than expected depending on the performance of the personal computer. Before using the functions, completely confirm that there is no problem with the entire system including communication with the personal computer.

1.1 BACKING UP/RESTORING COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS

This section explains how to back up communication parameters for Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server to the memory card and to restore them from the memory card.

1 Press the function key .

2 Soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B) appear. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)

3 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] to display the Ethernet Setting screen. 4 Press the soft keys [COMMON] - [(OPRT)] and then [+]. The soft keys [BACKUP], [RESTORE],

[ALL BACKUP], and [ALL RESTORE] for backing up or restoring communication parameters appear.

5 Press the soft key [BACKUP], [RESTORE], [ALL BACKUP], or [ALL RESTORE]. The soft keys [EXECUTE] and [CANCEL] appear.

6 Enter the name of a file to be backed up or restored in the key-in buffer, and press the soft key [EXECUTE]. The operation selected at the above step is executed. The character string “EXECUTING” blinks during execution.

SETTING B-64014EN/04

- 34 -

1. SETTING THE COMMUNICATION FUNCTION

NOTE With the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B, the USB memory can be used in addition to

the memory card.

BACKUP The communication parameters for Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server are saved from the SRAM of the CNC main unit to the memory card. If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, the specified file name is used when the communication parameters are saved to the memory card. If no file name is specified, the file name “ETHERBRD.MEM” is used.

RESTORE The communication parameters for Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server are read from the memory card and saved to the SRAM of the CNC main unit. If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, the specified file name is used when the communication parameters are read from the memory card. If no file name is specified, the file name “ETHERBRD.MEM” is used.

ALL BACKUP All valid communication parameters for embedded Ethernet, Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server, PROFIBUS-DP master/slave, DeviceNet master/slave, FL-net, and CC-Link remote device are saved from the SRAM of the CNC main unit to the memory card. If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, the specified file name is used when the communication parameters are saved to the memory card. If no file name is specified, the file name “NETWORK.MEM” is used.

ALL RESTORE All valid communication parameters for embedded Ethernet, Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server, PROFIBUS-DP master/slave, DeviceNet master/slave, FL-net, and CC-Link remote device are read from the memory card and saved to the SRAM of the CNC main unit. However, if a communication function related to a valid communication parameter is disabled in the CNC, that parameter is not saved to the SRAM.


- 35 -

1.SETTING THE COMMUNICATION FUNCTION

If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, the specified file name is used when the parameters are read from the memory card. If no file name is specified, the file name “NETWORK.MEM” is used.

CAUTION While an external input/output device such as the memory card or USB memory

is being accessed, do not turn the power to the CNC off or remove the external input/output device. Doing so may damage the external input/output device.

NOTE 1 A backup or restore operation for communication parameters can only be

performed in the MDI mode, EDIT mode, or emergency stop state. 2 When communication parameters are restored, an alarm condition occurs that

requires power-off.

Related NC parameters 0020 I/O CHANNEL: Input/output device selection, or interface number for a foreground input/output device

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 4: Selects the memory card as the input/output device.

17: Selects the USB memory as the input/output device. It is not possible to backup and restore the communication parameters by using other devices.

NOTE In case of Series 30i/31i/32i-A, the memory card is used

regardless for this NC parameter.


- 36 -

2. SETTING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS

2 SETTING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS This chapter describes the communication setting for the Data Server functions.

Notes on using the Data Server functions

CAUTION 1 Operation cannot be guaranteed for any memory card that is not recommended

by FANUC. 2 When using the Fast Data Server for the first time, be sure to format the memory

card, set parameters, then turn the power off then back on. If an attempt is made to use the Data Server functions without following these steps, normal operation is not guaranteed.

3 Before performing FTP communication using the Fast Data Server for the first time, consult with your network administrator, carefully set a network address and other items, and conduct communication tests thoroughly. Any error in settings such as a network address setting can lead to an adverse influence such as a communication failure on the entire network.

Be very careful about any communication failure. If a Data Server is used on a network involved with a communication failure, a communication failure intermittently occurs in the Data Server, which may cause a CNC system error.

4 When the power to the CNC is turned off during access to the memory card, files stored on the memory card may be destroyed. So, be careful not to turn off the power to the CNC during access to the memory card.

5 In preparation for damage to the memory card, always take backup copies of the files stored on the memory card to the host computer.

NOTE 1 With the Data Server functions (FTP client), a single CNC can connect only one

FTP server. 2 With the Data Server functions (FTP server), a single CNC can connect up to

five FTP clients. However, some FTP client software programs may each internally use two or more FTP clients. Note, therefore, that the number of FTP clients is not always equal to the number of applications.

If the DataServer Explorer connection is enabled, one CNC can connect up to ten FTP clients. For the DataServer Explorer connection, see Section 3.7, "DATASERVER Explorer CONNECTION," in Part II, "SPECIFICATION."

3 The Data Server functions do not support passive mode (PASV command).

2.1 OPERATING THE DATA SERVER SETTING SCREEN This section describes the setting screen for operating the Data Server functions.

Procedure 1 Press the function key .


- 37 -

2.SETTING THE DATA SERVERFUNCTIONS


3 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] to display the Ethernet Setting screen. 4 Press soft keys [COMMON] and [DATA SERVER] and then enter parameters for the items that

appear.

COMMON screen (BASIC) Press soft key [COMMON] to display the COMMON screen (BASIC).

COMMON screen (BASIC)

Setting item

Item Description IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the Fast Data Server.

(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100") SUBNET MASK Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network.

(Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0") ROUTER IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the router.

Specify this item when the network contains a router. (Example of specification format: "192.168.0.253")

Display item

Item Description MAC ADDRESS Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server MAC address

NOTE The second page (detail screen) of the COMMON screen is to be set when the

DNS/DHCP function is used. For details, see "SETTING THE DNS/DHCP FUNCTION" provided later.

Data Server screens (CONNECT 1, CONNECT 2, CONNECT 3)

Press soft key [DATA SERVER] to display the Data Server screen. By using page keys , the three host computers at connection destinations 1, 2, and 3 can be

set.


- 38 -


Data Server screens (for connection destination 1)

Setting item

Item Description HOST NAME Specify the IP address of the host computer.

(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.200") PORT NUMBER Specify the port number. Usually, set 21 because the FTP communication is used. USER NAME Specify the name of the user to log on to the host computer using FTP. (A user

name of up to 31 characters can be specified.) PASSWORD Specify the password for the above user name.

The password must always be specified. LOGIN FOLDER Specify a work folder to be used when the user logs in to the host computer. (Up to

127 characters can be specified.) If no data is set, the home folder set on the host computer is used as a login folder.

Operation

Select a connection destination. 1 Press soft key [(OPRT)] to display soft key [HOST SELECT]. Then, press soft key [HOST

SELECT] to display soft keys [CONECT 1], [CONECT 2], and [CONECT 3].

2 Press one of soft keys [CONECT 1], [CONECT 2], and [CONECT 3] according to the host computer to which you want to make a connection. The screen title of connection destination 1, 2 or 3 is displayed in reverse video. The screen title displayed in reverse video indicates the connection destination host computer.

When connection destination 1 is selected


- 39 -


Data Server screens (FTP SERVER) Press soft key [DATA SERVER] to display the Data Server screen. By using page keys , the FTP server setting screen is displayed after the connection

destination 1, 2, or 3 screen.

Data Server screens (FTP SERVER)

Setting item

Item Description USER NAME Specify a user name to be used when the host computer logs in to the Data Server.

(A user name of up to 31 characters can be specified.) PASSWORD Specify the password for the above user name.

The password must always be specified. LOGIN FOLDER Specify a work folder to be used when the host computer logs in to the Data Server.

(Up to 127 characters can be specified.) If no data is set, the home folder (home directory) is used as a login folder.

Data Server MODE screen (SETTING)

Press soft key [DS MODE] to display the Data Server MODE screen (SETTING). The current mode can be checked and changed.


- 40 -


Data Server screen (SETTING)

Display item

Item Description CHANNELS Displays the number of channels currently being used. MODE Displays the currently set Data Server mode.

STORAGE MODE FTP MODE BUFFER MODE

Operation

The Data Server mode can be changed. 1 Press soft key [(OPRT)] to display soft keys [STRAGE MODE], [FTP MODE], and [BUFFER

MODE].

2 To change the mode to a desired mode, press the soft key of the desired mode.

NOTE 1 With the Series 30i/31i-A, to use the buffer mode, the buffer mode function

option (J728) is required. 2 With the Series 32i-A, the buffer mode cannot be used.

Data Server MODE screen (MAINTENANCE)

Press soft key [DS MODE] and press page keys to display maintenance information for each

channel.


- 41 -


Data Server MODE screen (MAINTENANCE)

Display item

Item Description CHANNEL Interface number of the buffer used for transferring NC programs between the CNC

and Data Server. For example, a channel is assigned to each path.

EMPTY COUNTER Used for maintenance. This item indicates the number of cases where the buffer becomes empty while NC programs are being transferred from the Data Server to the CNC.

TOTAL SIZE Used for maintenance. This item indicates the total number of bytes transferred when an NC program is transferred from the Data Server.

WRITE POINTER READ POINTER

Used for maintenance. This item indicates the buffer use status when NC programs are transferred from the Data Server to the CNC.


- 42 -


Data Server FORMAT screen Press soft key [DS FORMAT] to display the format screen of the memory card built into the Data Server.

Data Server FORMAT screen

Display item

Item Description DEVICE NAME Indicates the storage media currently being used by the Data Server.

"ATA" or "NONE" is indicated. ATA : A memory card is mounted. None : No memory card is mounted.

FORMAT TYPE Indicates the format type of the memory card. "CNC FILE" or "---" is displayed. When "---" is displayed, check whether the memory card is mounted properly and is formatted correctly.

CHECK DISK Indicates the check result. When no check is made : “-----“ When the check result is normal : “OK” When the check result is abnormal : “NG”

Procedure (CHECK DISK)

1 Press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [CHECK DISK].

2 Press soft key [EXEC] to check the format of the memory card and display the check result.

CAUTION If the check result is abnormal, determine the cause of trouble from an error

message displayed on the ETHERNET LOG screen and back up the files stored on the memory card immediately. Then, try to reformat the memory card.


- 43 -


NOTE 1 An error occurs if other Data Server functions are operated when a check disk is

made. 2 Also when a program on the memory card of the Data Server is selected as a

main program, the check disk operation cannot be performed.

Procedure (CNC FORMAT) 1 Press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [CNC FORMAT].

2 Press soft key [EXEC] to format the memory card built into the Fast Data Server.

CAUTION 1 Do not turn off the power to the CNC when the memory card is being formatted.

Otherwise, the memory card can be damaged. 2 When the memory card is formatted, all files held on the memory card are

erased.

NOTE 1 An error occurs if other Data Server functions are operated when the memory

card is formatted. 2 Also when a program on the memory card of the Data Server is selected as a

main program, the memory card cannot be formatted.

2.2 RELATED NC PARAMETERS The NC parameters related to the Data Server functions are described below.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0000 TVC

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit path #0 TVC When a file is transferred from the personal computer to the Data Server, a TV check is:

0: Not performed. 1: Performed.

NOTE This parameter is valid only for text files. For text files, see Subsection 3.1.3, "Text Files and Binary Files" in

Part II, "SPECIFICATION."

0020 I/O CHANNEL : Input/output device selection

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 5 : Selects the Data Server as the input/output device.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

0100 NCR CRF CTV

[Input type] Setting input


- 44 -


[Data type] Bit #1 CTV When a file is transferred from the personal computer to the Data Server, character

counting for the TV check in program comment parts is: 0: Performed. 1: Not performed.

#2 CRF When a file is output from the Data Server to the personal computer, EOB (end of block) is: 0: Set as specified by parameter NCR (bit 3 of parameter No. 100). 1: Set to "CR" "LF".

#3 NCR When a file is output from the Data Server to the personal computer, EOB (end of block) is: 0: Set to "LF" "CR" "CR". 1: Set to "LF".

NOTE This parameter is valid only for text files. For text files, see Subsection 3.1.3, "Text Files and Binary Files" in

Part II, "SPECIFICATION."

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0904 LCH BWT

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #0 BWT If FTP communication is behind data supply during DNC operation in the buffer mode of

the Data Server: 0: An error is caused. 1: No error is caused and DNC operation continues after waiting the completion of

FTP communication. #7 LCH In the LIST-GET service of the Data Server, when a list file specifies 1025 or more files:

0: A check for duplicated file names is performed. 1: A check for duplicated file names is not performed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

0905 DSF PCH

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #1 PCH At the start of communication of the Data Server, FTP file transfer function, or machine

remote diagnosis functions, checking for the presence of the server using PING is: 0: Performed. 1: Not performed.

NOTE Usually, set Performed (0). When the presence of the server using PING is not checked by

setting 1, it may take several tens of seconds until an error is recognized due to no server on the network.

For mainly security reasons, a personal computer may be set so that it does not respond to the PING command. Set 1 when the Data Server communicates with such a personal computer.

#3 DSF When an NC program is stored on the memory card of the Data Server:

0: The file name takes priority. 1: The program name in the NC program takes priority.


- 45 -


NOTE This parameter is valid only when files on a personal computer are

registered as text files on the memory card on the Data Server by CNC operation.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

0906 SCM OVW

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #2 OVW When the Data Server is operated as an FTP server, if a file having the same name as a

file to be transferred from the FTP client is already stored in the memory card of Data Server: 0: An error is caused. 1: No error is caused and the existing file is overwritten.

NOTE To use this parameter, the DataServer Explorer connection option

is required.

#5 SCM As the mode for accessing the memory card on the Data Server: 0: The mode supported by the memory card that is automatically determined is used. 1: The conventional PIO mode 2 is used.

NOTE 1 When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before

operation is continued. 2 This parameter is only available with the Series 30i/31i/32i-B.

0921 Selects the host computer 1 OS. 0922 Selects the host computer 2 OS. 0923 Selects the host computer 3 OS.

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 2

0: Windows95/98/Me/NT/2000/XP/Vista/7. 1: UNIX/VMS. 2: Linux.

NOTE Some FTP server software may not depend on the OS. Therefore,

the valid file list may not be displayed by the above setting.

0924 FOCAS2/Ethernet function wait time setting [Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word [Unit of data] msec [Valid data range] 0 to 32767

Specifies the wait time (in 1 ms units) for the FOCAS2/Ethernet service when it is used together with the Data Server functions. If 0 is specified, a wait time of 1 ms is assumed.


- 46 -


0929 Specifies the attribute of the file to be transferred in operating as an FTP server. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 2

Specifies whether to use the file attribute specified in the FTP TYPE command when the Data Server operates as an FTP server.

No.929 Meaning 0 Uses the file attribute specified in the TYPE command from the FTP client. 1 Fixes the attribute to text. 2 Fixes the attribute to binary.

0930 Maximum number of files that can be registered to the memory card of the Data Server and maximum size per file that can be registered

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word

[Valid data range] 0, 10 to 15 No.930 Maximum number of files Maximum size per file

0 2047 512MB 10 511 2048MB 11 1023 1024MB 12 2047 512MB 13 4095 256MB 14 8191 128MB 15 16383 64MB

NOTE 1 When the memory card is formatted after this parameter is set, the

maximum number of files and maximum size per file are changed. 2 Each folder is counted as one file. 3 This parameter is valid when the series and edition of the Data

Server function software are edition 11 or later of series 6569.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3107 SOR

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit path #4 SOR In the Data Server FILE LIST screen, files are displayed:

0: In the order of zero-suppressed program number. 1: In the order of program name.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

3233 PDM

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #1 PDM When the Data Server FILE LIST screen is displayed:

0: The setting of an M198 operation folder/DNC operation file is enabled. 1: The setting of a foreground/background folder is enabled.


- 47 -


NOTE When an M198 external subprogram call or DNC operation is

performed on the Data Server, set this bit to 0. For the foreground and background folders, refer to Chapter, "PROGRAM MANAGEMENT" in the OPERATOR’S MANUAL of the CNC.

2.3 EXAMPLE OF SETTING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS An example of setting for operating the Data Server functions is given below. In this example of setting, one personal computer is connected to two CNCs through a Data Server.

100BASE-TX (or 10BASE-T)

CNC 2

CNC 1 PC 1

HUB

CNC 1 CNC 2

IP ADDRESS 192.168.0.100 192.168.0.101

SUBNET MASK 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0

ROUTER IP ADDRESS None None

PORT NUMBER 21 21

IP ADDRESS 192.168.0.200 192.168.0.200

USER NAME user user

PASSWORD user user

CONNECT 1

LOGIN FOLDER None None

DATA SERVER MODE Storage Storage

NC Parameter NO. 20 5 5

PC 1 IP address 192.168.0.200 Sub-net mask 255.255.255.0 Default gateway None User name user Password user Home folder default

"Microsoft TCP/IP property" of the personal computer (Windows2000/WindowsXP) is used for setting.

"User account” of the personal computer (Windows2000/WindowsXP) is used for setting.

"Internet service manager" of the personal computer (Windows2000/WindowsXP) is used for setting.

The Data Server setting screen is used for setting.

NC parameter setting

The common setting screen is used for setting.

The Data Server mode setting screen is used for setting.


- 48 -

3. SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet FUNCTIONS

3 SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet FUNCTIONS

This chapter describes the setting of parameters for the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions and CNC screen display functions.

CAUTION Before performing communication using the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions for the

first time, consult with your network administrator, carefully set a network address and other items, and conduct communication tests thoroughly. Any error in settings such as a network address setting can lead to an adverse influence such as a communication failure on the entire network.

Be very careful about any communication failure. If the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions are used on a network involved with a communication failure, a communication failure intermittently occurs in FOCAS2/Ethernet, which may cause a CNC system error.

Note on using the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions

NOTE With the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions, up to 20 FOCAS2/Ethernet clients can be connected to one CNC.

Note on using the CNC screen display functions

NOTE With the CNC screen display functions, up to 1 CNC screen display function client can be connected to one CNC.

3.1 OPERATING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet SETTING SCREEN This section describes the setting screen for operating the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions and CNC screen display functions.



3 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] to display the Ethernet Setting screen. 4 Press soft keys [COMMON] and [FOCAS2] and then enter parameters for the items that appear.


- 49 -

3.SETTING THE FOCAS2/EthernetFUNCTIONS



Setting item

Item Description IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the Fast Ethernet/ Fast Data Server.




Display item

Item Description MAC ADDRESS Fast Ethernet/ Fast Data Server MAC address


DNS/DHCP function is used. For details, see Chapter 4, "SETTING THE DNS/DHCP FUNCTION" provided later.


- 50 -

3. SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet FUNCTIONS

FOCAS2 screen Press soft key [FOCAS2] to display the FOCAS2 screen.

FOCAS2 screen

Setting item

Item Description PORT NUMBER (TCP) Specifies the port No. to be used by the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions and CNC

screen display functions, within a range of 5001 to 65535. PORT NUMBER (UDP) Set 0. TIME INTERVAL Set 0.

3.2 RELATED NC PARAMETERS 0020 I/O CHANNEL : Input/output device selection

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 6 : Selects the FOCAS2/Ethernet as the input/output device. This parameter is required

only for DNC operation, however.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0905 DNE

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #1 DNE During DNC operation using the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions, the termination of DNC

operation is: 0: Waited. 1: Not waited. (FOCAS2/HSSB compatible specification)

0924 FOCAS2/Ethernet waiting time setting

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word [Unit of data] msec [Valid data range] 0 to 32767

When the FOCAS2/Ethernet and Data Server functions are used simultaneously, this parameter sets the FOCAS2/Ethernet function waiting time in milliseconds.


- 51 -

3.SETTING THE FOCAS2/EthernetFUNCTIONS

When a value of 0 is set, the functions operate with assuming that 1 millisecond is specified.

3.3 EXAMPLE OF SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet FUNCTIONS

An example of setting for operating the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions is given below. In this example of setting, one personal computer is connected to two CNCs through a FOCAS2/Ethernet.


CNC 2

CNC 1 PC 1

HUB

CNC 1 CNC 2

IP ADDRESS 192.168.0.100 192.168.0.101

SUBNET MASK 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0

ROUTER IP ADDRESS None None

PORT NUMBER (TCP) 8193 8193

PORT NUMBER (UDP) 0 0

TIME INTERVAL 0 0

PC 1

IP address 192.168.0.200

Sub-net mask 255.255.255.0

Default gateway None

NC IP address 192.168.0.100 CNC 1

NC TCP port number 8193

NC IP address 192.168.0.101 CNC 2

NC TCP port number 8193

"Microsoft TCP/IP property" of the personal computer (Windows 95/98/NT/2000/XP) is used for setting.

Specify these items with the arguments of the data window library function "cnc_allclibhnd13."

The FOCAS2 setting screen is used for setting.



- 52 -

4.SETTING THE DNS/DHCP FUNCTION

4 SETTING THE DNS/DHCP FUNCTION This chapter describes the setting of the DNS/DHCP function.

4.1 SETTING OF DNS This section describes the setting procedure for operating DNS client function.

Procedure 1 Enable the DNS client function according to Section 4.3, "RELATED NC PARAMETERS"

provided later. 2 Set up the DNS server on the host computer. For information about setup, see Appendix C,

"EXAMPLE OF DNS/DHCP SETUP." 3 Make a connection to the host computer where the DNS server operates (hereinafter referred to as

the "DNS server") and restart the CNC, then press the function key .

4 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B), then press [COMMON] to display the COMMON (DETAIL) screen.

5 As the DNS IP address, enter the IP address of the DNS server.

COMMON screen (DETAIL)

Press soft key [COMMON] then page keys to display the COMMON (DETAIL) screen. Set

the setting items for DNS IP addresses.


Setting item

Item Description DNS IP ADDRESS 1, 2 Up to two DNS server IP addresses can be set.

The CNC searches for a DNS server in the order from DNS IP address 1 to 2.


- 53 -


4.2 SETTING OF DHCP This section describes the setting procedure for operating DHCP client function.

Procedure 1 Enable the DHCP client function according to Section 4.3 "RELATED NC PARAMETERS"

provided later. 2 Set up the DHCP server on the host computer. For information about setup, see Appendix C,

"EXAMPLE OF DNS/DHCP SETUP." 3 Make a connection to the host computer where the DHCP server operates (hereinafter referred to as

the "DHCP server") and restart the CNC, then press the function key .

4 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B), then press [COMMON] to display the COMMON screen.

5 If the DHCP client function of the CNC is enabled and a connection is made successfully with the DHCP server, the following items are set automatically from the DHCP server: • IP ADDRESS • SUBNET MASK • ROUTER IP ADDRESS • DNS IP ADDRESS • DOMAIN

If an attempt to make a connection with the DHCP server fails, "DHCP ERROR" is indicated in each item.

6 Moreover, if the DNS client function is enabled at the same time and the DHCP server interacts with the DNS server (the DNS server supports dynamic DNS), enter a desired host name.

COMMON screens (BASIC, DETAIL)

Press soft key [COMMON] then page keys to display the COMMON screens (BASIC and

DETAIL). If a connection is made successfully with the DHCP server and setting data is acquired, the following is displayed:

When a connection with the DHCP server has been made successfully

If no host name is set, the CNC automatically sets a host name in the format "NC-<MAC address>".


- 54 -


Example of host name automatically set

If an attempt to make a connection with the DHCP server fails, the following is displayed:

When an attempt to make a connection with the DHCP server has failed

Check item

Item Description IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK ROUTER IP ADDRESS DNS IP ADDRESS 1, 2 DOMAIN

If a connection is made successfully with the DHCP server, data acquired from the DHCP server is displayed. If an attempt to make a connection with the DHCP server fails, "DHCP ERROR" is displayed.

Setting item

Item Description HOST NAME Enter a desired CNC host name.

If the DHCP server interacts with the DNS server, this host name is posted to the DNS server. If no host name is set, "NC-<MAC address>" is automatically set.

Example of host name automatically set: NC-00E0E4004CF9

Display item



- 55 -


4.3 RELATED NC PARAMETERS #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

0904 DHCP DNS

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #5 DNS The DNS client function is:

0: Not used. 1: Used.

#6 DHC The DHCP client function is: 0: Not used. 1: Used.

NOTE When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be

turned off before operation is continued.

4.4 EXAMPLE OF SETTING DNS/DHCP

NOTE This section provides examples of setting for Windows 2000 Server which

supports dynamic DNS.

4.4.1 When DNS/DHCP is Used with the Data Server When a connection is made with the FTP server of the host computer (hereinafter referred to as the "FTP server") by using the Data Server function, the IP address of the CNC can be set from the DHCP server by enabling the DHCP client function of the CNC. Moreover, by enabling the DNS client function of the CNC, an FTP server can be specified with a host name instead of an IP address.

Example of specifying a connection destination with a host name (FTPServer-1)


- 56 -


Setting the DNS server / DHCP server Operating system

It is recommended to use Windows 2000 Server as the operating system.

Setting the DHCP server In the database of the DHCP server, set the following items: • Range of IP addresses to be managed by the DHCP server • Subnet mask to be managed by the DHCP server • IP address for DNS server • Domain The DHCP server enables the function for updating the database of the DNS server. For DHCP server setting, see Section C.1, "EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DHCP SERVER OF Windows 2000 Server" in Appendix C, "EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS/DHCP."

Setting the DNS server The DNS server allows the DHCP server to update the database of the DNS server. For DNS server setting, see Section C.2, "EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS SERVER OF Windows 2000 Server" in Appendix C, "EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS/DHCP."

Setting the FTP server For FTP server setting, see Appendix B, "EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP."

Setting the CNC Parameter

To enable the DNS client function, set bit 5 of NC parameter No. 904 to 1. To enable the DHCP client function, set bit 6 of NC parameter No. 904 to 1.

4.4.2 When DHCP is Used with the FTP Server Function of the Data Server

The Data Server (FTP server function) can be accessed by specifying a host name from an FTP client where an FTP client operates (hereinafter referred to as an "FTP client"), using the interaction between the DHCP server and DNS server operating with Windows 2000 Server. The DHCP client function of the CNC is enabled.

Flow of operation When the system is initialized or the system configuration is modified

1 A host name is set on the CNC. 2 When the power is turned on, the Data Server posts the host name to the DHCP server. 3 The DHCP server assigns an IP address, and the table of correspondence between CNC host names

and CNC IP addresses is updated.

When operation is performed from an FTP client 1 An FTP client inquires of the DNS server about the IP address of a CNC. 2 The FTP client acquires the IP address of the CNC. 3 The FTP client communicates with the FTP server of the CNC by using the IP address of the CNC.


- 57 -


CNC-1

(1) Sets the name.

(2) Posts CNC-1 atpower-on time.

(4) Inquires about the IPaddress of CNC-1.

(5) Returns the IP address.

Windows 2000 ServerDHCP server /DNS server

FTP client

(3) Assigns an IP address to CNC-1.

(6) Performs communication.

The FTP clientspecifies a CNCby its name(CNC-1) insteadof its IP address.

Setting the DNS server/DHCP server Operating system

It is recommended to use Windows 2000 Server as the operating system. (The DNS server and DHCP server supporting dynamic DNS need to operate.)




To enable the DHCP client function, set bit 6 of NC parameter No. 904 to 1. As a host name, set a desired name. Otherwise, a name automatically set by the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server is used.

4.4.3 When DHCP is Used with the FOCAS2/Ethernet Function Ethernet parameters can be set with no setting performed from the CNC, using the interaction between the DHCP server and DNS server operating with Windows 2000 Server. The DHCP client function of the CNC is enabled.

Flow of operation When the system is initialized or the system configuration is modified

1 A host name is set on the CNC.


- 58 -


2 When the power is turned on, the CNC posts the host name to the DHCP server. 3 The DHCP server assigns an IP address, and the table of correspondence between CNC host names

and CNC IP addresses is updated.

When FOCAS2/Ethernet application software is executed 1 The user's application inquires of the DNS server about the IP address of a CNC. 2 The user's application acquires the IP address of the CNC. 3 The user's application communicates with the CNC by using the IP address of the CNC.

CNC-1

(1) Sets the name.

(2) Posts CNC-1 at power-on time.

(4) Inquires about the IP address of CNC-1.

(5) Returns the IP address.

Windows 2000 ServerDHCP server / DNS server

User's application software (FOCAS2/Ethernet)

(3) Assigns an IP address to CNC-1.

(6) Performs communication.

The application software specifies a CNC by its name (CNC-1) instead of its IP address.

Setting the DNS server/DHCP server Operating system

It is recommended to use Windows 2000 Server as the operating system. (The DNS server and DHCP server supporting dynamic DNS need to operate.)




To enable the DHCP client function, set bit 6 of NC parameter No. 904 to 1. As a host name, set a desired name. Otherwise, a name automatically set by the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server is used.


- 59 -


When the DHCP function is enabled, the FOCAS2/Ethernet-related parameters are automatically set if bit 3 of NC parameter No. 904 is set to 0. If bit 3 of NC parameter No. 904 is set to 1, the parameters for i CELL communication are automatically set.


- 60 -

5. SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS

5 SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS

This chapter describes the setting of parameters for the machine remote diagnosis functions. For explanation of the entire machine remote diagnosis functions, refer to "Machine Remote Diagnosis Package OPERATOR'S MANUAL (B-63734EN)."

5.1 OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS SETTING SCREEN

This section describes the setting screen for operating the machine remote diagnosis functions.



3 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] to display the Ethernet Setting screen. 4 Press soft keys [COMMON], [FOCAS2], and [REMOTE DIAG] and then enter parameters for the

items that appear.



Setting item

Item Description IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the Fast Ethernet / Fast Data Server.


(Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0")


- 61 -

5.SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS

Item Description ROUTER IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the router.


Display item

Item Description MAC ADDRESS Fast Ethernet / Fast Data Server MAC address


DNS/DHCP function is used. For details, see Chapter 4 "SETTING THE DNS/DHCP FUNCTION".


Press soft key [COMMON] then page keys to display the COMMON (DETAIL) screen. Set



Setting item




- 62 -



FOCAS2 screen

Setting item

Item Description PORT NUMBER (TCP) Specifies the port No. to be used by the machine remote diagnosis functions

(FOCAS2/Ethernet functions), within a range of 5001 to 65535. PORT NUMBER (UDP) Set 0. TIME INTERVAL Set 0.

MACHINE REMOTE DIAG screen (COMMON)

Press soft key [REMOTE DIAG] to display the MACHINE REMOTE DIAG screen (COMMON).

Machine remote diagnosis screen (BASIC)


- 63 -


Setting item Item Description

MTB ID This information is required by the machine remote diagnosis package to confirm that the diagnosis request is issued from a machine manufactured by the machine tool builder. The MTB identification information on the diagnosis accepting server of the machine remote diagnosis package can be set to accept diagnosis requests only from the machines manufactured by the machine tool builder. (Example of specification format: "FANUC")

MACHINE ID Information required by the machine remote diagnosis package to identify the machine under diagnosis (Example of specification format: "217xxx-1011xxxxx")

MACHINE REMOTE DIAG screen (INQUIRY1, INQUIRY2, INQUIRY3)

Press soft key [REMOTE DIAG] to display the MACHINE REMOTE DIAG screen. By using page keys , the three host computers at inquiry destinations 1, 2, and 3 can be set.

MACHINE REMOTE DIAG screens (INQUIRY1):

Screen when the DNS function is disabled (left) and screen when the function is enabled (right)


HOST NAME Specify the IP address of the host computer (machine remote diagnosis accepting server) when the DNS function is disabled. (Example of specification format: "200.201.202.203") Specify the host name of the host computer (machine remote diagnosis accepting server) when the DNS function is enabled. (You can specify up to 63 characters.) (Example of specification format: "RMTDIAG.FANUC.CO.JP")

PORT NUMBER Specify a port number. Usually, specify "8194" because the machine remote diagnosis functions are used.

INQUIRY NAME Specify information for identifying the host computer (machine remote diagnosis accepting server). (You can specify up to 63 characters.) (Example of specification format: "FANUC LTD.")


- 64 -


5.2 RELATED NC PARAMETERS 0024 Setting of communication with the PMC ladder development tool

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 10: The high-speed interface (Ethernet) is used for PMC online editing.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

0904 DNS

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #5 DNS The DNS function is:



operation is continued. 2 To use the DNS function, set DNS IP ADDRESS 1 and DNS IP

ADDRESS 2 on the COMMON (DETAIL) screen.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0905 PCH






#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

8706 MRD

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #6 MRD Type of communication device to be used by the machine remote diagnosis function:

0: The machine remote diagnosis function is not used. 1: The Fast Ethernet board is used.

NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before

operation is continued.


- 65 -


5.3 CONTROLLING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS FROM THE PMC

You can use signals from the PMC to control the start and forced termination of the machine remote diagnosis functions and post the status of the machine remote diagnosis functions and error numbers to the PMC ladder.

5.3.1 Signals No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

G0141 DIAREQ DIASTP INQU2 INQU1 INQU0

DIAREQ <G0141.5> [Name] Signal to request machine remote diagnosis [Classification] Input signal [Function] Requests the start of machine remote diagnosis. [Operation] When this signal is set to "1", it requests the start of machine remote diagnosis to the

inquiry destination according to the signals indicating the number of the inquiry destination (INQU0 to INQU2). When the acceptance completion signal (RMTEND) or acceptance reject signal (RMTCAN) is set to "1", this signal is set to "0".

DIASTP <G0141.4> [Name] Signal to request machine remote diagnosis cancellation [Classification] Input signal [Function] Requests the forced termination of machine remote diagnosis. [Operation] When this signal is set to "1", it requests forced termination to the machine remote

diagnosis accepting server. When the completion signal for machine remote signal cancel acceptance (RMTCLS) is set to "1", this signal is set to "0".

INQU2 <G0141.2> INQU1 <G0141.1> INQU0 <G0141.0> [Name] Inquiry number select signals [Classification] Input signal [Function] Inquiry destination for which to start machine remote diagnosis [Operation] Select an item from the table below as an inquiry destination for which to start machine

remote signal.

INQU2 INQU1 INQU0 Status 0 0 0 No selection 0 0 1 Inquiry destination 1 0 1 0 Inquiry destination 2 0 1 1 Inquiry destination 3

No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

F0082 RMTCLS

RMTCLS <F0082.3> [Name] Completion signal for machine remote diagnosis cancel acceptance [Classification] Output signal [Function] Notifies that a request to cancel machine remote diagnosis has been accepted.


- 66 -


[Output condition] When machine remote diagnosis is canceled after the signal to request machine remote diagnosis cancellation (DIASTP) is set to "1", this signal is set to "1". When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis cancellation (DIASTP) is set to "0", this signal is set to "0".

No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

F0083 RMTCAN RMTEND DIAST5 DIAST4 DIAST3 DIAST2 DIAST1 DIAST0

RMTCAN <F0083.7> [Name] Reject signal for machine remote diagnosis acceptance [Classification] Output signal [Function] Notifies that a machine remote diagnosis request has been rejected. [Output condition] When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "1", a request to

start machine remote diagnosis is issued to the machine remote diagnosis accepting server. When the server rejects the request, this signal is set to "1". When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "0", this signal is set to "0".

RMTEND <F0083.6> [Name] Completion signal for machine remote diagnosis acceptance [Classification] Output signal [Function] Notifies that a machine remote diagnosis request has been accepted by the machine

remote diagnosis accepting server. [Output condition] When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "1", a request to

start machine remote diagnosis is issued to the machine remote diagnosis accepting server. When the server accepts the request, this signal is set to "1". When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "0", this signal is set to "0".

DIAST5 <F0083.5> DIAST4 <F0083.4> DIAST3 <F0083.3> DIAST2 <F0083.2> DIAST1 <F0083.1> DIAST0 <F0083.0> [Name] Notification signals for the machine remote diagnosis status [Classification] Output signal [Function] Report the status of machine remote diagnosis. [Output condition] The status of machine remote diagnosis is reported as listed in the following table.

DIAST5 DIAST4 DIAST3 DIAST2 DIAST1 DIAST0 Description

0 0 0 0 0 0 No status 0 0 0 0 0 1 OPEN 0 0 0 0 1 0 OPENING 0 0 0 0 1 1 ACCEPTED 0 0 0 1 0 0 REFUSED 0 0 0 1 0 1 DIAGNOSING 0 0 0 1 1 0 DIAGNOSING 0 0 0 1 1 1 CLOSE 0 0 1 0 0 0 FORCE CLOSING 0 0 1 0 0 1 ERROR

No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

F0088 DIAER7 DIAER6 DIAER5 DIAER4 DIAER3 DIAER2 DIAER1 DIAER0

DIAER7 <F0088.7>


- 67 -


DIAER6 <F0088.6> DIAER5 <F0088.5> DIAER4 <F0088.4> DIAER3 <F0088.3> DIAER2 <F0088.2> DIAER1 <F0088.1> DIAER0 <F0088.0> [Name] Notification signals for a machine remote diagnosis error number [Classification] Output signal [Function] Report an error number of machine remote diagnosis. [Output condition] These signals indicate an error number of machine remote diagnosis. The error number is

0 to 255 in binary format.

5.3.2 Signal Timing Charts This section describes control of the start and forced termination of machine remote diagnosis according to the signals from the PMC using timing charts.

5.3.2.1 When the start of machine remote diagnosis is accepted INQU0 (G141.0)

INQU1 (G141.1)

INQU2 (G141.2)

DIAREQ (G141.5)

RMTEND (F083.6)

<1>

<2>

<3>

<4>

The start of machine remote diagnosis is accepted.

<5>

<1> Before the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "1", an inquiry destination for which to start the remote diagnosis functions is selected using the inquiry destination number signals (INQU0, INQU1, and INQU2). In this example, "inquiry destination 3" is selected by setting INQU0 = 1, INQU1 = 1, and INQU2 = 0.

<2> The signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "1". <3> When the machine remote diagnosis package accepts the request to start diagnosis, the completion

signal for machine remote diagnosis acceptance (RMTEND) is set to "1". <4> When the completion signal for machine remote diagnosis acceptance (RMTEND) is set to "1", the

signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "0". <5> When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "0", the completion signal

for machine remote diagnosis acceptance (RMTEND) is set to "0".


- 68 -


5.3.2.2 When the start of machine remote diagnosis is rejected INQU0 (G141.0)

INQU1 (G141.1)

INQU2 (G141.2)

DIAREQ (G141.5)

RMTCAN (F083.7)

<1>

<2>

<3>

<4>

The start of machine remote diagnosis is rejected.

<5>

<1> Before the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "1", an inquiry

destination for which to start the remote diagnosis functions is selected using the inquiry destination number signals (INQU0, INQU1, and INQU2). In this example, "inquiry destination 3" is selected by setting INQU0 = 1, INQU1 = 1, and INQU2 = 0.

<2> The signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "1". <3> When the machine remote diagnosis package rejects the request to start diagnosis, the reject signal

for machine remote diagnosis acceptance (RMTCAN) is set to "1". <4> When the reject signal for machine remote diagnosis acceptance (RMTCAN) is set to "1", the signal

to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "0". <5> When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "0", the reject signal for

machine remote diagnosis acceptance (RMTCAN) is set to "0".

5.3.2.3 When machine remote diagnosis is forcibly terminated DIASTP (G141.4)

RMTCLS (F082.3) <1>

<2>

<3>

Machine remote diagnosis is forcibly terminated.

<1> When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis cancellation (DIASTP) is set to "1", the

completion signal for machine remote diagnosis cancel acceptance (RMTCLS) is set to "1". <2> When the completion signal for machine remote diagnosis cancel acceptance (RMTCLS) is set to

"1", the signal to request machine remote diagnosis cancellation (DIASTP) is set to "0". <3> When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis cancellation (DIASTP) is set to "0", the

completion signal for machine remote diagnosis cancel acceptance (RMTCLS) is set to "0" and the machine remote diagnosis functions are forcibly terminated.


- 69 -


5.4 EXAMPLE OF SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS

An example of setting for operating the machine remote diagnosis functions is given below. In this example of setting, one personal computer functions as the machine remote diagnosis accepting server and machine remote diagnosis client and is connected to one CNC.


CNC 1 PC 1

HUB

CNC 1 IP ADDRESS 192.168.0.100 SUBNET MASK 255.255.255.0 ROUTER IP ADDRESS None PORT NUMBER (TCP) 8193 PORT NUMBER (UDP) 0 TIME INTERVAL 0 MTB ID FANUC MACHINE ID 217XXX-101XXXXXINQUIRY 1 : HOST NAME 192.168.0.200 INQUIRY 1 : PORT NUMBER 8194

PC 1

IP address 192.168.0.200 Sub-net mask 255.255.255.0 Default gateway None Accepting server : PORT NUMBER 8194 Proxy server : PORT NUMBER 8193

MTB ID Accepts all diagnosis

requests.

The FOCAS2 setting screen is used for setting.


The machine remote diagnosis screen is used for setting.

"Diagnosis accepting server setting" of the machine remote diagnosis package is used for setting.

"Microsoft TCP/IP property" of the personal computer (Windows 95/98/NT/2000/XP) is used for setting.


- 70 -

6. SETTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION

6 SETTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION

This chapter describes the setting of parameters for the Unsolicited Messaging function.

6.1 SETTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION This section describes the setting screen for operating the Unsolicited Messaging function.



3 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] to display the Ethernet Setting screen. 4 Press soft keys [COMMON], [FOCAS2], and [UNSOLI MSG] and then enter parameters for the

items that appear.



Setting item

Item Description IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server.





- 71 -

6.SETTING THE UNSOLICITEDMESSAGING FUNCTION

Display item



Press soft key [COMMON] then page keys to display the COMMON screen (DETAIL). Set



Setting item




- 72 -



FOCAS2 screen

Setting item

Item Description PORT NUMBER (TCP) Specifies the port No. to be used by the Unsolicited Messaging function

(FOCAS2/Ethernet function), within a range of 5001 to 65535. PORT NUMBER (UDP) Set 0. TIME INTERVAL Set 0.


- 73 -


6.1.1 Selection of Mode This Subsection describes how to select the mode for setting the Unsolicited Messaging function.

UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen (BASIC) Press soft key [UNSOLI MSG] to display the UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen (BASIC).

UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen1 (Basic)

Setting item

Item Description MODE Select the mode for setting the Unsolicited Messaging function.

Refer to the next Operation for the setting method. For “CNC MODE”: This mode is for the setting by the CNC screen. In this case, the setting by the personal

computer is impossible. Refer to Subsection 6.1.2, “Setting method by CNC screen” for details. For “PC MODE”: This mode is for the setting by the personal computer. In this case, the setting by the CNC

screen is impossible. Refer to Subsection 6.1.3, “Setting method by personal computer” for details.

NOTE 1 When you use this function for the first time, the mode is “PC MODE”. 2 The change of mode is possible under only the state “Not Ready”. Refer to the

next Display item for the state “Not Ready”. 3 When you change from “CNC MODE” to “PC MODE”, all setting parameters of

the Unsolicited Messaging function are cleared.

Operation The mode can be changed. 1 Press soft key [(OPRT)] to display soft key [MODE].


- 74 -


2 Press soft key [MODE] to display soft keys [CNC MODE] and [PC MODE].

3 Press soft key of the mode that you want to change.

Display item Item Description

IP ADDRESS The IP address of the connecting personal computer as a Unsolicited Messaging Server is displayed. (Example of specification format: "192.168.0.1")

STATUS The Current status is displayed. The kind of status is the following five states. [1] Not Ready The state that data are not transmitted even if there is a data transmission request by NC

program or Ladder program. [2] Ready The state that data are transmitted by a data transmission request by NC program or Ladder

program. [3] Sending… The state from acceptance of the request until completion of data transmission. [4] Receiving… The state from completion of data transmission until receiving the response data. [5] Completed The state from receiving the response data until completion of receiving operation.

<Complement> - The data transmission: This means that the Unsolicited Message is transferred from the CNC to the personal

computer. - The response data: This means that the response of Unsolicited Message is transferred from the personal

computer to the CNC.

NOTE 1 Execute the FOCAS2 function “cnc_unsolicstart” from the personal computer to

change the status from “Not Ready” to “Ready”. 2 Execute the FOCAS2 function “cnc_unsolicstop” from the personal computer to

change the status from except for “Not Ready” to “Not Ready”. 3 Refer to Section 6.2, “EXECUTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING

FUNCTION” for timing charts of status.

6.1.2 Setting Method by CNC Screen This section describes how to set the parameters by the UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen.

NOTE 1 Operate the following procedures in order to enable the parameters and start the

Unsolicited Message transmission. (1) Set all setting items of the UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen (CONNECT). (2) Press soft key [(OPRT)] -> [APPLY]. (3) Execute FOCAS2 function “cnc_unsolicstart” to start Unsolicited Messaging

the from the personal computer.


- 75 -


NOTE 2 The input to Setting item and the execution of soft key [(OPRT)] -> [APPLY] in

the UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen (CONNECT) are possible under only the state “Not Ready”. Refer to Display item of Subsection 6.1.1, “Selection of mode” for the status “Not Ready”.

UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen (CONNECT)

Press soft key [UNSOLI MSG] and page keys to display the UNSOLICITED MESSAGE

screen (CONNECT).

UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen 2 (CONNECT) UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen 3 (CONNECT)

Setting item

Item Description HOST NAME Specify the IP address of the host computer when the DNS function is disabled.

(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.1") Specify the host name of the host computer when the DNS function is enabled. (You can specify up to 63 characters.) (Example of specification format: "UNSOLI-SRV.FACTORY")

PORT NUMBER Specify a TCP port number and a UDP port number. Usually, specify "8196". Input range: 5001 to 65535

RETRY COUNT Specify the retry count when the server does not respond to the client message. Input range: 0 to 32767

TIMEOUT Specify the timeout (second) for the response of the transmitted data. Input range: 1 to 32767

ALIVE TIME Specify the time interval (in seconds) at which to send the alive signal during normal operation. Specify the value that is less than TIMEOUT. Input range: 1 to 32767


- 76 -


Item Description CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE

Specify the type of the control parameter. The control parameter is not effective when this parameter is “0”. - “1”: PMC address (Response Notice method) - “2”: PMC address (Simple method) - “3”: Custom macro variables (Simple method) - “4”: Volatile RTM variables (Simple method) Specify the control parameter to execute the data transmission. In case of CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE “1”:

CONTROL PARAMETER

Specify a PMC address for control. The available PMC area is R and E. Two bytes are allowed from this PMC address.

In case of CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE “2”: Specify a PMC address for control.

The available PMC area is R and E. One byte is allowed from this PMC address.

In case of CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE “3”: Specify a custom macro variable number for control. The available custom macro

variables are the volatile common variables. One variable is allowed from this variable number.

In case of CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE “4”:

CONTROL PARAMETER

Specify a RTM variable number for control. The available RTM variables are the volatile RTM variables. One variable is allowed from this variable number.

TRANSMISSION NUMBER

Specify a number of the transmission data. Input range: 1 to 3

TRANSMISSION PARAMETER (NO.1-3)

Specify the parameter of each transmission data.

TYPE Specify the type of the transmission data. The transmission parameters are not effective when this parameter is “0”. - “1” or “2”: PMC address - “3”: Custom macro variables - “4”: Volatile RTM variables - “5”: Nonvolatile RTM variables Specify the top of area for the transmission data. In case of TRANSMISSION PARAMETER TYPE “1” or “2”: Specify a PMC address for transmission. In case of TRANSMISSION PARAMETER TYPE “3”: Specify a custom macro variable number for transmission. In case of TRANSMISSION PARAMETER TYPE “4” or “5”:

PMC ADRESS, or MACRO NO.

Specify a RTM variable number for transmission. Specify a size of area or a number for the transmission data. The available maximum size is below. - For TRANSMISSION NUMBER “1”: 2890 bytes - For TRANSMISSION NUMBER “2”: 2874 bytes in total - For TRANSMISSION NUMBER “3”: 2858 bytes in total Exchange one variable for eight bytes when the macro variables (the custom macro variables or the RTM variables) are used. In case of TRANSMISSION PARAMETER TYPE “1” or “2”: Specify a size of area for the transmission data. In case of TRANSMISSION PARAMETER TYPE “3”: Specify a number of the macro variables for the transmission data. And, when the macro

variable number is larger than 1000 (a system variable), specify “1” to this parameter. In case of TRANSMISSION PARAMETER TYPE “4” or “5”:

SIZE, or NUMBER

Specify a number of the RTM variables for the transmission data.


- 77 -


CAUTION 1 When setting a PMC address for control and transmission, keep the following in

mind. (1) For a multi-path PMC, enter a PMC address as follows:

<Path number>:<PMC address> For R0500 for the second PMC path, for example, enter "2:R500". When only a PMC address (R500) is entered, it is assumed to be the PMC address for the first path (1:R0500). If the ":" key is not provided, the "/" or "EOB" key can be used instead.

(2) The area of a PMC address for control cannot overlap each other area when other functions (FL-net, PROFIBUS-DP, DeviceNet, and CC-Link) are used.

2 When setting a macro variable for control and transmission, keep the following in mind. (1) For a multi-path CNC, enter a macro variable as follows:

<Path number>:<Variable number> For #100 for the second CNC path, for example, enter "2:100". When only a variable number (100) is entered, it is assumed to be the variable number for the first path (1:100). If the ":" key is not provided, the "/" or "EOB" key can be used instead.

(2) The macro variables for control cannot overlap the variables of use except for the Unsolicited Messaging function.

NOTE 1 In the methods to specify a PMC address for CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE,

there are the Response Notice method and the Simple method. Refer to Section 6.2, “EXECUTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING” for details.

2 The available range of a PMC address depends on the available PMC Memory Type.

3 The available range of a custom macro variable and a RTM variable depends on the valid option. The RTM variable means a real-time custom macro variable. No real-time custom macro variable can be used with the Series 35i-B.

4 Set the number of TRANSMISSION PARAMETER (NO.1-3) to TRANSMISSION NUMBER. For example, when TRANSMISSION NUMBER is “3”, if there are one or more non-effective value in TRANSMISSION PARAMETER (NO.1-3), an error occurs by pressing soft key [APPLY].

Operation

The all setting items in UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen (CONNECT) become effective. 1 Press soft key [(OPRT)] to display soft key [APPLY].

2 Press soft key [APPLY].


- 78 -


6.1.3 Setting Method by Personal Computer Create Application software by using the FOCAS2 functions if you set the parameters by the personal computer. • cnc_wrunsolicprm2 Setting of the parameters for the Unsolicited Messaging (2) • cnc_unsolicstart Start of the Unsolicited Messaging Refer to “5. Unsolicited Messaging Function” in “FANUC Open CNC FOCAS1/FOCAS2 CNC/PMC Data window library” for details

NOTE 1 Execute the FOCAS2 function “cnc_unsolicstart” to start the Unsolicited

Message transmission after you execute the FOCAS2 function “cnc_wrunsolicprm2”.

2 The Execution of the FOCAS2 function “cnc_wrunsolicprm2” is possible under only the state “Not Ready”. Refer to Display item of Subsection 6.1.1, “Selection of mode” for the status “Not Ready”.

3 The setting values set by the personal computer are displayed in the UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen (CONNECT) after the FOCAS2 function “cnc_wrunsolicprm2” is executed.

6.2 EXECUTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION This section describes how to execute the Unsolicited Messaging function. The method to execute the Unsolicited Messaging function is the following three ways

• In case of the Response Notice method by using a PMC address for control. • In case of the Simple method by using a PMC address for control. • In case of the Simple method by using a macro variable for control.

NOTE 1 When the Ladder program is used, there are the Response Notice method and

the Simple method. A main difference is the followings. In the former, the response RES_CODE of the data transmission is notified to the Ladder program. In the latter, the response of the data transmission isn’t notified to the Ladder program.

Choose the Response Notice when you want to apply the Ladder program used by Series 16i etc. If it is not necessary to receive the response RES_CODE, it is easy to use the simple method.

2 RES_CODE is recorded in the LOG screen for the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server when “0x00” or “0x01” as RES_CODE is detected.

3 Refer to “5. Unsolicited Messaging Function” in “FANUC Open CNC FOCAS1/FOCAS2 CNC/PMC Data window library” for the details of RES_CODE.


- 79 -


6.2.1 When Using a PMC Address for Control (Response Notice method)

This subsection describes how to use the Response Notice method.

NOTE Both a PMC address as the control parameter and a macro variable as the

transmission parameter can be set. In this case, be careful not to clear which timing value to be read if the Ladder

program transmits a macro variable. The following explanation describes the case that both the control parameter and

the transmission parameter are PMC addresses.

Signals of PMC address for control This describes the details of the signals of a PMC address for control when the Unsolicited Messaging function is used. The area of a PMC address for the control is two bytes. The following indicates the case that “Rxxxx” is used as a PMC address for control. “Rxxxx” means a PMC address that the PMC path number is omitted

No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Rxxxx REQ

REQ <Rxxxx.7> [Name] Signal to request the message transmission [Classification] Input signal [Function] Requests the Unsolicited Message transmission. [Operation] Set “1” to this signal after the Ladder program prepares the message. Then the message

will be transmitted to the personal computer.

No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Rxxxx+1 RES COM RES_CODE

RES <Rxxxx+1.7> [Name] Signal to notify the response of the message [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indicates that the response of the Unsolicited Message is received.

[Output condition] The response of the message is transmitted from the personal computer to the CNC (the communication board). When the CNC (the communication board) receives the response of the message, “1” is set to this signal. When “1” is set to this signal, the Ladder program reads out the response code (RES_CODE) and sets “0” to the signal REQ. Then the CNC (the communication board) will clear RES_CODE and this signal.

COM <Rxxxx+1.6> [Name] Signal to notify the start of the message transmission [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indicates that the Unsolicited Message transmission is starting.

[Output condition] When the message transmission to the personal computer is started, “1” is set to this signal. When the message transmission is completed, “0” is set to this signal.

RES_CODE <Rxxxx+1.0> to <Rxxxx+1.5> [Name] Indicates the response code of the message [Classification] Output signal [Function] This code indicates the response code of the Unsolicited Message.


- 80 -


[Output condition] The response code of the message is set. The Ladder program sets “0” to the signal REQ after reading out this code. Then this code will be cleared by CNC (the communication board).

NOTE Refer to “5. Unsolicited Messaging Function” in “FANUC Open

CNC FOCAS1/FOCAS2 CNC/PMC Data window library” for the details of RES_CODE.

Timing charts of PMC address for control

This describes the timing charts of the signals of a PMC address for control when using the Response Notice method. The following example indicates the case that the Unsolicited Message is transmitted only once after the FOCAS2 function “cnc_unsolicstart” was received, and FOCAS2 function “cnc_unsolicstop” is received.

REQ (Ladder -> Board)

COM (Board -> Ladder)

RES (Board -> Ladder)

<2>

<3>

<4> <5>

<1>

<6>

<7>

The response

becomes available

STATUS Not Ready Ready Sending… Receiving… Completed Ready

RES_CODE (Board -> Ladder)

FOCAS2 function[cnc_unsolicstart] FOCAS2 function[cnc_unsolicstop]

Not Ready

The data transmission

has been finished

Ladder : Ladder Program

Board : Communication Board

REQ (Ladder -> Board)

COM (Board -> Ladder)

RES (Board -> Ladder)

<2>

<3>

<4> <5>

<1>

<6>

<7>

The response

becomes available

STATUS Not Ready Ready Sending… Receiving… Completed Ready

RES_CODE (Board -> Ladder)


Not Ready


has been finished


has been finished



<1> The Ladder program prepares the message and sets “1” to the signal REQ after its program confirms

that the signal RES has been “0”. <2> The communication board sets “1” to the COM signal because “1” is set to the signal REQ, and the

message transmission is started. <3> The communication board sets “0” to the signal COM when the message transmission is completed. <4> The communication board sets the RES_CODE and sets “1” to the signal RES when the response of

the message is received. <5> The Ladder program sets “0” to the signal REQ after its program read out the RES_CODE and the

RES signal is “1”. <6> The communication board clears the RES_CODE because “0” is set to the signal REQ. <7> The communication board sets “0” to the signal RES.

NOTE Refer to Display item in Subsection 6.1.1, “Selection of mode” for the details of

STATUS.


- 81 -


6.2.2 When Using a PMC Address for Control (Simple Method) This subsection describes how to use the Simple method by a PMC address for control.

NOTE Both a PMC address as the control parameter and a macro variable as the

transmission parameter can be set. In this case, be careful not to clear which timing value to be read if the Ladder

program transmits a macro variable. The following explanation describes the case that both the control parameter and

the transmission parameter are PMC addresses.

Signals of PMC address for control This describes the details of the signals of a PMC address for control to execute the Unsolicited Messaging function. The area of a PMC address for the control is one byte. The following indicates the case that “Rxxxx” is used as a PMC address for control. “Rxxxx” means a PMC address that the PMC path number is omitted

No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Rxxxx REQ

REQ <Rxxxx.7> [Name] Signal to request the message transmission [Classification] Input signal/Output signal [Function] Requests the Unsolicited Message transmission. [Operation] Set “1” to this signal after the Ladder program prepare the message. Then the message

will be transmitted to the personal computer. When the response of the message is received, this signal is cleared by CNC (the communication board).

Timing charts of PMC address for control

This describes the timing charts of the signals of a PMC address for control when using the Simple method. The following example indicates the case that the Unsolicited Message is transmitted only once after the FOCAS2 function “cnc_unsolicstart” was received, and FOCAS2 function “cnc_unsolicstop” is received.

REQ (Ladder <-> Board)

Transmitting operation(Board)

Receiving operation(Board)

<2>

<3>

<4>

<1>

<5>


has been finished

The response is

received



STATUS Not Ready Ready Sending… Completed Ready


Not ReadyReceiving…

REQ (Ladder <-> Board)



<2>

<3>

<4>

<1>

<5>


has been finished


has been finished

The response is

received

The response is

received





Not ReadyReceiving…

<1> The Ladder program prepares the message and sets “1” to the signal REQ after its program confirms that the signal REQ has been “0”.

<2> The communication board transmits the message because “1” is set to the signal REQ.


- 82 -


<3> The transmitting operation of the communication board is completed. <4> The receiving operation of the communication board is completed after the response of the message

is received. <5> The communication board sets “0” to the signal REQ after the receiving operation is completed.

NOTE 1 The REQ signal is also set to “0” when transmission terminates abnormally.

When it is necessary to check the transmission result, use the Response Notice method described in Subsection 6.2.1.

2 Refer to Display item in Subsection 6.1.1, “Selection of mode” for the details of STATUS.

6.2.3 When Using a Macro Variable for Control (Simple Method) This subsection describes how to use the Simple method by a macro variable for control. The way to use a custom macro variable and a RTM variable in the macro variables for control is the same.

NOTE Both a macro variable as the control parameter and a PMC address as the

transmission parameter can be set. In this case, be careful not to clear which timing value to be read if the NC

program transmits a PMC data. The following explanation describes the case that both the control parameter and

the transmission parameter are macro variables.

Macro Variables for control This describes the details of the macro variable for control to execute the Unsolicited Messaging function. The area of the macro variable for control is one variable. The following indicates the case that “#xxxx” is used as a macro variable for control. “#xxxx” means a macro variable that the CNC path number is omitted

REQ <#xxxx> [Name] Variable to request the message transmission [Classification] Input variable/Output variable [Function] Requests the Unsolicited Message transmission. [Operation] Set “1” to this variable after the NC program prepare the message. Then the message will

be transmitted to the personal computer. When the response of the message received, this variable is cleared by CNC (the communication board).

NOTE The input and output value in the variable REQ is a real number. Therefore “0”

and “1” indicate “0.0” and “1.0”.

Timing charts of macro variables for control This describes the timing charts of the macro variable for control when using the Simple method. The following example indicates the case that the Unsolicited Message is transmitted only once after the FOCAS2 function “cnc_unsolicstart” was received, and FOCAS2 function “cnc_unsolicstop” is received.


- 83 -


<2>

<3>

<4>

<1>

<5>


has been finished

The response is

received



Not Ready

01

REQ (NC <-> Board)



NC : NC Program


Receiving…

<2>

<3>

<4>

<1>

<5>


has been finished


has been finished

The response is

received

The response is

received



Not Ready

0101

REQ (NC <-> Board)



NC : NC Program


Receiving…

<1> The NC program prepares the message and sets “1” to the variable REQ after its program confirms

that the variable REQ has been “0”. <2> The communication board transmits the message because “1” is set to the variable REQ. <3> The transmitting operation of the communication board is completed. <4> The receiving operation of the communication board is completed after the response of the message

is received. <5> The communication board sets “0” to the variable REQ after the receiving operation is completed.

NOTE 1 The REQ signal is also set to “0” when transmission terminates abnormally.

When it is necessary to check the transmission result, use the Response Notice method described in Subsection 6.2.1.

2 Refer to Display item in Subsection 6.1.1, “Selection of mode” for the details of STATUS.

Example to use macro variables for control

This describes the example to use the macro variable for control. • Example

[Contents] In the NC program of the CNC path number “1”, the way to transmit the date and time by using

macro variables is explained.

[Setting] The volatile RTM variable number #0 (REQ) is used as the macro variable for control. And, the

date and time (the system variable number #3011, #3012) managed in the CNC are used as the macro variable for transmission.


- 84 -


Setting item Setting value CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE 4 CONTROL PARAMETER 1:0 TRANSMISSION NUMBER 2 TRANSMISSION PARAMETER (NO.1)

TYPE 3 MACRO NO. 1:3011

NUMBER 1 TRANSMISSION PARAMETER (NO.2)

TYPE 3 MACRO NO. 1:3012

NUMBER 1 [Example of the NC program]

The RTM executes the next NC command of the RTM at the same time. At this time, the RTM doesn't influence the operation timing of the next NC command of the RTM.

Therefore, the date and time when the NC command 2 is executed is notified.

NC Program

NC Command 1

NC Command 2

Macro Call Command

・

・・

・

・・

RTM for control of the Unsolicited Messaging

//1 ZDO;

ZWHILE[#RV[0] NE 0];#RV[0]=1;ZEND;

<1>

One cycle of the

machining program

NC Program

NC Command 1

NC Command 2

Macro Call Command

・

・・

・

・・

RTM for control of the Unsolicited Messaging

//1 ZDO;

ZWHILE[#RV[0] NE 0];#RV[0]=1;ZEND;

<1>

One cycle of the

machining program

(Reference) <1> in the example corresponds to <1> in the timing charts above.

NOTE 1 If a custom macro variable is used as the macro variable for control, be careful

to influence the operation timing of the NC command. For example, if the RTM for control of the above example is replaced to a custom macro, the NC command 2 isn’t executed unless the macro variable for control changes.

2 Refer to OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System) for the details of a custom macro and a RTM.

6.3 RELATED NC PARAMETERS #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

0904 DHC DNS UNM

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #4 UNM The CNC Unsolicited Messaging function is:



- 85 -


#5 DNS The DNS function is: 0: Not used. 1: Used.

#6 DHC The DHCP function is: 0: Not used. 1: Used.

NOTE 1 When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be

turned off before operation is continued. 2 To use the DNS function, set DNS IP ADDRESS 1 and DNS IP

ADDRESS 2 on the COMMON (DETAIL) screen.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0905 UNS

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #4 UNS In the Unsolicited Messaging function, when the stop request of the Unsolicited

Messaging function is received excluding the connecting Unsolicited Messaging server: 0: The stop request is rejected. 1: The stop request is accepted.


- 86 -

7. SETTING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION

7 SETTING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION

This chapter describes the setting of parameters for the FTP File Transfer function.

Notes on using the FTP File Transfer function

CAUTION Before performing FTP communication using the Fast Ethernet for the first time,

consult with your network administrator, carefully set a network address and other items, and conduct communication tests thoroughly. Any error in settings such as a network address setting can lead to an adverse influence such as a communication failure on the entire network. Be very careful about any communication failure. If the Ethernet is used on a network involved with a communication failure, a communication failure intermittently occurs in the Ethernet, which may cause a CNC system error.

NOTE 1 With the FTP File Transfer function (FTP client), a single CNC can connect only

one FTP server. 2 The FTP File Transfer function does not support passive mode (PASV

command). 3 When setting the option (S737) of the Data Server function, the FTP File

Transfer function is unavailable.

7.1 SETTING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION This section describes the setting screen for operating the FTP File Transfer function.



3 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] to display the Ethernet Setting screen. 4 Press soft keys [COMMON] and [FTP TRANS] and then enter parameters for the items that appear.


- 87 -

7.SETTING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION



Setting item

Item Description IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the Fast Data Server.




Display item



DNS/DHCP function is used. For details, see "SETTING THE DNS/DHCP FUNCTION" provided later.


- 88 -


FTP Trans screens (CONNECT1, CONNECT2, CONNECT3) Press soft key [FTP TRANS] to display the FTP Trans screen. By using page keys , the three host computers at connection destinations 1, 2, and 3 can be

set.

FTP Trans screens (for connection destination 1)

Setting item

Item Description HOST NAME Specify the IP address of the host computer.

(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.200") PORT NUMBER Specify the port number. Usually, set 21 because the FTP communication is used. USER NAME Specify the name of the user to log on to the host computer using FTP. (A user

name of up to 31 characters can be specified.) PASSWORD Specify the password for the above user name.

The password must always be specified. LOGIN FOLDER Specify a work folder to be used when the user logs in to the host computer. (Up to

127 characters can be specified.) If no data is set, the home folder set on the host computer is used as a login folder.

Operation

Select a connection destination. 1 Press soft key [(OPRT)] to display soft key [HOST SELECT]. Then, press soft key [HOST

SELECT] to display soft keys [CONECT 1], [CONECT 2], and [CONECT 3].


- 89 -

7.SETTING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION

2 Press one of soft keys [CONECT 1], [CONECT 2], and [CONECT 3] according to the host computer to which you want to make a connection. The screen title of connection destination 1, 2 or 3 is displayed in reverse video. The screen title displayed in reverse video indicates the connection destination host computer.

When connection destination 1 is selected

7.2 RELATED NC PARAMETERS The NC parameters related to the FTP File Transfer function are described below.

0020 I/O CHANNEL : Input/output device selection

[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 5 : Selects the FTP File transfer function as the input/output device.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0901 EFT

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #1 EFT The FTP file transfer function by the Fast Ethernet board is:



operation is continued. 2 This parameter is valid only for Path 1. 3 If Data Server function is valid, FTP File Transfer function cannot

be used.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0905 PCH







- 90 -


0921 Selects the host computer 1 OS. 0922 Selects the host computer 2 OS. 0923 Selects the host computer 3 OS.

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 2

0: Windows95/98/Me/NT/2000/XP/Vista/7. 1: UNIX/VMS. 2: Linux.

NOTE Some FTP server software may not depend on the OS. Therefore,

the valid file list may not be displayed by the above setting.


- 91 -

8.ERROR MESSAGES DISPLAYED DURING PARAMETER SETTING

8 ERROR MESSAGES DISPLAYED DURING PARAMETER SETTING

This chapter explains the error messages that are issued when Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server parameters are set.

Messages Meaning and action to be taken Communication Software is not found

Check whether the communication software is installed.

Ethernet board is not found Check whether the Ethernet board is installed. Software Version Error The communication software version is illegal.

Check the software version. DATA IS OUT OF RANGE A numeric parameter value is beyond the range. Wrong Character(s) An illegal character is used in a character parameter. Format Error Input data such as an IP address has an illegal input format. too many figures A value input in a numeric parameter consists of too many digits. Data was rejected A parameter error is found.

Confirm the setting conditions described in the relevant manual. Reading from SRAM failed SRAM may have been destroyed. Writing into SRAM failed SRAM may have been destroyed. DHCP is available When the DHCP function is enabled, it is impossible to input parameters

manually from the setting screen. To input parameters manually, disable the DHCP function.

Error(xxxx) Other errors. Report the displayed message.

IV. OPERATION

B-64014EN/04 OPERATION

- 95 -

1.OPERATING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS

1 OPERATING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS

This chapter describes how to operate the Data Server functions. On the PROGRAM FOLDER screen, files on the CNC memory, memory card, host computer connected via the embedded Ethernet, memory card built into the Fast Data Server, or host computer connected via the Fast Data Server can be handled by selecting a device.

CNC memory

Memory card

FAST Data Server

Memory card

File list

File list

Via embedded Ethernet

Via FAST Data Server PROGRAM FOLDER screen

Series 30i/31i/32i-A/B

In this chapter, the method of handling files on the memory card built into the Fast Data Server and on the host computer connected via the Fast Data Server is described.

1.1 DEVICE CHANGE ON THE PROGRAM FOLDER SCREEN


2 Press soft key [FOLDER] to display the PROGRAM FOLDER screen. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)

OPERATION B-64014EN/04

- 96 -

1. OPERATING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS


3 Press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [DEVICE CHANGE] to display the soft keys for selectable

devices.

4 When you press soft key [DTSVR], the information displayed on the PROGRAM FOLDER screen

is changed to the contents (DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen) of the memory card built into the Fast Data Server to enable file operation.

5 When you press soft key [DTSVR HOST], the information displayed on the PROGRAM FOLDER screen is changed to the contents (DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST screen) of the hard disk of the host computer to enable file operation.

1.2 OPERATING THE DATA SERVER FILE LIST SCREEN If [DTSVR] is selected to change the device on the PROGRAM FOLDER screen, the contents (DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen) of the memory card built into the Fast Data Server are displayed to enable file operation. The information displayed on the DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen partly changes, depending on the setting of bit 1 (PDM) of NC parameter No. 3233. When bit 1 (PDM) of parameter No. 3233 is set to 0, an M198 operation folder and DNC operation file can be set. When bit 1 (PDM) of parameter No. 3233 is set to 1, foreground/background folders can be set.


- 97 -


DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen / When PDM=0 (No.3233#1=0)

DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen / When PDM=1 (No.3233#1=1)

Display item

M198 OPE FOLDER Displays a folder (directory) for M198-based subprogram calling. This item is displayed when bit 1 (PDM) of parameter No. 3233 is set to 0.


- 98 -


DNC OPE FILE Displays a file name used when DNC operation is performed. This item is displayed when bit 1 (PDM) of parameter No. 3233 is set to 0.

FOREGROUND FOLDER / BACKGROUND FOLDER Displays foreground/background folders (directories). This item is displayed when bit 1 (PDM) of parameter No. 3233 is set to 1.

CONNECT HOST Displays the work folder and the number of the host currently connected.

USED PAGE / FREE PAGE Displays the size used of the memory card built into the Fast Data Server and the size that is free.

USED FILES / FREE FILES Displays the total number of folders (files) in use of the Data Server and the number of remaining free folders (files).

DEVICE Displays the current device. If the memory card built into the Fast Data Server is selected, "DATA_SV" is indicated.

CURRENT FOLDER Displays the current work folder.

File list Displays information about the files and folders in the current work folder.

Operation list DEVICE CHANGE

Enables a device for display on the PROGRAM FOLDER screen. When selecting the memory card built into the Fast Data Server, press soft key [DTSVR].

DNC SET Specifies a file for DNC operation. This soft key can be used when bit 1 (PDM) of parameter No. 3233 is set to 0.

M198 SET Specifies a folder for M198-based subprogram calling. This soft key can be used when bit 1 (PDM) of parameter No. 3233 is set to 0.

FORE CHANGE / BACK CHNAGE Specifies a foreground/background folder. These soft keys can be used when bit 1 (PDM) of parameter No. 3233 is set to 1.

MAIN PROGRM Selects a file as a main program.

DETAIL OFF / DETAIL ON Switches the file list information to overall display or detail display.


- 99 -


CREATE FOLDER Creates a sub-folder under the current work folder.

DELETE Deletes a file or folder.

RENAME Renames a file or folder.

SELECT START Selects multiple files.

COPY Copies a file or files.

MOVE Moves a file or files from one folder to another.

SEARCH Searches for a file in the current work folder.

PUT Transfers a file from the Data Server to the host computer.

MPUT Transfers multiple files from the Data Server to the host computer.

LIST-PUT Transfers multiple files from the Data Server to the host computer according to a list file.

LIST-DELETE Deletes multiple files from the Data Server according to a list file.

READ (For the Series 30i/31i/32i-A) F INPUT (For the Series 30i/31i/32i-B)

Inputs an NC program in the host computer to part program storage of the CNC. This soft key is enabled only when the Data Server is in the storage mode and EDIT mode, and NC parameter No. 20 is set to “5”.

PUNCH (For the Series 30i/31i/32i-A) F OUTPUT (For the Series 30i/31i/32i-B)

Outputs an NC program in part program storage of the CNC to the host computer. This soft key is enabled only when the Data Server is in the storage mode and EDIT mode, and NC parameter No. 20 is set to “5”.

REFRESH Updates the display information of the PROGRAM FOLDER screen.


- 100 -


NOTE The operations of soft keys [CREATE FOLDER], [DELETE], [RENAME],

[COPY], [MOVE], and [LIST-DELETE] are the target operations of the memory protection key.

This means that when the memory protection key is enabled, these operations result in a "WRITE PROTECT" error and cannot be performed.

For information about the memory protection key, refer to the CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) of the CNC.

1.2.1 Displaying and Operating the File List

REFRESH, DETAIL OFF, DETAIL ON The contents of the file list can be updated and displayed. 1 Press soft key [REFRESH] to update the contents of the file list. 2 Press soft key [DETAIL OFF] to display a file name, size, and date. 3 Press soft key [DETAIL ON] to display a file list with file attributes and comments. A comment

statement immediately following the O number of a file is displayed. When there is no comment statement, the contents starting with the beginning of the file are displayed.

NOTE 1 For a file selected as a main program and a file being used for memory

operation, no comment is displayed in detail display mode. 2 The file attribute of a binary file is displayed as "R/B" to the right of the comment.

MOVE FOLDER

A work folder can be moved. 1 By using cursor keys , select a folder to be moved.

2 Press the MDI key .

CREATE FOLDER

A new folder can be created. 1 Move to a new folder to be created. 2 Enter a desired folder name. 3 Press soft key [CREATE FOLDER].

NOTE 1 Up to six levels of folders can be created. 2 No duplicate folder name is allowed within the same folder. 3 Each time a folder is created, the number of programs that can be registered

decreases by one. 4 No folder may be able to be created, depending on the status such as operation

state or protection state.


- 101 -


DELETE Specifying a file or folder

A file or folder can be deleted. 1 By using cursor keys , select a file or folder to be deleted.

2 Press soft key [DELETE]. - Press soft key [EXEC] for execution. - Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.

NOTE 1 The initial folder cannot be deleted. 2 A folder can be deleted only when the folder is empty.

(An empty folder means a folder that does not contain any folder and file.) 3 Files or folders may not be able to be deleted, depending on the status such as

operation state or protection state.

Specifying multiple files Multiple files can be deleted at a time. 1 Press soft key [SELECT START]. 2 By using cursor keys , select a file to be deleted.

3 Press soft key [SELECT]. A selected file is displayed in reverse video. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for files to be deleted. 4 Press soft key [DELETE].

• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution. • Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.

NOTE 1 No folder can be specified. 2 Files may not be able to be deleted, depending on the status such as operation

state or protection state. 3 Up to 10 files can be selected at a time.

DELETE (new specification)

Specifying a file or folder A file or folder can be deleted. 1 Place the cursor on the name of a file or folder to be deleted. 2 Press soft key [DELETE].


Selecting a range

Multiple files or folders can be deleted. 1 Press soft key [SELECT]. 2 Place the cursor on the name of a file to be deleted and press soft key [RANGE SELECT].


- 102 -


3 By using cursor keys , select a range of files to be deleted.

A selected file is displayed in reverse video. 4 When you have selected a desired range, press soft key [DELETE].


Selecting individual files or folders

Multiple files or folders can be deleted. 1 Press soft key [SELECT]. 2 Place the cursor on the name of a file to be deleted and press soft key [SELECT].

A selected file is displayed in reverse video. 3 Repeat step 2 for all files to be selected. 4 When you have selected desired files, press soft key [DELETE].


NOTE 1 Delete operation of the new specification is performed when bit 3 (PCP) of

parameter No. 11374 is set to 1 for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A or bit 4 (PCB) of parameter No. 11374 is set to 0 for the Series 30i/31i/32i-B.

2 The initial folder cannot be deleted. 3 Folders can also be specified and deleted only when the folders are empty.

(An empty folder means a folder that does not contain any folder and file.) 4 Files or folders may not be able to be deleted, depending on the status such as

operation state or protection state. 5 Up to 10 files can be selected at a time.

RENAME

A file or folder can be renamed. 1 By using cursor keys , select a file or folder to be renamed.

2 Key a new file name or folder name. 3 Press soft key [RENAME].

NOTE 1 The initial folder cannot be renamed. 2 No duplicate folder name is allowed within the same folder. 3 Files and folders may not be able to be renamed, depending on the status such

as operation state or protection state.

SEARCH In the current work folder, a file can be found. 1 Enter a desired file name. 2 Press soft key [SEARCH].


- 103 -


COPY Only one file

A file can be copied within the same folder. 1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 By using cursor keys , select a copy source file.

3 Key the name of a copy destination file. 4 Press soft key [COPY].

NOTE 1 Copy operation is impossible if the same file name is specified as a copy source

file and copy destination file. 2 No folder can be specified. 3 Files may not be able to be copied, depending on the status such as operation

state or protection state.

Selecting individual files or folders Multiple files can be copied. 1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 Press soft key [SELECT START]. 3 By using cursor keys , select a copy source file.

4 Press soft key [SELECT]. A selected file is displayed in reverse video. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for files to be copied. 5 Press soft key [SELECT END]. 6 Move to a copy destination folder. 7 Press soft key [COPY].

NOTE 1 Copy operation is impossible if the same folder is specified as a copy source

folder and copy destination folder. 2 No folder can be specified. 3 Files may not be able to be copied, depending on the status such as operation


COPY (new specification)

Only one file One file can be copied. 1 Place the cursor on the name of a file to be copied and press soft key [COPY].

A selected file is displayed in reverse video. 2 Move to a copy destination folder. 3 Press soft key [PASTE].

To rename and copy the file, enter the new file name in the key-in buffer and press soft key [PASTE].


- 104 -


Selecting a range Multiple files can be copied. 1 Press soft key [SELECT]. 2 Place the cursor on the name of a file to be copied and press soft key [RANGE SELECT]. 3 By using cursor keys , select a range of files to be copied.

A selected file is displayed in reverse video. 4 When you have selected a desired range, press soft key [COPY]. 5 Move to a copy destination folder. 6 Press soft key [PASTE].

Selecting individual files or folders Multiple files can be copied. 1 Press soft key [SELECT]. 2 Place the cursor on the name of a file to be copied and press soft key [SELECT].

A selected file is displayed in reverse video. 3 Repeat step 2 for all files to be selected. 4 When you have selected desired files, press soft key [COPY]. 5 Move to a copy destination folder. 6 Press soft key [PASTE].

NOTE 1 Copy operation of the new specification is performed when bit 3 (PCP) of


2 With copy operation of the new specification, not only a file or files, but also a folder or folders can be selected. In this case, all files in the selected folder(s) are copied.

3 Copy operation is impossible if the same folder is specified as a copy source folder and copy destination folder.

4 Files or folders may not be able to be copied, depending on the status such as operation state or protection state.

5 Up to 10 files can be selected at a time.

MOVE A file or files can be moved. 1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 Press soft key [SELECT START]. 3 By using cursor keys , select a move source file.

4 Press soft key [SELECT]. A selected file is displayed in reverse video. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for files to be moved.

5 Press soft key [SELECT END]. 6 Move to a move destination folder. 7 Press soft key [MOVE].


- 105 -


NOTE 1 Move operation is impossible if the same folder is specified as a move source

folder and move destination folder. 2 No folder can be specified. 3 Files may not be able to be moved, depending on the status such as operation


MOVE (new specification)

Only one file One file can be moved. 1 Place the cursor on the name of a file to be moved and press soft key [CUT].

A selected file is displayed in reverse video. 2 Move to a move destination folder. 3 Press soft key [PASTE].

To rename and move the file, enter the new file name in the key-in buffer and press soft key [PASTE].

Selecting a range

Multiple files can be moved. 1 Press soft key [SELECT]. 2 Place the cursor on the name of a file to be moved and press soft key [RANGE SELECTT]. 3 By using cursor keys , select a range of files to be moved.

A selected file is displayed in reverse video. 4 When you have selected a desired range, press soft key [CUT]. 5 Move to a move destination folder. 6 Press soft key [PASTE].

Selecting individual files or folders Multiple files can be moved. 1 Press soft key [SELECT]. 2 Place the cursor on the name of a file to be moved and press soft key [SELECTT].

A selected file is displayed in reverse video. 3 Repeat step 2 for all files to be selected. 4 When you have selected desired files, press soft key [CUT]. 5 Move to a move destination folder. 6 Press soft key [PASTE].

NOTE 1 Move operation of the new specification is performed when bit 3 (PCP) of


2 With move operation of the new specification, not only a file or files, but also a folder or folders can be selected. In this case, all files in the selected folder(s) are moved.

3 Move operation is impossible if the same folder is specified as a move source folder and move destination folder.


- 106 -


NOTE 4 Files or folders may not be able to be moved, depending on the status such as

operation state or protection state. 5 Up to 10 files can be selected at a time.

LIST-DELETE

By using a list file, multiple files in the Data Server can be deleted. 1 By using cursor keys , select a list file.

2 Press soft key [LIST-DELETE]. • Press soft key [EXEC] for execution. • Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.

When execution is selected, the files in the Data Server are deleted according to the list file.

NOTE Files cannot sometimes be deleted depending on the operation status and

protection status.

1.2.2 File Transfer Operation Files can be transferred from the Data Server to the host computer.

NOTE If an error occurs, check the cause of the error according to the Item,

“ETHERNET LOG screen” in Section 2.1, ”ETHERNET LOG” in Part VI, “MAINTENANCE.”

PUT

A file can be transferred from the Data Server to the host computer. 1 By using cursor keys , select a file to be transferred.

2 Press soft key [PUT]. • Press soft key [EXEC] for execution. • Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.

3 When a file is to be transferred to the host computer under a different file name, enter the desired transfer destination file name before pressing soft key [PUT].

MPUT

Multiple files can be transferred from the Data Server to the host computer. 1 Enter the names of files to be transferred. Specify the names of files using wildcards (*, ?). 2 Press soft key [MPUT].



- 107 -


LIST-PUT Multiple files can be transferred from the Data Server to the host computer according to a list file. 1 By using cursor keys , select a list file.

2 Press soft key [LIST-PUT]. • Press soft key [EXEC] for execution. • Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.

When execution is selected, the files are transferred from the Data Server to the host computer

according to the list file.

1.2.3 Preparations for File Operation and Editing

MAIN PROGRM A selected file can be registered as a main program. 1 Select the EDIT mode or MEM mode. 2 By using cursor keys , select a file to be registered as a main program.

3 Press soft key [MAIN PROGRM]. A registered main program can be executed in memory operation or edited.

NOTE 1 No file may be able to be selected, depending on the status such as operation

state or protection state. 2 Only a text file can be selected as a main program. 3 For a file selected as a main program and a file being used for memory

operation, no comment is displayed in detail display mode. 4 For a file selected as a main program, other file operations are disabled. 5 For memory operation and editing, refer to the OPERATOR’S MANUAL of the

CNC.

M198 SET A folder for M198-based subprogram calling can be specified. 1 Move to the folder containing a file to be called by M198-based subprogram calling. 2 Press soft key [M198 SET].

NOTE 1 No file may be able to be set, depending on the status such as operation state or

protection state. 2 This setting is valid when the operating mode of the Data Server is the storage

mode. 3 The specified folder name is stored and can be used without specifying it at the

next power-on.


- 108 -


DNC SET A file used for DNC operation can be selected. 1 Move to the folder containing a file to be used for DNC operation. 2 By using cursor keys , select a file to be used for DNC operation.

3 Press soft key [DNC SET].


protection state. 2 This setting is valid when the operating mode of the Data Server is the storage

mode. 3 The specified file name is not stored. Accordingly, specify a file again after

turning the power off, then on again.

FORE CHANGE / BACK CHANGE A foreground/background folder can be specified. 1 Move to the folder containing a foreground/background file. 2 Press soft key [FORE CHANGE] or [BACK CHANGE].

1.3 OPERATING THE DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST SCREEN

Host computer files can be operated on the DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST screen.

DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST screen


- 109 -


NOTE A file name containing a 2-byte code used for Japanese and others may not be

displayed correctly.

Display item M198 OPE FOLDER

Displays a folder (directory) for M198-based subprogram calling.

DNC OPE FILE Displays a file name used when DNC operation is performed.

DT SERVER FOLDER Displays the work folder (directory) of the Data Server (memory card).

CONNECT HOST Displays the number of the host computer currently connected.

DEVICE Displays the current device. If the host file list of the Data Server is selected, "DTSVR_HOST" is indicated.

CURRENT FOLDER Displays the work folder in the current host computer.

FILE LIST Displays information about the files and folders in the host computer.


Enables a device for display on the PROGRAM FOLDER screen. When selecting the host file list of the Data Server, press soft key [DTSVR HOST].

DNC SET Specifies a file for DNC operation.

M198 SET Specifies a folder for M198-based subprogram calling.






- 110 -


HOST CHANGE Changes the connected host computer.

SEARCH Searches for a file in the current folder.

GET Transfers a file from the host computer to the Data Server.

MGET Transfers files from the host computer to the Data Server by specifying a file name with wildcards (*, ?).

BGET Transfers a file from the host computer to the Data Server in binary format. Use this soft key to transfer a binary-format NC program or data other than an NC program such as NC parameter or tool data.

LIST-GET Transfers multiple files from the host computer to the Data Server according to a list file.


Inputs an NC program in the host computer to part program storage of the CNC. This soft key is enabled only when the Data Server is in the FTP mode and EDIT mode, and NC parameter No. 20 is set to “5”.


Outputs an NC program in part program storage of the CNC to the host computer. This soft key is enabled only when the Data Server is in the FTP mode and EDIT mode, and NC parameter No. 20 is set to “5”.

REFRESH Updates the information displayed on the DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST screen.

NOTE The operations of soft keys [GET], [MGET], [BGET], and [LIST-GET] are the

target operations of the memory protection key. This means that when the memory protection key is enabled, these operations

result in a "WRITE PROTECT" error and cannot be performed. For information about the memory protection key, refer to the CONNECTION

MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B-63943EN-1) of the CNC.


RENAME, DETAIL OFF, DETAIL ON The contents of the file list can be updated and displayed. 1 Press soft key [REFRESH] to update the contents of the file list. 2 Press soft key [DETAIL OFF] to display a file name only. 3 Press soft key [DETAIL ON] to display a file attribute, size, date, and file name.


- 111 -


NOTE 1 The information displayed with soft key [DETAIL ON] depends on the setting of

the FTP server on the host computer. 2 When a file operation is performed in the detail display mode, the rightmost

information displayed on the screen is handled as the file name. For this reason, the file operation may not be performed correctly depending on the displayed information or file name. In this case, set the overall display mode and perform the file operation.

MOVE FOLDER



CREATE FOLDER




2 Press soft key [DELETE]. • Press soft key [EXEC] for execution. • Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.

Specifying multiple files

Multiple files or folder can be deleted. 1 Press soft key [SELECT START]. 2 By using cursor keys , select a file to be deleted.

3 Press soft key [SELECT]. A selected file is displayed in reverse video. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for files to be deleted. 4 Press soft key [DELETE].


NOTE Up to 10 files can be selected at a time.


- 112 -


DELETE (new specification) Specifying a file or folder

A file or folder can be deleted. 1 Place the cursor on the name of a file or folder to be deleted. 2 Press soft key [DELETE].


Selecting a range

Multiple files or folders can be deleted. 1 Press soft key [SELECT]. 2 Place the cursor on the name of a file to be deleted and press soft key [RANGE SELECT]. 3 By using cursor keys , select a range of files to be deleted.










RENAME A file or folder can be renamed. 1 By using cursor keys , select a file or folder to be renamed.


SEARCH In the current work folder, a file can be found. 1 Enter a desired file name. 2 Press soft key [SEARCH],


- 113 -


HOST CHANGE

The connected host computer can be changed. 1 Press soft key [HOST CHANGE]. The connected host number changes in the order 1 → 2 → 3 → 1.

1.3.2 File Transfer Operation Files can be transferred from the host computer to the Data Server.

NOTE If an error occurs, check the cause of the error according to the Item,


GET

An NC program can be transferred from the host computer to the Data Server. 1 By using cursor keys , select a file to be transferred.

2 Press soft key [GET]. • Press soft key [EXEC] for execution. • Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.

3 When a file is to be transferred to the Data Server under a different file name, enter the desired transfer destination file name before pressing soft key [GET].

NOTE 1 Files cannot sometimes be transferred depending on the operation status and

protection status. 2 Use this operation only for text format NC programs.

MGET

Multiple NC programs can be transferred from the host computer to the Data Server. 1 Enter the names of files to be transferred. Specify the names of files using wildcards (*, ?). 2 Press soft key [MGET].



protection status. 2 Use this operation only for text format NC programs.


- 114 -


BGET A file can be transferred from the host computer to the Data Server. 1 By using cursor keys , select a file to be transferred.

2 Press soft key [BGET]. • Press soft key [EXEC] for execution. • Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.

3 When a file is to be transferred to the Data Server under a different file name, enter the desired transfer destination file name before pressing soft key [BGET].


protection status. 2 When transferring binary format NC programs and NC data such as tool offset

data, be sure to use the binary format.

LIST-GET Multiple files can be transferred from the host computer to the Data Server according to a list file. 1 By using cursor keys , select a list file.

2 Press soft key [LIST-GET]. • Press soft key [EXEC] for execution. • Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.

When execution is selected, the files are transferred from the host computer to the Data Server according to the list file.

NOTE Files cannot sometimes be transferred depending on the operation status and

protection status.

1.3.3 Preparations for File Operation

M198 OPE A folder for M198-based subprogram calling can be specified. 1 Move to the folder containing a file to be called by M198-based subprogram calling. 2 Press soft key [M198 SET].


protection state. 2 This setting is valid when the operating mode of the Data Server is the FTP

mode or buffer mode. 3 The specified folder name is stored and can be used without specifying it at the

next power-on.


- 115 -


DNC OPE A file used for DNC operation can be selected. 1 Move to the folder containing a file to be used for DNC operation. 2 By using cursor keys , select a file to be used for DNC operation.

3 Press soft key [DNC SET].


protection state. 2 This setting is valid when the operating mode of the Data Server is the FTP

mode or buffer mode. 3 The specified file name is not stored. Accordingly, specify a file again after

turning the power off, then on again.

1.4 M198-BASED SUBPROGRAM CALL If the Data Server is placed in the storage mode, an M198-based subprogram call can be made using an NC program in the Data Server. If the Data Server is placed in the FTP mode, an M198-based subprogram call can be made using an NC program in the host computer. If the Data Server is placed in the buffer mode, an M198-based subprogram call can be made using an NC program of the buffer mode format in the host computer.

NOTE 1 An M198-based subprogram call cannot be executed simultaneously with NC

program input, NC program output, and DNC operation. 2 In an M198-based subprogram call, no additional M198-baesd subprogram call

can be made. 3 M198-based subprogram calls do not allow use of file names. Use a program

number to make an M198-based call.

Subprogram call in the storage mode

Procedure 1 Check that the Data Server is placed in the storage mode. 2 Set the CNC to the MEM mode. 3 Display the DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen to check that an M198 operation folder is set. 4 Automatically operate the NC program including the M198 command.

Subprogram call in the FTP mode

Procedure 1 Check that the Data Server is placed in the FTP mode. 2 Set the CNC to the MEM mode. 3 Display the DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST screen to check that an M198 operation folder is set. 4 Automatically operate the NC program including the M198 command.


- 116 -


Subprogram call in the buffer mode

Procedure 1 Check that the Data Server is placed in the buffer mode. 2 Set the CNC to the MEM mode. 3 Display the DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST screen to check that an M198 operation folder is set. 4 Automatically operate the NC program including the M198 command.

1.5 DNC OPERATION If the Data Server is placed in the storage mode, DNC operation can be performed using an NC program in the Data Server. If the Data Server is placed in the FTP mode, DNC operation can be performed using an NC program in the host computer. If the Data Server is placed in the buffer mode, DNC operation can be performed using an NC program of the buffer mode format in the host computer.

NOTE A DNC operation cannot be executed simultaneously with NC program input, NC

program output, and M198-based subprogram call.

DNC operation in the storage mode

Procedure 1 Check that the Data Server is placed in the storage mode. 2 Set the CNC to the RMT mode. 3 Display the DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen to check that a DNC operation file is set. 4 Perform a cycle start to execute DNC operation.

DNC operation in the FTP mode

Procedure 1 Check that the Data Server is placed in the FTP mode. 2 Set the CNC to the RMT mode. 3 Display the DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST screen to check that a DNC operation file is set. 4 Perform a cycle start to execute DNC operation.

DNC operation in the buffer mode

Procedure 1 Check that the Data Server is placed in the buffer mode. 2 Set the CNC to the RMT mode. 3 Display the DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST screen to check that a DNC operation file is set. 4 Perform a cycle start to execute DNC operation.

1.6 NC PROGRAM INPUT When the Data Server mode is the storage mode, NC programs on the Data Server can be input to part program storage of the CNC. When the Data Server mode is the FTP mode, NC programs on the host computer can be input to part program storage of the CNC. When the Data Server mode is the buffer mode, buffer mode format NC programs on the host computer can be input to part program storage of the CNC.


- 117 -


CAUTION

If bit 2 of NC parameter No. 3201 is set to 1, when an NC program having the same file name as an NC program to be input is already present in part program storage, the existing NC program is overwritten.

NOTE NC programs cannot be input simultaneously with an NC program output,

M198-based subprogram call, and DNC operation.

Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 Display the PROGRAM screen or PROGRAM FOLDER screen. 3 Press soft key [READ] ([F INPUT] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B). 4 In the key-in buffer, enter the name of a file to be input on the Data Server, and press soft key [F

SET]. When the file name on the Data Server is not set, file name "ALL-PROG.TXT" is used by default. 5 To rename the input file and input it into part program storage, enter the new file name in the key-in

buffer, and press soft key [P SET]. 6 Press soft key [EXEC]. 7 During inputting, "INPUT" blinks in the lower right part of the screen.

NOTE In the buffer mode, a file specified with soft key [F SET] is treated as a file list.

Therefore, NC program input processing is performed on the assumption that files defined in the file list are a continuous file image.

1.7 NC PROGRAM OUTPUT When the Data Server mode is the storage mode or buffer mode, NC programs in part program storage of the CNC can be output to the Data Server. When the Data Server mode is the FTP mode, NC programs in part program storage of the CNC can be output to the host computer.

NOTE NC programs cannot be output simultaneously with an NC program input,

M198-based subprogram call, and DNC operation.

Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 Display the PROGRAM screen or PROGRAM FOLDER screen. 3 Press soft key [PUNCH] ([F OUTPUT] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B). 4 In the key-in buffer, enter the name of a file to be output in part program storage, and press soft key

[P SET]. When a specific file name in part program storage is not set, all files in the foreground folder are

assumed to be output.


- 118 -


5 To rename the output file and output it to the Data Server, enter the new file name in the key-in buffer, and press soft key [F SET].

When only a file in part program storage is specified, but no file name on the Data Server is specified, a file is created with the file name used in part program storage.

6 Press soft key [EXEC]. 7 During outputting, "OUTPUT" blinks in the lower right part of the screen.

NOTE 1 When neither file in part program storage nor file name on the Data Server is

specified, all files in the foreground folder are output with file name "ALL-PROG.TXT" to the Data Server.

2 When an NC program is output in the storage mode or buffer mode, if a file with the same name is already present on the memory card of the Data Server, an error occurs.

1.8 FTP SERVER FUNCTIONS The FTP server functions allow communication with FTP clients on the host computer.

NOTE 1 Up to five FTP clients can be connected to the FTP server. Some FTP client

software products may attempt to internally connect the FTP server as two or more FTP clients, however. For this reason, the number of FTP clients actually connected may differ from that of FTP client applications that can be connected.

If the DataServer Explorer connection is enabled, one CNC can connect up to ten FTP clients. For the DataServer Explorer connection, see Section 3.7, "DATASERVER Explorer CONNECTION," in Part II, "SPECIFICATION."

2 On the memory card on the Data Server, text files and binary files are distinguished from each other. You can specify text (ASCII) or binary (image) when transferring a file from the FTP client to use the file as a text or binary file. The file attribute can be fixed to text or binary regardless of which is specified from the FTP client according to the setting of NC parameter No. 929. For details, see Section 2.2, “RELATED NC PARAMETERS” in Part III, “SETTING”.

3 The creation date and time of a folder are not managed in the Data Server. For this reason, the creation date and time of a folder in folder information obtained from a personal computer are January 1, 2000.

4 Since the file size is managed in units of 500 bytes on the memory card on the Data Server, the file size in units of 500 bytes can be obtained from a personal computer.


- 119 -

2.OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS

2 OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS

This chapter describes how to operate the machine remote diagnosis functions.

2.1 OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS SCREEN


2 Soft key [REMOTE DIAG] appear. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.) 3 Press soft key [REMOTE DIAG] to display the machine remote diagnosis screen.

Machine remote diagnosis screen

4 Press soft key [(OPRT)] to display available soft keys.

Display item INQUIRY NUMBER

Displays the inquiry number indicating the machine remote diagnosis accepting server: "INQUIRY1," "INQUIRY2," or "INQUIRY3."

INQUIRY Displays information for identifying the machine remote diagnosis accepting server.

RMT DIAG STATUS Displays the status of machine remote diagnosis.

RMT DIAG TIME Displays the time until the machine remote diagnosis status changes from "OPEN" to "CLOSE," "FORCE CLOSING," or "ERROR."


- 120 -

2. OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS

At each start of diagnosis, the time is accumulated from "00:00:00."

RECEIPT NUMBER Displays the receipt number issued by the machine remote diagnosis accepting server.

ERROR NUMBER Displays the number of an error which occurs in operation of the machine remote diagnosis functions.

AVAILABLE DEVICE Displays the type of communication device for which the machine remote diagnosis functions can operate.

ERROR MESSAGE Displays the message indicating an error which occurs in operation of the machine remote diagnosis functions.

Operation list DIAG OPEN

Starts machine remote diagnosis.

DIAG CLOSE Forcibly terminates machine remote diagnosis.

INQUIRY1 Selects inquiry destination 1.



2.1.1 Selecting an Inquiry Destination Select an inquiry destination among inquiry destinations 1 to 3. 1 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. 2 Press soft key [INQUIRY1] to select inquiry destination 1. 3 Similarly, press soft key [INQUIRY2] to select inquiry destination 2 and soft key [INQUIRY3] to

select inquiry destination 3.

2.1.2 Starting Diagnosis Start diagnosis. 1 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. 2 Press soft key [DIAG OPEN] to start diagnosis.

2.1.2.1 Diagnosis status Status Description

--- No operation OPEN [DIAG OPEN] was pressed.

OPENING An attempt is being made to connect the machine remote diagnosis accepting server.


- 121 -

2.OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS

Status Description ACCEPTED The machine remote diagnosis accepting server accepted diagnosis. REFUSED The machine remote diagnosis accepting server rejected diagnosis.

DIAGNOSING This message flashes in synchronization with data flowing on the communication line.

CLOSE The machine remote diagnosis accepting server terminated diagnosis.

FORCE CLOSING [DIAG CLOSE] was pressed. After the completion of forced termination processing, "---" is indicated in the RMT DIAG STATUS field.

ERROR An error occurred on the communication line.

2.1.2.2 Error numbers and error messages Number Error message Meaning and action to be taken

1 Diagnosis is busy [DIAG OPEN] was pressed during diagnosis.

2 Router isn’t alive The IP address of the router may be invalid or the power to the router may be off. Check whether the IP address of the router is valid and whether the power to the router is on.

3 Receipt Server isn’t alive

The IP address of the machine remote diagnosis accepting server may be invalid or the machine remote diagnosis accepting server may not be operating. Check whether the IP address of the machine remote diagnosis accepting server is valid and whether the machine remote diagnosis accepting server is operating.

4 System error A system error occurred. Check the log messages on the ETHERNET LOG screen and contact FANUC.

5 Invalid Inquiry number.

A value outside the valid setting range may be set for the inquiry destination. Check whether the correct inquiry destination is set.

6 Invalid IP Address Set the IP address according to the IP address specification format.

7 Invalid PORT number A value outside the valid setting range may be set for the port number. Check whether the correct port number is set.

8 Invalid Router IP Address

Set the IP address of the router according to the IP address specification format.

9 Socket error

A communication error occurred due to a cause as listed below. Check the network wiring and anti-noise measures. → The network quality degraded, data could not be received from the

personal computer with which to communicate, and the logical communication path was disconnected.

→ The software component on the personal computer with which to communicate forcibly disconnected the logical communication path.

→ The Ethernet cable was disconnected.

11 Invalid Request An internal error related to machine remote diagnosis occurred in the CNC. Check the log messages on the ETHERNET LOG screen and contact FANUC.

12 Invalid Packet An unrecognizable packet was received. Check the log messages on the ETHERNET LOG screen and contact FANUC.

13 Diagnosis was already stopped

[DIAG CLOSE] was pressed not during diagnosis.

17 Receive error An attempt to receive data failed. See Number 9 and check the network wiring and anti-noise measures.

19 HeartBeat timeout Communication with the machine remote diagnosis accepting server stopped. See Number 9 and check the network wiring and anti-noise measures.

20 HeartBeat error An attempt was failed to send a heartbeat packet for machine remote diagnosis. See Number 9 and check the network wiring and anti-noise measures.


- 122 -

2. OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS

Number Error message Meaning and action to be taken

22 DNS error

An attempt was failed to connect the machine remote diagnosis accepting server using the DNS function. The IP address of the DNS server may be invalid or the power to the DNS server may be off. Check whether the IP address of the DNS server is valid and whether the power to the DNS server is on.

2.1.3 Forcibly Terminating Diagnosis Forcibly terminate diagnosis. 1 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. 2 Press soft key [DIAG CLOSE] to forcibly terminate diagnosis.


- 123 -

3.OPERATING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION

3 OPERATING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION

This chapter describes how to operate the FTP File Transfer function. On the PROGRAM FOLDER screen, files on the CNC memory, memory card, host computer connected via the embedded Ethernet or host computer connected via the Fast Ethernet board can be handled by selecting a device.

CNC memory

Memory card

FAST EthernetBoard

File list

File list


Via FAST EthernetBoard


Series 30 i - A

WithoutMemory Card

CNC memory

Memory card

FAST EthernetBoard

File list

File list


Via FAST EthernetBoard


Series 30 i - A

WithoutMemory Card

WithoutMemory Card

In this manual, the method of handling files on the host computer connected via the Fast Ethernet board is described.

NOTE The FTP file transfer function cannot perform an M198-based subprogram call or

DNC operation. To perform it, use the Data Server functions.


- 124 -

3. OPERATING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION

3.1 DEVICE CHANGE ON THE PROGRAM FOLDER SCREEN


2 Press soft key [FOLDER] to display the PROGRAM FOLDER screen. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)


3 Press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [DEVICE CHANGE] to display the soft keys for selectable

devices.

4 When you press soft key [FTP HOST], the information displayed on the PROGRAM FOLDER screen is changed to the contents (FTP TRANSFER HOST FILE LIST screen) of the hard disk of the host computer to enable file operation.


- 125 -


3.2 OPERATING THE FTP TRANSFER HOST FILE LIST SCREEN Host computer files can be operated on the FTP TRANSFER HOST FILE LIST screen.

FTP TRANSFER HOST FILE LIST screen

NOTE A file name containing a 2-byte code used for Japanese and others may not be

displayed correctly.

Display item CONNECT HOST

Displays the number of the host computer currently connected.

REGISTERED PROGRAM The number of programs in the current folder.

DEVICE Displays the current device. If the host file list of the Fast Ethernet board is selected, "FTP_HOST" is indicated.

CURRENT FOLDER Displays the work folder in the current host computer.

FILE LIST Displays information about the files and folders in the host computer.


- 126 -



Enables a device for display on the PROGRAM FOLDER screen. When selecting the host file list of the Fast Ethernet board, press soft key [FTP HOST].





HOST CHANGE Changes the connected host computer.

SEARCH Searches for a file in the current folder.


When the CNC is placed in the EDIT mode and CNC parameter No.20 is equal 5, it is possible to input NC programs in the host computer to program memory of the CNC.


When the CNC is placed in the EDIT mode and CNC parameter No.20 is equal 5, it is possible to output NC programs in program memory of the CNC to the host computer.

REFRESH Updates the information displayed on the FTP TRANSFER HOST FILE LIST screen.


RENAME, DETAIL OFF, DETAIL ON The contents of the file list can be updated and displayed. 1 Press soft key [REFRESH] to update the contents of the file list. 2 Press soft key [DETAIL OFF] to display a file name only. 3 Press soft key [DETAIL ON] to display a file attribute, size, date, and file name.

NOTE 1 The information displayed with soft key [DETAIL ON] depends on the setting of

the FTP server on the host computer.


- 127 -


NOTE 2 When a file operation is performed in the detail display mode, the rightmost

information displayed on the screen is handled as the file name. For this reason, the file operation may not be performed correctly depending on the displayed information or file name. In this case, set the overall display mode and perform the file operation.

MOVE FOLDER



CREATE FOLDER





Specifying multiple files

Multiple files or folder can be deleted. 1 Press soft key [SELECT START]. 2 By using cursor keys , select a file to be deleted.

3 Press soft key [SELECT]. A selected file is displayed in reverse video. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for files to be deleted.


NOTE Up to 10 files can be selected at a time.


- 128 -


DELETE (new specification) Specifying a file or folder

A file or folder can be deleted. 1 Place the cursor on the name of a file or folder to be deleted. 2 Press soft key [DELETE].


Selecting a range

Multiple files or folders can be deleted. 1 Press soft key [SELECT]. 2 Place the cursor on the name of a file to be deleted and press soft key [RANGE SELECT]. 3 By using cursor keys , select a range of files to be deleted.










RENAME A file or folder can be renamed. 1 By using cursor keys , select a file or folder to be renamed.


SEARCH In the current work folder, a file can be found. 1 Enter a desired file name. 2 Press soft key [SEARCH],


- 129 -


HOST CHANGE

The connected host computer can be changed. 1 Press soft key [HOST CHANGE]. The connected host number changes in the order 1 → 2 → 3 → 1.

3.3 NC PROGRAM INPUT NC programs in the host computer can be input to program memory of the CNC.

CAUTION If bit 2 of NC parameter No. 3201 is set to 1, when an NC program having the

same file name as an NC program to be input is already present in program memory, the existing NC program is overwritten.

NOTE NC programs cannot be input simultaneously with an NC program output.

Procedure

1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 Display the PROGRAM screen, PROGRAM FOLDER screen or FTP TRANSFER HOST LIST

screen. 3 Press soft key [READ] ([F INPUT] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B). 4 In the key-in buffer, enter the name of a file to be input on the host computer, and press soft key [F

SET]. When the file name on the host computer is not set, file name "ALL-PROG.TXT" is used by default.

5 To rename the input file and input it into program memory, enter the new file name in the key-in buffer, and press soft key [P SET].

6 Press soft key [EXEC]. 7 During inputting, "INPUT" blinks in the lower right part of the screen.

3.4 NC PROGRAM OUTPUT NC programs in program memory of the CNC can be output to the host computer.

NOTE NC programs cannot be output simultaneously with an NC program input.

Procedure

1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 Display the PROGRAM screen, PROGRAM FOLDER screen or FTP TRANSFER HOST LIST

screen. 3 Press soft key [PUNCH] ([F OUTPUT] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B).


- 130 -


4 In the key-in buffer, enter the name of a file to be output in program memory, and press soft key [P SET].

When a specific file name in program memory is not set, all files in the foreground folder are assumed to be output.

5 To rename the output file and output it to the host computer, enter the new file name in the key-in buffer, and press soft key [F SET].

When only a file in program memory is specified, but no file name on the host computer is specified, a file is created with the file name used in program memory.

6 Press soft key [EXEC]. 7 During outputting, "OUTPUT" blinks in the lower right part of the screen.

NOTE When neither file in program memory nor file name on the host computer is

specified, all files in the foreground folder are output with file name "ALL-PROG.TXT" to the host computer.

V. CONNECTION

B-64014EN/04 CONNECTION 1.SETTING

- 133 -

1 SETTING This chapter provides information required to install the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server.

1.1 Series 30i/31i/32i-A

1.1.1 Specifications

Ordering information of optional board A02B-0303-J146 Drawing number of printed circuit board A20B-8101-0030 Applicable models Series 30i/31i/32i-A

NOTE 1 When using the optional board, observe the installation condition (environmental

condition inside the cabinet) of the CNC control unit where the board is installed. 2 Even if a control unit is installed in the environment described above, the

contents on the memory card may be destroyed as a result of a operation mistake or unexpected event. This tends to happen if the power is turned off while accessing the memory card. An accident can occur. So, ensure that the data on the memory card is backed up at all times.

The table below indicates the amount of heat output by the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server. For the amount of heat output by the main CNC unit and other optional units, refer to the CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) of the CNC.

Name Fast Ethernet Fast Data Server Fast Ethernet board only 6 W 6 W

Memory card - 0.3 W (Note) Total 6 W 6.3 W

NOTE The amount of heat output by the memory card may vary, depending on the

employment of a large-capacity card, a modification to the card specifications, and so forth.

1.1.2 Installation This section provides information relating to the installation of the Fast Ethernet and Fast Data Server.

1.1.2.1 Installation on an LCD-mounted type unit The optional board is installed in an optional slot of the control unit. It occupies one slot. No restriction is imposed on installation in the optional slot.

1.SETTING CONNECTION B-64014EN/04

- 134 -

Optional board

NOTE 1 When using the Data Server functions, install a memory card in CNH6 before

installing the board in the optional slot. While the board is installed in the optional slot, the memory card cannot be installed/removed.

2 Use the memory card recommended by FANUC.

1.1.2.2 Installation on a stand-alone type unit The optional board is installed in the optional slot of the control unit. One slot is occupied. No restriction is imposed on installation in the optional slot.

NOTE 1 When using the Data Server functions, install a memory card in CNH6 before

installing the board in the optional slot. While the board is installed in the optional slot, the memory card cannot be installed/removed.

2 Use the memory card recommended by FANUC.


- 135 -

1.1.2.3 Total connection diagram

CD38R 1 TX+ 2 TX- 3 RX+ 4 5 6 RX- 7 8

CNH6

Fast Ethernet/ Fast Data Server

Memory card

HUB

1.1.2.4 Installing a memory card The following shows the specifications of memory cards recommended as an external storage device of the Fast Data Server.

Specification Capacity Remarks A02B-0281-K601 128MB Compact Flash card A02B-0213-K211 256MB Compact Flash card A02B-0213-K212 1GB Compact Flash card A02B-0213-K213 2GB Compact Flash card A02B-0213-K214 4GB Compact Flash card

For adapters that convert data on the above Compact Flash cards to that for an ATA card, the operation of the following adapters has been confirmed: FANUC adapter A02B-0236-K150 and Sandisk adapters SDCF-31-03 and SDAD-38-J60.

NOTE 1 Use a FANUC-recommended memory card for the Data Server.

Follow the instructions described in “Note for using this card” supplied with a memory card.

2 For latest information, refer to the Technical Report provided separately.


- 136 -

Installing a memory card 1 Remove the screws of (1) and (2) for securing the stopper plate.

(1)

(2)

(3)

2 Remove the stopper plate, then insert the memory card into the connector.

MEM

ORY

Car

d

3 Secure the memory card with the stopper plate and tighten the screws of (1) and (2) for securing the

stopper plate.

MEM

ORY

Car

d

(4)

(5)


- 137 -

1.2 Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B

1.2.1 Specifications In case of using the Ethernet function, specify the control unit with Multi-function Ethernet (LCD-mounted type CNC) or the Fast Ethernet board. In case of using the Data Server function, specify the Fast Ethernet board. Ordering information of optional board A02B-0323-J147 Drawing number of printed circuit board A20B-8101-0770 Applicable models Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B

NOTE 1 Refer to the order list of each CNC, for ordering information for Multi-function

Ethernet. 2 When using the optional board, observe the installation condition (environmental

condition inside the cabinet) of the CNC control unit where the board is installed. 3 Even if a control unit is installed in the environment described above, the

contents on the Compact Flash card may be destroyed as a result of a operation mistake or unexpected event. This tends to happen if the power is turned off while accessing the Compact Flash card. An accident can occur. So, ensure that the data on the Compact Flash card is backed up at all times.

The table below indicates the amount of heat output by the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server. For the amount of heat output by the main CNC unit and other optional units, refer to the CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) of the CNC.

Name Fast Ethernet Fast Data Server Fast Ethernet board only 3W 3W

Compact Flash card － 0.3W (Note 2) Total 3W 3.3W

NOTE 1 For the control unit with Multi-function Ethernet (LCD mounted type CNC), refer

to the CONNECTION MANUAL of the CNC. 2 The amount of heat output by the Compact Flash card may vary, depending on

the employment of a large-capacity card, a modification to the card specifications, and so forth.


- 138 -

1.2.2 Installation

1.2.2.1 Installation on an LCD-mounted type unit For the control unit with Multi-function Ethernet, the Fast Ethernet and Fast Data Server are installed on the main board.

Rear of unit

Multi-function Ethernet

The optional board is installed in an optional slot of the control unit. It occupies one slot. No restriction is imposed on installation in the optional slot.

Optional board

NOTE 1 When using the Data Server functions, install a Compact Flash card in CD58

before installing the board in the optional slot. While the board is installed in the optional slot, the Compact Flash card cannot be installed/removed.

2 For the Data Server for the Series 30i/31i/32i-B, directly install a Compact Flash card. It is not necessary to use an adapter which converts data for that for an ATA card (A02B-0236-K150).

3 Use the Compact Flash card recommended by FANUC.


- 139 -

1.2.2.2 Installation on a stand-alone type unit The optional board is installed in the optional slot of the control unit. One slot is occupied. No restriction is imposed on installation in the optional slot.

NOTE 1 When using the Data Server functions, install a Compact Flash card in CD58

before installing the board in the optional slot. While the board is installed in the optional slot, the Compact Flash card cannot be installed/removed.

2 For the Data Server for the Series 30i/31i/32i-B, directly install a Compact Flash card. It is not necessary to use an adapter which converts data for that for an ATA card (A02B-0236-K150).

3 Use the Compact Flash card recommended by FANUC.


- 140 -

1.2.2.3 Total connection diagram

1.2.2.4 Installing a memory card

The following shows the specifications of memory cards recommended as an external storage device of the Fast Data Server.

Specification Capacity Remarks A02B-0281-K601 128MB Compact Flash card A02B-0213-K211 256MB Compact Flash card A02B-0213-K212 1GB Compact Flash card A02B-0213-K213 2GB Compact Flash card A02B-0213-K214 4GB Compact Flash card

NOTE 1 Use a FANUC-recommended memory card for the Data Server.

Follow the instructions described in “Note for using this card” supplied with a memory card.

2 For latest information, refer to the Technical Report provided separately.

CD38 1 TX+ 2 TX- 3 RX+ 4 5 6 RX- 7 8

CD58

Fast Ethernet/ Fast Data Server

Compact Flash card

HUB


- 141 -

Installing a Compact Flash card 1 Remove the cover (put up the tip of cover), as shown below.

CD58

2 Insert the Compact Flash card to CD58.

Com

pact

Fl

ash

card

CD58

3 The cover is matched to the guide and set on. As a result, the Compact Flash card is fixed.

Guide

GuideCD58

2.CABLE CONNECTION CONNECTION B-64014EN/04

- 142 -

2 CABLE CONNECTION This section describes information relating to the physical Ethernet connection.

CAUTION 1 Before connecting or disconnecting the cable to or from the Fast Ethernet/Fast

Data Server, make sure that the power to the CNC is turned off. 2 Please inquire of each manufacturer about the construction of network or the

condition of using the equipment except the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server (hub, transceiver, cable etc.). When configuring your network, you must take other sources of electrical noise into consideration to prevent your network from being influenced by electrical noise. Make sure that network wiring is sufficiently separated from power lines and other sources of electrical noise such as motors, and ground each of the devices as necessary. Also, a high and insufficient ground impedance may cause interference during communications. After installing the machine, conduct a communications test before you actually start operating the machine.

We cannot ensure operation that is influenced by network trouble caused by a device other than the Fast Ethernet or Fast Data Server.

2.1 CONNECTING TO Ethernet The Fast Ethernet or Fast Data Server is provided with a 100BASE-TX interface. Prepare a hub for connecting the Fast Ethernet board to the Ethernet trunk. The following shows an example of a general connection. Some devices (hub, transceiver, etc.) that are needed for building a network do not come in a dust-proof construction. Using such devices in an atmosphere where they are subjected to dust or oil mist will interfere with communications or damage the Fast Ethernet or Fast Data Server. Be sure to install such devices in a dust-proof cabinet.

B-64014EN/04 CONNECTION 2.CABLE CONNECTION

- 143 -

HUB

CNC

Fast Ethernet or Fast Data Server

: : :

Max. 100m

Twisted paircable

NOTE 1 The cable can be up to 100 m long (for the FANUC- recommended cable for

movable sections, up to 50 m). Do not make the cable longer than necessary. 2 An Ethernet cable needs clamping to make system operation stable. For details

of clamping, see Subsection 2.5.2, “Cable Clamp and Shield Processing”. The clamp for grounding the shield of the cable can also fix the cable.

Control unit

Ethernet cable

Clamp

Grounding plate

3 Some of the units (hub, transceiver, etc.) required to build a network are not

dust-proof. They should be enclosed in a dust-proof cabinet. Using them in an atmosphere with dust or oil mist may lead to a communication error or failure.


- 144 -

2.2 LEADING OUT THE Ethernet CABLE (1) LCD-mounted type Select the control unit with Multi-function Ethernet or optional board. For the location of the

connector, see Subsection 1.1.1 or 1.2.1, “Component Layout”, in Part VI, “MAINTENANCE”.

Optional board(CD38R)

Twisted-pair cable

Ground plate

Clamp

The radius of the cable must be 70 mm or more.

Control unit with Multi-function Ethernet (CD38B)

(2) Stand-alone type Select the optional board. For the location of the connector, see Subsection 1.1.1 or 1.2.1,

“Component Layout”, in Part VI, “MAINTENANCE”.

The radius of the cablemust be 70 mm or more.

Twisted-pair cable

Clamp

Ground plate

2.3 RJ-45 CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENTS

Pin No. Signal name Description 1 TX+ Send + 2 TX- Send - 3 RX+ Receive + 4 Not used 5 Not used 6 RX- Receive - 7 Not used 8 Not used


- 145 -

2.4 TWISTED-PAIR CABLE SPECIFICATION

2.4.1 Cable Connection The cable used for connection between the 100BASE-TX interface, CD38R, of the Ethernet board/Data Server board and the hub is connected as follows:

1 TX+ 2 TX- 3 RX+ 4 5 6 RX- 7 8

Ethernet board / Data Server board

CD38 1 TX+ 2 TX- 3 RX+ 4 5 6 RX- 7 8

HUB

TX+ (1)

TX- (2)

RX+ (3)

RX- (6)

(1) TX+

(2) TX-

(3) RX+

(6) RX-

Shielded cable

RJ-45 modular connector

MAX.100m

• Keep the total cable length within 100 m. Do not extend the cable more than is necessary. • The figure above shows the cable connection when cables are crossed in the hub. "X" is usually indicated at the port of the hub to signify that cables are crossed in the hub.

1 TX+

2 TX-

3 RX+

6 RX-

TX+ 1

TX- 2

RX+ 3

RX- 6

HUB

X

Ethernet board / Data Server board Cross-connected

cables

2.4.2 Cable Materials

CAUTION Unshielded cable (UTP cable) is commercially available as 100BASE-TX

twisted-pair cable: You should, however, use shielded Category 5 twisted-pair cable (STP cable) to improve the resistance to electrical noise in an FA environment.

Recommended cables

Manufacturer Specification Remarks FURUKAWA ELECTRIC CO., LTD. DTS5087C-4P Twisted-pair cable


- 146 -

Manufacturer Specification Remarks NISSEI ELECTRIC CO., LTD. F-4PFWMF Single-conductor cable

Inquiries

Manufacturer Contact address FURUKAWA ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

Sales Headquarters2-6-1 Marunouchi, Chiyoda-ku. Tokyo 100-8322 TEL: 03-3286-3126 FAX: 03-3286-3979

Remarks NISSEI ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

Machida Branch3F MU Bldg., 1-9-1 Minami-narise, Machida City, Tokyo 194-0045 TEL: 0427-29-2531 FAX: 0427-29-3375

Overseas Sales Office IWATANI International Corporation Tokyo Head Office 21-8 Nishi-shinbashi 3-chome, Minato-ku, TOKYO, 105-8458, JAPAN TEL: 03-5405-5810 FAX: 03-5405-5666 Telex: 2524256 IWATYO J

Remarks A finished cable with connectors at both ends can be offered.

NOTE The above recommended cables cannot be connected to moving parts.

Recommended cable (for movable parts)

Manufacturer Specification Remarks Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. AWG26 4P TPMC-C5-F(SB) Shinko Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. FNC-118

Dedicated to FANUC

Specification • Electric characteristics: Conforms to EIA/TIA 568A Category 3 and Category 5. From the viewpoint of attenuation performance, ensure that the length to the hub is 50 m or less. • Structure: Group shielded (braided shield). A drain wire is available. The conductor is an AWG26 annealed copper twisted wire, with a sheath thickness of 0.8 mm and

an outer diameter of 6.7 mm ±0.3 mm. • Fire retardancy UL1581 VW-1 • Oil resistance Conforms to the FANUC internal standards (equivalent to the conventional oil-resistant electric

cables). • Flexing resistance: 1,000,000 times or more with a bending radius of 50 mm (U-shaped flex test) • UL style No. AWM 20276 (80°C/30V/VW-1)

NOTE Be sure to use the connector TM21CP-88P(03) manufactured by HIROSE

ELECTRIC CO., LTD. for this cable.


- 147 -

Inquiries Manufacturer Contact address

Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. Nagano Sales Office TEL:0266-27-1597 Remarks Shinko Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Tokyo Sales Office TEL:03-3492-0073 Remarks Cable assembly Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. can also supply the cable assembly mentioned above. Contact Oki Electric directly to determine the specifications (length, factory test, packing, and so

forth) for purchase.

2.4.3 Connector Specification Use an 8-pin modular connector (RJ-45) with the twisted-pair cable for the Ethernet connection. The following connectors or equivalents must be used.

For general use Specification Manufacturer Remarks Solid wire 5-569530-3 Tyco Electronics AMP K.K..

Solid wire MS8-RSZT-EMC SK KOHKI CO., LTD. Special tools required

Twisted-pair cable 5-569552-3 Tyco Electronics AMP K.K..

Twisted-pair cable TM11AP-88P HIROSE ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

Special tools required

For movable parts Specification Manufacturer Remarks

For cable AWG26 4P TPMC-C5-F(SB) or FNC-118

TM21CP-88P(03) HIROSE ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

Note

NOTE Information about TM21CP-88P(03): Connector (standard product of the manufacturer) Drawing number: A63L-0001-0823#P Manufacturer: HIROSE ELECTRIC CO., LTD. Manufacturer type number: TM21CP-88P(03) Conforms to EIA/TIA 568A Category 3 and Category 5. For assembly with a cable, contact HIROSE ELECTRIC CO., LTD. directly. (From HIROSE ELECTRIC CO., LTD., "TM21CP-88P(03) Connection Procedure

Manual (Technical Specification No. ATAD-E2367)" is available as a technical document.)


- 148 -

2.5 ELECTRICAL NOISE COUNTERMEASURES

2.5.1 Separating Signal Lines For signal line separation, refer to the description of noise protection in the Connection Manual (Hardware) of CNC. The wiring for the Ethernet cable is of group C.

2.5.2 Clamping and Shielding Cables Clamp an Ethernet twisted pair cable according to the method described below, as with cables that need to be shielded. Clamping cables provides support and shielding and is extremely important to the safe operation of the system. Never overlook cable clamping. Peel off part of the jacket as shown in the figure to expose the outer coating of the shield, and press this outer coating against the ground plate with the clamp fixture. The machine manufacturer must prepare the ground plate and install it as follows:

Shield

Peel off jacket

Ground plate

Ground plate

Cable

Cable clamp

NOTE To ensure the safe operation of the system, clamp and shield the cables.

Connect the Ethernet board and hub with a twisted-pair cable. Shield the cable with clamp fixtures. This shielding is extremely important to the stable operation of the system. Be sure to shield the cable. Shield both ends of each cable at locations as nearest to the CNC and hub connectors as possible. When the CNC and hub are contained in the same power magnetics cabinet and the cable is short, shield the cable only at the hub side.


- 149 -

Power magnetics cabinet Control unit

Twisted-pair cable

Shielding

HUB

Power magnetics cabinetControl unit

Example of shielding of transceiver cable (When LCD-mounted type Series 30i-A)

Prepare the following earth plate.

Mounting screw hole

Ground terminal (used for grounding)

Clamp fixture mounting hole

Use a nickel-plated iron plate at least 2 mm thick as the ground plate.

Ground plate8mm

12mm

20mm

Details of clamp fixture mounting holes


- 150 -

55mm max.

28mm

6mm

17mm

External dimensions of clamp fixture

2.5.3 Grounding the Network Even if the grounding condition on the machine side is satisfied, the communication line can pick up noise from the machine, depending on the machine installation condition and environment, thus resulting in a communication error. To protect against such noise, the machine should be separated and insulated from the Ethernet trunk cable and personal computer. Examples of connection are given below.

Ethernet

Machine

Machine Machine

STP cable STP cable

Electrically separated by 100BASE-TX cable connection

Personal computer

Personal computer / HUB side

Machine system

Note 1

Hub power supply

Note 1 Note 1

Note 1

HUB

Note 2

Note 1 Note 1 Note 1

HUB

Note 2

Note 2

Switching HUB

Large-Scale Network


- 151 -

Note 1

HUB

STP cableElectrically separated

by 100BASE-TX cable connection

Personal computer

Note 1 Personal computer/Ethernet trunk side

Machine system

Hub power supply

Ethernet

Machine

Note 2

Note 1

Note 1

Small-Scale Network

NOTE 1 The ground between PC/HUB side and machine system side must be separated.

If it is impossible to separate the ground because there is only one grounding point, connect the ground cable for each system to the grounding point independently. (See figure below.)

The resistance for grounding must be less than 100-ohm (Class D). The thickness of the ground cable is the same as the thickness of AC power cable or more. At least thickness of 5.5mm2 is necessary.

2 Note that the number of allowable hub-to-hub connections depends on the type of hub.

3 There is possibility that noise makes the obstacle of communication even if the ground is separated using the 100BASE-TX. In the case of using the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server under the worst environment, please separate between the PC/Trunk line side and machine system side completely using the 100BASE-FX (Optical fiber media).


- 152 -

HUB

Machine

Ground wire on personal computer and trunk sides

Ground wire on machine system

FG

Ground point

Note 2

Ground wire on machine system

Wiring on a single ground point

2.6 CHECK ITEMS AT INSTALLATION The following table lists check items at installation.

Check item Description CheckEthernet cable

Use cables which satisfies all the following conditions: 1) With shielding 2) Twisted-pair cable

Type

3) Category 5

Length The cable length shall be within 100 m (50 m for a movable cable recommended by FANUC).

For a twisted-pair cable, the following pins shall be paired: 1) Pin No. 1 (TX+) – pin No. 2 (TX-) Connection 2) Pin No. 3 (RX+) – pin No. 6 (RX-) The Ethernet cables shall be bound separately from the following cables or covered with an electromagnetic shield:

1) Group A: AC power lines, power lines for motors, and others Separation

2) Group B: Current DC (24 VDC) and others

Shielding For a shielded cable, the part of which outer coating is peeled off and exposed shall be fixed to the ground plate with a clamp fixture.

Clamping The ground plate shall be located as nearest to the CNC as possible (to make the cable between the ground plate and CNC hard to be affected by noise).

Connectors Any cable connector shall not be pulled (to prevent poor contact of the connector). Wiring No cable shall be laid under a heavy object.

Bending radius The bending radius shall be at least four times as long as the diameter of the cable.

For movable part

For a movable part, a cable for a movable part shall be used.


- 153 -

Check item Description CheckCNC and cabinet

CNC grounding The CNC ground (frame ground) shall be connected properly and the length of the ground wire shall be within 300 mm.

Ground plate The ground plate shall be connected to the AC ground of the cabinet with wire.

Mounting The optional board shall be inserted in a CNC slot properly. HUB

Use conditions The "cautions on use" of the hub shall be observed (A terminating resistor shall be mounted properly if required).

Grounding The hub shall be grounded. Cabinet The hub shall be installed in an enclosed cabinet. Vibration The hub shall be installed so that it is not affected by vibration.

Bending radius The bending radius shall be at least four times as long as the diameter of the cable.

VI. MAINTENANCE

B-64014EN/04 MAINTENANCE

- 157 -

1.HARDWARE MAINTENANCEINFORMATION

1 HARDWARE MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

This chapter provides hardware maintenance information related to the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server.

1.1 Series 30i/31i/32i-A

1.1.1 Component Layout

MPU

LSI

CD38R

CNH6

Name PCB drawing No. Remarks Fast Ethernet board / Fast Data Server board

A20B-8101-0030

MAINTENANCE B-64014EN/04

- 158 -

1. HARDWARE MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

1.1.2 LED Indications and Meanings The optional board provides four green LEDs (STATUS) and one red LED (ALARM) for status indication, and provides three green LEDs and one red LED for communication status indication. The figure below shows the locations of these LEDs. The table below explains the LED lighting states. In the following explanations, the LED lighting states are expressed as follows:

: Off : On : Blinking ◊: Don't care

CD38R4(STA

SU

S) (G

RE

EN

)

3(STATU

S) (G

RE

EN

)

2(STATU

S) (G

RE

EN

)

1(STATU

S) (G

RE

EN

)

ALR

(RE

D)

LIL (GR

EE

N)

CO

L (RE

D)

CO

M (Y

ELLO

W)

BTX

(GR

EE

N)

NOTE The face plate is indicated using dotted lines.

LED display transition for LED1, LED2, LED3, and LED4 (during power-on)

LED display L4 L3 L2 L1

Status Meaning

Power-off

Immediately after power-on

Initial state entered immediately after power-on. If the optional board is stopped in this condition, the cause is one of the following: → The software is not stored in the Flash ROM of the CNC. → The optional board is defective.

Start of optional board The optional board has started. If the optional board is stopped in this condition, the optional board may be defective.

Completion of software downloading

The software has been downloaded to the optional board. If the optional board is stopped in this condition, the optional board may be defective.

Firmware OS started.

The software OS has started. If the optional board is stopped in this condition, the cause is one of the following: → The software stored in the Flash ROM of the CNC is

destroyed. → The optional board is defective.


- 159 -


LED display L4 L3 L2 L1

Status Meaning

Completion of software OS initialization

Initialization of the software OS is completed. If the optional board is stopped in this condition, the cause is one of the following: → The software stored in the Flash ROM of the CNC is

destroyed. → The optional board is defective.

Completion of parameter reading

The Ethernet parameters have been read. If the optional board is stopped in this condition, the cause is one of the following: → The Ethernet option or Data Server option is not installed.→ The IP address or subnet mask is not set.

Start completion The optional board has started normally.

LED display for LED1, LED2, LED3, and LED4 (during normal operation) LED display

L4 L3 L2 L1 Status Meaning

Normal status The board is operating normally.

LED display for BTX, LIL, COM, and ALM (during normal operation) LED display Status Meaning

BTX 100BASE-TX connection in progress

The communication rate is 100BASE-TX.

BTX 10BASE-T connection in progress

The communication rate is 10BASE-T.

LIL Connected to hub The board is connected to the hub.

COM Transmission/ reception in progress

Data is being transmitted or received.

ALM No alarm No alarm is issued

LED display for LED1, LED2, LED3, and LED4 (when abnormality occurs) The STATUS LEDs are turned on and off repeatedly with long on-time and short on-time.

LED display [Long on-time] 4 3 2 1

LED display [Short on-time] 4 3 2 1

Status Description

Error on another boardA defect on another board or a problem on another optional board was detected.

Bus error Software has a problem, or the optional board is defective.

Parity alarm The optional board is defective.

Illegal general instruction

Software has a problem, or the optional board is defective.

Illegal slot instruction Software has a problem, or the optional board is defective.

CPU address error Software has a problem, or the optional board is defective.

NOTE If an error occurs with the LEDs turned on and off with long on-time and short

on-time in a manner not indicated above, contact FANUC.


- 160 -


LED display for COL, LIL, and ALM (when abnormality occurs) LED display Status Description

COL ■ COL ☆

Collision occurs. (Data collision occurs.)

The LED is on or blinks at short intervals when the Ethernet communication traffic (communication amount) is high or ambient noise is high.

LIL □ Not connected to hub

The board is not connected to the hub properly. The LIL LED stays off also when the power to the hub is off. Check whether the board is connected to the hub properly.

ALM ■ Parity error occurs. A parity error occurred in memory on the optional board. The optional board is defective.

1.2 Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B

1.2.1 Component Layout

Optional board (common to LCD-mounted type/Stand-alone type)

CD38R

CD58

Name PCB drawing No. Remarks

Fast Ethernet board A20B-8101-0770


- 161 -


Control unit with Multi-function Ethernet (LCD-mounted type)

Rear of unit

CD38B

1.2.2 LED Indications and Meanings The board provides one green LED (STATUSF) and one yellow LED (LCOM) for status indication, and two red LEDs (HER, COL). The figure below shows the locations of these LEDs. The table below explains the LED lighting state.

Optional board (common to LCD-mounted type/Stand-alone type)

CD38RSTATU

SF (green)

CO

L (red)

HE

R (red)

LCO

M (yellow

)

NOTE The face plate is indicated using dotted lines.


- 162 -


Control unit with Multi-function Ethernet (LCD-mounted type)

Rear of unit

(red) (yellow) (green) (red)

HE

R

LCO

M

STATU

SF

CO

L

Ethernet (Multi-function Ethernet) StatusLED


- 163 -


In the following explanations, the LED lighting states are expressed as follows: : Off : On : Blinking

LED display transition for STATUSF (during power-on) LED

display Status Meaning

□ Power-off ■ Immediately after power-on Initial state entered immediately after power-on.

If the board is stopped in this condition, the cause is one of the following: → The CNC communication software may not be running normally.

Check whether the communication software is installed properly.→ The hardware may be faulty. Replace the optional board (main

board when Multi-function Ethernet is used). ☆ Start completion The board has started normally.

LED display for STATUSF (during normal operation)

LED display Status Meaning

☆ Normal status The board is operating normally.

LED display for LCOM


□ Not connected to hub The board is not connected to the hub properly. The LED stays off also when the power to the hub is off. Check whether the board is connected to the hub properly.

■ Connected to hub The board is connected to the hub. ☆ Transmission/reception in

progress Data is being transmitted or received.

LED display for COL


□ Normal status The board is operating normally. ■ ☆

Collision occurs. (Data collision occurs.)

The LED is on or blinks at short intervals when the Ethernet communication traffic (communication amount) is high or ambient noise is high.

LED display for HER


□ Normal status The board is operating normally. ■ Error detected in the Ethernet

circuit on the main board or option board.

☆ Error detected in the software

The cause may be the faulty optional board (main board when Multi-function Ethernet is used) or a malfunction due to noise.


- 164 -

2. SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

2 SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

This chapter provides software maintenance information related to the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server.

2.1 Ethernet LOG A log related to the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server is displayed.

ETHERNET LOG screen


2 Press soft key [BOARD LOG] ([ETHER LOG] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B) to display the LOG screen for the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server. (If the soft key is not found, press the continuous menu key.)

LOG screen

The latest log information is displayed at the top of the screen. At the right end of a log item, the occurrence date and time of the log item is indicated. Date and time data is indicated in the format "MMM.DD hh:mm:ss", where MMM represents a month, DD represents a day, hh represents hours, mm represents minutes, and ss represents seconds. The top item in the example above indicates "09:36:14 on August 7".

To clear the log information, press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [CLEAR].

By operating the LOG screen of the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server, log information can be displayed for each function.


- 165 -

2.SOFTWARE MAINTENANCEINFORMATION

(1) Soft key [ALL] This soft key displays all log information related to the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server. (2) Soft key [COMMON] This soft key displays log information related to the parameter setting and basic communication

function of the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server. (3) Soft key [FOCAS2] This soft key displays log information related to the FOCAS2/Ethernet function. (4) Soft key [DATA SERVER] This soft key displays log information related to the Data Server. (5) Soft key [REMOTE DIAG] This soft key displays log information related to the machine remote diagnosis functions.

NOTE The Ethernet log information is stored in volatile memory and is lost when the

power to the CNC is turned off. Check the log information when an error occurs.

Error number Log message Meaning and action to be taken

E-0118 E-0119

Error occurred while wait for FOCAS2 pdu A communication error occurred due to one of the following causes: → The network quality degraded, data could not be

received from the personal computer with which to communicate, and the logical communication path was disconnected.


→ The Ethernet cable was disconnected. E-011A All communication paths are busy All FOCAS2/Ethernet communication paths are being

used. E-0126 No response from RMT DIAG server The IP address of the machine remote diagnosis

accepting server may be invalid or the power to the machine remote diagnosis accepting server may be off. Check whether the IP address of the machine remote diagnosis accepting server is valid and whether the power to the machine remote diagnosis accepting server is on. Alternatively, the machine remote diagnosis accepting server may not respond to the PING command to increase the security level (such as a firewall setting). Set bit 1 of CNC parameter No. 905 to "1" and connect the server again.

E-012D No response from router The IP address of the router may be invalid or the power to the router may be off. Check whether the IP address of the router is valid and whether the power to the router is on.


- 166 -



E-0148 Cannot save parameter for Unsolicited Message

When the FOCAS2 function “cnc_wrunsolicprm2” is received, the save of parameters for the Unsolicited Messaging function failed due to one of the following causes: → The mode of the Unsolicited Messaging function isn’t

“PC MODE”. → The status of the Unsolicited Messaging function isn’t

“Not Ready”. →The wrong value exists in the argument “the

parameters for the Unsolicited Messaging” of the FOCAS2 function “cnc_wrunsolicprm2”.

E-0149 The received parameter for Unsolicited Message is wrong

When the FOCAS2 function “cnc_wrunsolicprm2”, “cnc_rdunsolicprm2” or “cnc_unsolicstart” is received, it is detected that the argument “the parameter number of the Unsolicited Messaging” is wrong.

E-0200 (Received message from FTP server) A message sent from the FTP server is displayed as is.A message containing kanji, hiragana, and/or katakana characters may not be displayed correctly.

E-0202 Connection failed with FTP server The FTP server software may not be running. Run the FTP server software. Alternatively, the setting may be made so that the FTP server cannot be connected to increase the security level (such as a firewall setting). Change the firewall setting so that the FTP server can be connected.

E-0207 The router is not found The IP address of the router may be invalid or the power to the router may be off. Check whether the IP address of the router is valid and whether the power to the router is on.

E-0208 The FTP server is not found The IP address of the FTP server may be invalid or the power to the FTP server may be off. Check whether the IP address of the FTP server is valid and whether the power to the FTP server is on. Alternatively, the FTP server may not respond to the PING command to increase the security level (such as a firewall setting). Set bit 1 of CNC parameter No. 905 to "1" and connect the server again.

E-020B Cannot login into FTP server Check the user name and password for logging in to the FTP server.

E-020C The parameters of FTP server are wrong Check the user name and password for logging in to the FTP server.

E-020D Changing a work folder of host failed Check the work folder for logging in to the FTP server. E-0219 The DNC file is not found Check whether the file for DNC operation is specified

correctly. E-021A The specified file is not found Check whether the specified file is present. E-021B Opening a file failed The file could not be opened.

Check the error code in parentheses. E-021F FTP transfer is busy on BUFFER mode FTP communication could not catch up with data

supply. Correct the file division size. Alternatively, set bit 0 of NC parameter No. 0904 to 1.

E-0220 There is no file in list file No file is defined in the list in the buffer mode. Correct the file list.

E-0221 The specified file already exists The specified file is already present on the memory card of the Data Server. Delete the existing file. Alternatively, change the file name.


- 167 -



E-0223 Writing data to the file failed Data could not be written to the memory card of the Data Server. Check the error code in parentheses.

E-023A The specified file is busy The file on the memory card of the Data Server is currently used. When a file on the memory card is selected as a main program, the file is regarded as being used.

E-0252 Contents of ATA card are broken Format the memory card of the Data Server. E-02F0 ATA card is not found Check whether a memory card is installed in the Data

Server. E-02F3 ATA card is not mounted Check whether the memory card of the Data Server is

destroyed and whether the memory card has been formatted.

E-041A Frame transmission failed (TCP) A communication error occurred due to one of the following causes: → The network quality degraded, data could not be

received from the personal computer with which to communicate, and the logical communication path was disconnected.


→ The Ethernet cable was disconnected. → Data cannot be posted to the communication

destination due to a firewall setting. E-0A02 Cannot read MAC address The MAC address may not be written on the Fast

Ethernet board or Fast Data Server board or the board may be damaged.

E-0A06 Network is too busy An excessive amount of data flows over the network. Take action such as dividing the network.

E-0B00 The own IP address is wrong Set the IP address according to the IP address specification format.

E-0B01 The own IP address is not set Set the IP address. E-0B02 Subnet mask is wrong Set the subnet mask according to the subnet mask

specification format. E-0B03 Subnet mask is not set Set the subnet mask. E-0B04 Router IP address is wrong There may be a conflict between the classes of the local

node and router IP addresses. E-0B05 IP address of DNS server is wrong There may be a conflict between the classes of the local

node and DNS server IP addresses. E-0B06 The own host name is wrong Check the host name setting. E-0B07 The own domain name is wrong Check the domain name setting. E-0B08 TCP port number is wrong A value outside the valid setting range may be set. E-0B09 UDP port number is wrong A value outside the valid setting range may be set. E-0B0B IP address of remote FTP server is wrong Set the IP address according to the IP address

specification format. E-0B0C Port number of a remote FTP server is

wrong A value outside the valid setting range may be set.

E-0B0D User name of remote FTP server is wrong A character unavailable for a user name may be used. E-0B0E Password of remote FTP server is wrong A character unavailable for a password may be used. E-0B0F Login folder of remote FTP srv is wrong A character unavailable for a login folder name may be

used. E-0B10 Port number of own FTP server is wrong A value outside the valid setting range may be set. E-0B11 User name of own FTP server is wrong A character unavailable for a user name may be used. E-0B12 Password of own FTP server is wrong A character unavailable for a password may be used.


- 168 -



E-0B13 Login folder of own FTP server is wrong A character unavailable for a login folder name may be used.

E-0B14 IP address of Remote Diag is wrong Set the IP address of the machine remote diagnosis accepting server according to the IP address specification format.

E-0B15 Port number of Remote Diag is wrong A value outside the valid setting range may be set. E-0B18 Cannot set because DHCP is available To set the item, disable the DHCP client function. E-0B27 Unsolicited Message isn't available The software conditions to use the Unsolicited

Messaging function are not satisfied. Refer to Chapter 6, ”UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION” in Part II, “SPECIFICATION”.

E-0B29 Mode of Unsolicited Message is wrong The FOCAS2 function “cnc_wrunsolicprm2” can't be execute in “CNC MODE”.

E-0B2A Status of Unsolicited Message is wrong The application of parameters for the Unsolicited Messaging function failed because the status of the Unsolicited Messaging function is not “Not Ready”. This error occurred due to one of the following causes when the status is not “Not Ready”: → The FOCAS2 function “cnc_wrunsolicprm2”, or

“cnc_unsolicstart” is executed. → The soft key [APPLY] is pressed.

E-0B2B Cannot refresh param of Unsolicited Message

The application of parameters for the Unsolicited Messaging function failed due to one of the following causes: → The problem of E-0B29 or E-0B2A occurred. → The invalid value exists in the parameters for the

Unsolicited Messaging function. E-0B44 Invalid value exists in Transmission

parameter of Unsolicited Message The non-effective value exists in “TRANSMISSION NUMBER” or “TRANSMISSION PARAMETER (NO.1-3)”.

E-0B45 The total of Transmission size of Unsolicited Message exceeds the limitation

The total transmission size of the parameters for the Unsolicited Messaging function exceeds the available maximum size. Refer to Subsection 6.1.2, “Setting by CNC screen” in Part III, “SETTING” for the available maximum size.

E-XXXX (No message) Internal error. Report the error number.

The meaning of the error codes indicated in error messages E-02XX are as follows:

Error code Meaning 2 The available space of the memory card of the Data Server is insufficient. 10 The specified folder cannot be found. 11 The allowable number of entries is exceeded. 12 Access to a folder was rejected. 14 The specified file cannot be found. 15 Access to a file was rejected. 19 An attempt was made to access a file being used. 22 The specified file name is illegal. 28 A TV check error was detected. 36 The specified file is already present. 37 The folder is not empty. 39 The specified folder is already present. 48 The available file size is exceeded.


- 169 -


2.2 ETHERNET CONNECTION CONFIRMATION By transmitting the PING command, the CNC can check that a connection is made with the communication destination.

PING screen (connection state confirmation)


2 Soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B) is displayed. (If the soft key is not found, press the continuous menu key.)

3 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] then soft key [PING].

PING (CONNECT STATE) screen

4 Press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [PING FTP1] to send the PING command to host 1 to which

the Data Server function is connected. Similarly, press soft key [PING FTP2] and soft key [PING FTP3] to send the PING command to connection hosts 2 and 3, respectively.

5 Press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [PING RMT1] to send the PING command to inquiry

destination 1 of the machine remote diagnosis functions. Similarly, press soft key [PING RMT2] to send the command to inquiry destination 2 and soft key [PING RMT3] to inquiry destination 3.


- 170 -


The results of PING execution are as follows:

Execution results of PING

PING (SETTING) screen

Procedure 1 When sending the PING command to a desired destination, enter the destination address in

HOSTNAME (IP ADDRESS) on the PING (SETTING) screen. Moreover, set a desired execution repeat value in REPEAT.

PING (SETTING) screen

2 After entering a host name (IP address) and repeat value, press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key

[PING EXEC] to send the PING command to the specified destination. 3 To cancel the transmission of the PING command halfway, press soft key [PING CANCEL].


- 171 -


2.3 COMMUNICATION STATE CONFIRMATION The communication state of the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server detected by hardware can be checked.

COM STATE (SEND / RECEIVE) screen



3 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] then soft key [COM STATE] to display the COM STATE screen.

COM STATE screen

Display item

Display item Description BAUDRATE Displays the communication rate and mode.

Communication rate: 100 Mbps or 10 Mbps Communication mode: Full duplex or Half duplex -------- : Not connected to HUB (only for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B)

SEND PACKET Displays the number of sent packets. SEND RETRYOVER COLLISION CARRIER SENSE LOST NO CARRIER FRAME LENGTH ERROR

Displays the number of errors detected during packet sending.

RECEIVE PACKET Displays the number of received packets. CRC ERROR SHORT FRAME LONG FRAME ODD FRAME OVERFLOW PHY-LSI ERROR

Displays the number of errors detected during packet reception.


- 172 -


2.4 COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE CONFIRMATION The operating status of the software of the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server can be checked.

TASK STATE screen



3 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] then soft key [TASK STATE] to display the TASK STATE screen.

TASK STATE screen

Display item

The meaning of each symbol is indicated below. Symbol and meaning Function that can be checked

COMMON W : Data being processed (1) D : Data being processed (2) E : Start of software

Operation status of the basic function

FOCAS2 #0 C : Waiting for connection from the host W : Data being processed (1) D : Data being processed (2) N : FOCAS2 incapable of being executed

FOCAS2 #1 W : Data being processed (1) D : Data being processed (2) X : Not executed yet

FOCAS2 #2 W : Data being processed (1) D : Data being processed (2) X : Not executed yet

Operation status of the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions

SCREEN W : Data being processed (1) D : Data being processed (2) X : Not executed yet

Operation status of the CNC screen display functions


- 173 -


Symbol and meaning Function that can be checked UDP W : Data being processed (1)

D : Data being processed (2) X : Not executed yet

Operation status of the UDP broad cast

PMC W : Data being processed (1) D : Data being processed (2) X : Not executed yet

Operation status of the FANUC LADDER-III function

DATASERVER W : Data being processed (1) D : Data being processed (2) X : Not executed yet

FTP SERVER W : Data being processed (1) D : Data being processed (2) Number : Number of sockets currently connected

Operation status of the Data Server functions

REMOTE DIAG W : Data being processed (1) D : Data being processed (2) X : Not executed yet

Operation status of the machine remote diagnosis functions

UNSOLICITED W : Data being processed (1) D : Data being processed (2) N : Abnormal state X : Not executed yet Number : The existence signals is being transmitted

during this number is being counted.

Operation status of the unsolicited messaging function

FTP W : Data being processed (1) D : Data being processed (2) X : Not executed yet

Operation status of the FTP file transfer function

2.5 FTP SERVER MAINTENANCE The state of FTP clients connected to the FTP server can be checked and the FTP connection can be disconnected forcedly.

NOTE To use this function, the DataServer Explorer connection option (R953) is

required.

FTP Server MAINTENANCE screen (CLIENT LIST, CLIENT DETAIL)



3 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] then soft key [FTP SERVER] to display the FTP Server MAINTENANCE screen (CLIENT LIST).


- 174 -


FTP Server MAINTENANCE screen (CLIENT LIST)

4 By using cursor keys , select a client, and press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key

[DETAIL] to display the FTP Server MAINTENANCE screen (CLIENT DETAIL) displaying the client information on the cursor.

The CLIENT DETAIL screen is as follows:

FTP Server MAINTENANCE screen (CLIENT DETAIL)

5 Press soft key [LIST] to display the CLIENT LIST screen again.


- 175 -



CLIENT Displays the IP address of the FTP client connected to the FTP server. (Example of display format: "192.168.0.200") - In the CLIENT DETAIL screen: When the FTP connection is disconnected, "Disconnected" is displayed.

CONNECT TIME Display the connect time of the FTP client connected to the FTP server. The format of the time is "hh:mm:ss" (hh: hour, mm: minute, ss: second). The time display is updated automatically. - In the CLIENT DETAIL screen: When the FTP connection is disconnected, "--:--:--" is displayed.

NOTE 1 The CLIENT DETAIL screen cannot be displayed when any client does not exist

on the CLIENT LIST screen. 2 There is not the CLIENT DETAIL screen for 15-inch display unit.

Operation (DISCONNECT)

The selected client is disconnected on the CLIENT LIST screen and the CLIENT DETAIL screen. 1 When the CLIENT LIST screen is displayed, by using cursor keys , select a client to be

disconnected. 2 Press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [DISCONNECT].

3 Press soft key [EXEC] to disconnect the selected client.

When the CLIENT DETAIL screen is displayed, the displaying client is disconnected.

NOTE An error occurs if the disconnect operation is attempted to execute when any

client does not exist on the CLIENT LIST screen, or when the connection with the client is already disconnected on the CLIENT DETAIL screen.

Operation (ALL DISCONNECT)

All clients are disconnected on the CLIENT LIST screen. 1 Press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [ALL DISCON].

2 Press soft key [EXEC] to disconnect all clients.

NOTE 1 This operation can be executed only on the CLIENT LIST screen. 2 An error occurs if this operation is attempted to execute when any client does

not exist on the CLIENT LIST screen.


- 176 -


2.6 ALARM AND DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION

NOTE This function is valid only for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B.

When using the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server on the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B, the following alarms might be displayed. In this case, please confirm the diagnosis information and take the countermeasure.

Number Message Description PW0050 (NOTE)

POWER MUST BE OFF (INITIALIZED COMMUNICATION)

When the power was turned on, communication hardware was initialized. Please turn the power off.

SR2038 WRONG COMMUNICATION COMBINATION The combination of the communication hardware and the software options is illegal. Details of an illegal combination are notified to diagnosis number No.4400 and 4401.

NOTE An alarm PW0050 might be generated when the power is turned on after the

option boards are added or are exchanged and the software option is changed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Diagnosis 4400 BD4 BD3 BD2 BD1 MFE

When the communication alarm SR2038 occurs, the detail information of wrong hardware is indicated.

#0 MFE Multi-function Ethernet #2 BD1 Option board mounted in slot1 #3 BD2 Option board mounted in slot2 #4 BD3 Option board mounted in slot3 #5 BD4 Option board mounted in slot4

NOTE When the communication alarm SR2038 does not occur, all bits are

"0". Diagnosis 4401 Detailed number of alarm SR2038

When the communication alarm SR2038 occurs, the information is indicated.

Number Description 0 The combination of the communication functions is correct. 1 The number of mounted the hardware option exceeds limitation.

The number of the hardware options that can be mounted is up to three. 2 The hardware option that DGN No.4400 indicates doesn't exist.

Confirm the hardware option specified for NC parameter No.970-972. 3 In the hardware option that DGN No.4400 indicates, the working function is not

specified. NC parameters No.970-972 are wrong though the hardware option exists. Specify "-1" for No.970-972 When not using it.

4 In the hardware option that DGN No.4400 indicates, the Data Server function and the FL-net function are specified at the same time. Specify a separate hardware option for NC parameter No.970, No.971 or 972 because the Data Server function and the FL-net function are exclusive functions.


- 177 -


Number Description 5 In the hardware option that DGN No.4400 indicates, a necessary software option is

not effective. The same hardware option is specified for NC parameter No.970, No.971 or No.972.

6 In the hardware option that DGN No.4400 indicates, a necessary software option is not effective.

2.7 COMMUNICATION RETRY MONITORING FUNCTION When the Fast Ethernet function on the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B is used, Fast Ethernet communication errors are checked at intervals of 10 seconds. If the number of errors detected during the last 1 minute reaches the value set for parameter No. 11533, warning signal WETF is output. Since the number of detected errors is checked at intervals of 10 seconds, the warning signal is also output at intervals of 10 seconds. The signal output is reset by turning the power off, then on again.

NOTE 1 This function is valid only for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B. 2 The maximum value for network error counters is 65535.

If an overflow occurs, no warning is issued and the error count returns to 0.

Parameter 11533 Warning value for the number of fast Ethernet error detection occurrences

[Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] Number of detection occurrences/minute

[Valid data range] 0 to 128 Recommended setting = 0 Set a warning value for the number of Fast Ethernet error detection occurrences. When the number of 1- minute error detection occurrences becomes higher than or equal to the setting, the warning signal is output. If the setting is 0, monitoring is performed on a 10 occurrences/minute basis.

NOTE

When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.

Fast Ethernet communication abnormality warning signal WETF<F0535.5>

[Classification] Output signal [Operation] This signal is output when a warning occurs. [Function] If the total number of various errors detected by the communication hardware of the Fast

Ethernet function is equal to or greater than the setting of parameter No. 11533 (standard setting 0, which means 10 retries per one minute), this signal is set to 1. Once this signal is set to 1, the value is kept until the CNC power is turned off.

APPENDIX

B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX A.TROUBLESHOOTING

- 181 -

A TROUBLESHOOTING This appendix describes troubleshooting related to Fast Ethernet/ Fast Data Server communication.

A.1 CHECKING COMMUNICATION WITH A HUB (1) Make sure that the STP cable between the hub and the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server is connected. (2) Make sure that cables are properly wired.

• Though communication is carried out when the cable pair at the send and receive sides is not properly mounted, communications errors may occur more frequently.

(3) Make sure that a hub for 100BASE-TX is used. • A hub for 10BASE-T may be used to perform communication. In this case, however, the

communication speed can decrease. (4) Make sure that the LIL LED on the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server is lit at all times.

• The LIL LED will not light if the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server is not connected to the hub or if the hub is not ON.

(5) Make sure that the LED (LINK indicator LED) on the connected hub is lit at all times. • Some hubs do not have a LINK indicator LED. • The LINK indicator LED will not light if the hub is not connected to the Fast Ethernet/Fast

Data Server or the CNC is not ON. (6) Make sure that a hub for full duplex communication only is not used.

• The Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server automatically detects the communication speed and communication mode (full duplex or half duplex) by using the auto negotiation function. In communication with a hub that does not have the auto negotiation function, the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server recognizes the communication speed correctly but regards the communication mode as half duplex communication.

As a result, when an attempt is made to communicate with a hub for full duplex communication only that does not have the auto negotiation function, there is a discrepancy in communication mode, so correct communication cannot sometimes be performed.

• For details on how to connect, see Part V "CONNECTION."

A.2 CHECKING CONNECTION WITH THE TRUNK General notes are provided below. For network installation, consult with specialized vendors or manufacturers. Run cables away from noise sources. The descriptions below are not applicable if the network is configured using only those hubs that have Ethernet boards connected. • When the trunk is based on 10BASE-5

(1) Make sure that a transceiver is attached to the trunk correctly. - If a transceiver is attached correctly, the resistance between the trunk shield and central

conductor is about 25Ω (when a terminating resistor is attached). - A special tool is required to attach a transceiver. (No special tool is required, depending

on the manufacturer. For details, refer to the installation manual of each transceiver.) - Do not attach a transceiver again to a point where a transceiver was once attached.

(Otherwise, the cable can be damaged.) (2) Make sure that transceivers are attached at proper intervals.

- Transceivers must be attached at intervals of 2.5 m or more. It is recommended that transceivers be attached at intervals of an integral multiple of 2.5 m. Usually, marks indicating installation points are provided on the trunk cable.

A.TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDIX B-64014EN/04

- 182 -

(3) Make sure that terminating resistors are attached. - A terminating resistor must be attached to each end of the trunk cable. (Resistance: 50Ω)

(4) Make sure that the trunk cable is not longer than 500 m. (5) Make sure that the cable (transceiver cable) used for connection between a transceiver and the

hub is not longer than a specified limit. - Usually, the maximum allowable length of a transceiver cable is 50 m. However, the

maximum allowable length of a cable with a smaller diameter may be shorter than 50 m. So, check the specifications of each cable.

• When the trunk is based on 10BASE-2

(1) Make sure that the length of each cable is 0.5 m or more. - The minimum allowable distance between nodes (units) is 0.5 m.

(2) Make sure that the trunk cable length (sum of the lengths of cables) is 185 m or less. (3) Make sure that terminating resistors are attached.

- A terminating resistor must be attached to each end of the trunk cable. (Resistance: 50Ω)

A.3 CHECKING SETTINGS The following describes how to check the minimum settings needed for communications.

NOTE For details on IP addresses, subnet mask and other set values, consult with the

network administrator. • Checking settings on the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server

(1) Make sure that the MAC address of the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server is displayed. - This address is appended to each board before shipment from the factory, and is

automatically displayed in the Setting screen. This address need not be set by the user. (2) Make sure that the IP address is set. (3) Make sure that the subnet mask is set. (4) When a router is used, make sure that the router IP address is set.

• Checking settings on the personal computer

(1) Make sure that the IP address is set. (2) Make sure that the subnet mask is set. (3) When a router is used, make sure that the router IP address is set.

• For details on how to set, see Part III "SETTING."

A.4 CHECKING COMMUNICATION This section describes how to check the communication status between a CNC and the other communicating partner (host computer). If communication with the CNC sometimes fails or is not possible, first make sure that the communication path is normal by the following procedure. The "ping" command is used to check communication. In the following example, a host computer running the Windows NT4.0 is used. • Checking the communication path Open the DOS window, and enter 'ping "IP address of CNC"'. If a response is returned from the

CNC, the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server is connected to the CNC. (1) When a response is returned (normal connection)

B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX A.TROUBLESHOOTING

- 183 -

(2) When a response is not returned (abnormal connection)

When a response is not returned, probable causes are either the hardware connection or a

software setting, or both. Check the hardware connections and software settings again. • Checking IP addresses for duplication IP addresses can be checked for duplication by the procedure described below.

(1) Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the CNC to isolate it from the network. (2) Execute a ping command on another personal computer as described in "• Checking the

communication path." Since the CNC is disconnected from the network, no response should be returned. If a response

is returned, the IP address is in use on another unit. Therefore, the IP address cannot be used on the CNC from which the cable was disconnected.

CAUTION

The purpose of this check is to check for a duplicate IP address. It does not assure that the IP address is left non-duplicated because a unit having the same IP address may be turned on after the check or the same address may be set later. When setting an IP addressing, ask the network manager about duplication.

• Checking for influence of electrical noise The "ping" command "-t" option is used for checking for the influence of electrical noise. This

option sends ping packets until "Ctrl+C" is pressed.

A.TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDIX B-64014EN/04

- 184 -

1. About the influence of electrical noise from peripheral machinery (devices) (1) Turn the CNC is mounted ON to enable communications. (2) Press the EMERGENCY STOP button on the machine with the servo/spindle amplifier

OFF, and issue the "ping" command from the host computer. (3) Count the number of lost packets (packets for which a response was not returned). If a lost packet occurs in this state, the machine is probably being affected by electrical

influence from peripheral machines. Countermeasure: Pin-point the source of the electrical noise, and check the wiring again to prevent

the influence of electrical noise.

2. About the influence of electrical noise from mounted machinery (1) Start up the machine in the same way as 1 above. (2) Cancel the emergency stop on the machine with the servo/spindle amplifier ON, and issue

the "ping" command from the host computer. (3) Count the number of lost packets. If more lost packets than in 1 above are occurring, a probable cause is the influence of

electrical noise on the machine itself. General probable causes are the state of the ground on the machine or on the communicating party.

Countermeasure: Check the state of the ground on the machine or on the communicating party,

and insulate the communications trunk with the machine. • For the method of checking the operating status and communication status of the Fast Ethernet/Fast

Data Server, see Part VI “MAINTENANCE” as well.

B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

- 185 -

B EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP This appendix describes the method of setting up an FTP server that operates on the host computer to function as a communication destination for the Data Server functions.

NOTE This appendix provides just setup examples.

The actual setup may differ from these examples depending on the personal computer environment and other factors. When actually setting up an FTP server, make proper settings with referencing the personal computer manual and others. To use an FTP server in a factory network, consult with the network administrator of the factory.

B.1 SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows 2000 Professional (FOR INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE)

Installing the Internet Information Service 1. Set the CD-ROM of Windows 2000 Professional.

B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/04

- 186 -

2. Click [Install Add-On Components].

3. Select [Internet Information Services (IIS)], then click the [Details] button to display the [Internet

Information Services (IIS)] dialog box. Next, check [File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Server].


- 187 -

4. Click the [OK] button, then return to the previous screen. Next, click [Next]. The necessary files are installed.

The installation is completed when the following screen appears:

Setting the Internet Information Service 1. Select [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel].


- 188 -

2. Double-click [Administrative Tools].

3. Double-click [Internet Service Manager] for activation.


- 189 -

4. Double-click the computer name. Next, select [Default FTP Site] and right-click to display the menu. Then, select Properties.

5. Select the [Home Directory] tab to display the [Home Directory] property sheet. Check [Read] and

[Write] in [FTP Site Directory]. In [Directory Listing Style], [MS-DOS] is selected by default. However, it is recommended to check [UNIX]. If files are listed in UNIX format, whether each file is accessible can be determined.

6. Upon completion of setting, click the [Apply] button. In [Default FTP Site], the directory named "\Inetpub\ftproot", set in [Local Path] above (in the drive

where Windows 2000 is installed), is assumed to be the home directory. So, directories under this directory can be accessed.

So, with the default setting, NC programs need to be managed under this directory. The home directory can be changed by setting the new directory in the [Local Path] of [FTP Site

Directory].


- 190 -

7. To access a directory other than the directories under the home directory, a virtual directory needs to be set. For details of a virtual directory, use the online help information of Windows 2000.

Login user setting

1. Select [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel].

2. Double-click the icon [Users and Passwords].


- 191 -

3. Click the [Add] button, then enter necessary items such as a user name.

4. Click the [Next] button, then enter a password for the specified user name. (Unless a password is set,

access to the FTP server cannot be made correctly. So, be sure to enter a password.)


- 192 -

5. Click the [Next] button, then set an access right to be granted. The access right set here can affect the capability to read from and write to a file in FTP-based

communication. Use care when setting an access right.

6. Click the [Finish] button. The entered user name is registered, and the user can log in by using the

user name and password.

Stopping password expiration for a login user If the password expiration is not stopped, when the password expires, login is disabled, preventing FTP communication. Therefore, stop the password expiration as necessary. When a password has expired, it is necessary to set the password again. 1. Select [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel].


- 193 -

2. Double-click the icon [Users and Passwords].

3. Click the [Advanced] tab.


- 194 -

4. Click the [Advanced] button.

5. Double-click [Users]. A list of registered users is displayed.


- 195 -

6. Double-click the user name for which you want to change the password setting. For example, double-click "dtsvr".

7. Check [Password never expires] and then click the [OK] button. The password expiration is stopped.


- 196 -

B.2 SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows XP Professional (FOR INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE)

NOTE Windows XP Home Edition does not have IIS (Internet Information Service).

Installing the Internet Information Service

1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows XP Professional.

2. Double-click [Add or Remove Programs].


- 197 -

3. Double-click [Add/Remove Windows Components].

4. Select [Internet Information Services (IIS)], then click the [Details] button to display the [Internet

Information Services (IIS)] dialog box. Next, check [File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Service].


- 198 -

5. Click the [OK] button, then return to the previous screen. Next, click [Next].

6. The dialog box above is displayed, and the necessary files are installed.

7. The installation is completed when the screen above is displayed.

Setting the Internet Information Service 1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows XP Professional.


- 199 -

2. Click [Performance and Maintenance].

3. Click [Administrative Tools].


- 200 -

4. Double-click [Internet Information Services].

5. Double-click [FTP Site], right-click [Default FTP Site] to display a menu, then select Properties.


- 201 -

6. Select the [Home Directory] tab to display the [Home Directory] property sheet. Check [Read] and [Write] in [FTP Site Directory]. In [Directory Listing Style], [MS-DOS] is selected by default. However, it is recommended to check [UNIX]. If files are listed in UNIX format, whether each file is accessible can be determined.

7. Then, click the [OK] button. In the standard [Default FTP Site], the directory \Inetput\ftproot (on the drive where Windows XP is

installed) is the home directory, and only the directories under the home directory can be accessed. To use a directory other than the default directory as a home directory, modify the local path of [FTP

Site Directory] mentioned in step 6 above. 8. To access a directory other than the directories under the home directory set in step 7 above, a

virtual directory needs to be set. For details of a virtual directory, use information such as the online help information of Windows

XP.


- 202 -

Login user setting 1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows XP Professional.

2. Double-click the icon of [User Accounts].


- 203 -

3. Click [Create a new account], then enter a desired user name.

4. Click the [Next] button, then set an account type. The access right set here can affect the capability to read from and write to a file in FTP-based

communication. Use care when setting an access right.


- 204 -

5. Click the [Create Account] button, then the creation of an account is completed.

6. For password setting, click the previously created account in [or pick an account to change]. (The

FTP server cannot be accessed without setting a password. So, be sure to execute this step.)

7. Click [Create a password], then enter a password for the specified user name.


- 205 -

8. Click the [Create Password] button to register the entered password. By using the account registered

this time, the user can log in to the FTP server.

Stopping password expiration for a login user If the password expiration is not stopped, the Data Server will not be able to communicate with the FTP server at the time of expiring the password. If you are necessary, stop the password expiration. If the password is expired, it is necessary that you re-enter the password. 1. Select [Start] → [All Programs] → [Accessories] → [Command Prompt].

2. Input “net user login-user /expires:never”.

3. If the above message is displayed, the password expiration is stopped.

Confirming the Firewall function of Windows XP Because the Internet Connection Firewall function is included in the Windows XP Professional, the Data Server cannot communicate with the FTP server. If the FTP connection cannot be established, confirm the following setting of the Internet Connection Firewall function.

NOTE When settings are made as described below, the FTP server functions and

response to PING, which have been disabled by the network security function, are enabled.

Therefore, when making the following settings, consult with your network administrator, and take special care.

In some cases, it becomes necessary to isolate the network from the outside as required.


- 206 -

1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows XP Professional.

2. Click the icon of [Network and Internet Connections].

3. Click the icon [Network Connections].


- 207 -

4. Right-click the icon [Local Area Connection] to display the menu. Then, select Properties.

5. Select the [Advanced] tab.

6. If [Internet Connection Firewall] is not checked, the Internet Connection Firewall function does not

work. Then, the following confirmations are not necessary.


- 208 -

7. If [Internet Connection Firewall] is checked, click the [Settings…] button.

8. If the [FTP Server] check-box is not checked, the FTP server function does not work. Check the

[FTP Server] check-box. When the [FTP Server] check-box is checked, the following window is displayed. Then, click the [OK] button.


- 209 -

9. Select the [ICMP] tab.


- 210 -

10. If the [Allow incoming echo request] check-box is not checked, the Data Server function cannot find the FTP server at the start of communication. At the start of communication of Data Server, if the message “[FTP] (IP-address) IS NOT AVAILABLE” is displayed, check this check-box.

Confirming the firewall function when Windows XP (Service Pack 2) is used When Windows XP Professional (Service Pack 2) is used, a different firewall setting procedure is used. 1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows XP Professional.


- 211 -

2. Double-click [Security Center] to start it.

3. Click [Windows Firewall] displayed at the bottom.


- 212 -

4. Select the [Advanced] tab.

5. Click the [Settings] button of [ICMP].


- 213 -

6. If [Allow incoming echo request] is not checked, check it, and click the [OK] button. This allows a response to be made to PING from other devices. 7. Select the [Exceptions] tab.

8. Click the [Add Port] button, and make settings as follows:


- 214 -

9. Click the [OK] button.


- 215 -

B.3 SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows Vista (FOR INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE)

NOTE Windows Vista Home Basic and Windows Vista Home Premium do not have IIS

(Internet Information Service).

Installing the Internet Information Service 1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows Vista.

2. Click [Programs].


- 216 -

3. Click [Turn Windows features on or off].

4. Expand [Internet Information Services], then check [FTP Management Console] and [FTP Server] in

[FTP Publishing Service]. Next, click the [OK] button.


- 217 -

5. The dialog box below is displayed, and the necessary files are installed.

6. The installation is completed when the dialog box above and [Windows Features] dialog box are

finished.

Setting the Internet Information Service 1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows Vista.


- 218 -

2. Click [System and Maintenance].



- 219 -

4. Double-click [Services] to start it.

5. Select [FTP Publishing Service], right-click it to display a menu, then select Properties.


- 220 -

6. Display the [General] property sheet. Change [Manual] to [Automatic] in [Startup type] and click the [Start] button in [Service status], then click the [OK] button. End [Services].

7. Return to [Administrative Tools], then Double-click [Internet Information Services (IIS) 6.0

Manager] ([IIS6 Manager]) to start it.


- 221 -

8. Double-click [FTP Sites], right-click [Default FTP Site] to display a menu, then select Properties.

9. Select the [Home Directory] tab to display the [Home Directory] property sheet.

Check [Read] and [Write] in [FTP site directory]. In [Directory listing style], [MS-DOS] is selected by default. However, it is recommended to check [UNIX]. If files are listed in UNIX format, whether each file is accessible can be determined.


- 222 -

10. Then, click the [OK] button. In the standard [Default FTP Site], the directory \inetpub\ftproot (on the drive where Windows Vista is installed) is the home directory, and only the directories under the home directory can be accessed. To use a directory other than the default directory as a home directory, modify the local path of [FTP site directory] mentioned in step 9 above.

11. To access a directory other than the directories under the home directory set in step 10 above, a

virtual directory needs to be set. For details of a virtual directory, use information such as the online help information of Windows Vista.

Login User Setting

1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows Vista.

2. Click [User Accounts].


- 223 -

3. Click [Add or remove user accounts].

4. Click [Create a new account], then enter a desired user name and set an account type.

The access right set here can affect the right to read from and write to a file in FTP-based communication. Use care when setting an access right.


- 224 -


6. For password setting, click the previously created account. (The FTP server cannot be accessed

without setting a password. So, be sure to execute this step.)


- 225 -


8. Click the [Create password] button to register the entered password. By using the account registered


Stopping password expiration for a login user If the password expiration is not stopped, the Data Server will not be able to communicate with the FTP server at the time of expiring the password. If you are necessary, stop the password expiration. If the password is expired, it is necessary that you re-enter the password. 1. Select [Start] → [All Programs] → [Accessories] → [Command Prompt], right-click it to display a

menu, then select [Run as administrator].


- 226 -

2. Input “net user login-user /expires:never”.

3. If the above message is displayed, the password expiration is stopped.

Confirming the Firewall function of Windows Vista Because the Internet Connection Firewall function is included in the Windows Vista, the Data Server may not communicate with the FTP server. If the FTP connection cannot be established, confirm the following setting of the Internet Connection Firewall function.





1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows Vista.


- 227 -

2. Click [System and Maintenance].



- 228 -

4. Double-click [Windows Firewall with Advanced Security] to start it.

5. Click [Inbound Rules], select [File and Printer Sharing (Echo Request - ICMPv4 - In)] from the list,

right-click it to display a menu, then select Properties.


- 229 -

6. Display the [General] property sheet. Check [Enabled] in [General], then click the [OK] button. End [Windows Firewall with Advanced Security].

7. Return to [Control Panel], then click [Security].


- 230 -

8. Click [Windows Firewall].

9. Click [Change settings].


- 231 -

10. Select the [Exceptions] tab. Check [FTP Server], then click the [OK] button.


- 232 -

B.4 SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows 7 (FOR INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE)

NOTE The FTP Server features depend on the Edition of Windows 7.

Windows 7 Professional, Enterprise, and Ultimate have the FTP Server features. The setting described above is just an example.

Installing the Internet Information Service

1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows 7.

2. Click [Programs].


- 233 -

3. Click [Turn Windows features on or off].

4. Expand [Internet Information Services], then check [FTP Service] in [FTP Server] and [IIS

Management Console] in [Web Management Tools]. Next, click the [OK] button.


- 234 -

5. The dialog box below is displayed, and the necessary files are installed.

6. The installation is completed when the dialog box above and [Windows Features] dialog box are

finished.

Setting the Internet Information Service 1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows 7.


- 235 -

2. Click [System and Security].



- 236 -

4. Double-click [Services] to start it.

5. Select [Microsoft FTP Service], right-click it to display a menu, then select Properties.


- 237 -

6. Display the [General] property sheet.

Choose [Automatic] from [Startup type] drop-down list. Next, if [Service status] is not [Started], click the [Start] button to start FTP service, then click the [OK] button to end [Services].


- 238 -

7. Return to [Administrative Tools], then double-click [Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager] to

start it.


- 239 -

8. Right-click Computer name(“PC1” in the following figure) to display a left side menu, then select [Add FTP Site...].

9. The [Site Information] dialog box below is displayed. Input any site name in [FTP site name:] and

physical path of the home directory in [Physical path:]. The physical path is the home directory, and only the directories under the home directory can be accessed. Click [Next] button.

10. The [Binding and SSL setting] dialog box below is displayed.

Input the IP address and port number (usually 21) in [IP Address] and [Port]. Check [Start FTP site automatically] and select [No SSL] in [SSL]. Click [Next] button.


- 240 -

11. The [Authentication and Authorization Information] dialog box below is displayed.

Check [Basic] in [Authentication], choose [All users] from [Allow access to:] drop-down list in [Authorization], and check [Read] and [Write] in [Permissions]. Click [Finish] button.

12. Expand tree in left pane and select FTP site name set in step 9. A feature menu of FTP site is displayed. Double-click [FTP Directory Browsing].


- 241 -

13. In [Directory Listing Style], [MS-DOS] is selected by default.

However, it is recommended to select [UNIX]. If files are listed in UNIX format, whether each file is accessible can be determined.

14. To access a directory other than the directories under the home directory set in step 9 above, a virtual

directory needs to be set. For details of a virtual directory, use information such as the online help information of Windows 7.


- 242 -

Login User Setting 1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows 7.

2. Click [Add or remove user accounts].

3. Click [Create a new account], then enter a desired user name and set an account type.

The access right can affect the right to read from and write to a file in FTP-based communication. Use care when setting an access right.


- 243 -


5. For password setting, click the previously created account. (The FTP server cannot be accessed

without setting a password. So, be sure to execute this step.)


- 244 -


8. Click the [Create password] button to register the entered password. By using the account registered


Stopping password expiration for a login user If the password expiration is not stopped, the Data Server will not be able to communicate with the FTP server at the time of expiring the password. If necessary, stop the password expiration. If the password is expired, it is necessary that you re-enter the password. 1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows 7.


- 245 -




- 246 -

4. Double-click [Computer Management] to start it.

5. Expand [Local Users and Groups] in left pane, then click [Users]. A list of registered users is

displayed. Double-click the user name for which you want to change the password setting.


- 247 -

6. Check [Password never expires] and then click [OK] button. The password expiration is stopped.

Confirming the Firewall function of Windows 7 Because the Internet Connection Firewall function is included in the Windows 7, the Data Server may not communicate with the FTP server. If the FTP connection cannot be established, confirm the following setting of the Internet Connection Firewall function.


- 248 -





1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows 7.



- 249 -

3. Click [Allow a program through Windows Firewall].

4. Click [Change settings].


- 250 -

5. Check [FTP Server] and network location types. Network location types depend on the connecting network setting and configuration.

6. Click [OK] button to close this window. 7. Return to [System and Security], then click [Windows Firewall].


- 251 -

8. Click [Advanced settings].

9. Click [Inbound Rules].


- 252 -

10. Check if [FTP Server (FTP Traffic-In)], [FTP Server Passive (FTP Passive Traffic-In)], and [File and Printer Sharing (Echo Request - ICMPv4-In)] are enabled. If those rules are not enable, select them and click [Enable Rule] in right pane. There are same name rule in [Inbound Rules], but their targets are different network location. The choice of rule to change enabled depend on rule’s [Profile] and network location types.

B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX

- 253 -

C.EXAMPLE OF SETTING UPDNS/DHCP

C EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS/DHCP This appendix describes the method of setting up the DNS/DHCP server of Windows 2000 Server.

NOTE This appendix provides just examples of setup using Windows 2000 Server. To

use the DNS/DHCP server in an actual factory network, consult with the network administrator of the factory and make settings according to the actual network environment.

Example of setting a simple network

An example of setup in a network configuration that satisfies the following conditions is provided: 1. The DHCP server and DNS server are operated using the same personal computer. 2. The IP address of the DHCP server and DNS server is 192.168.0.254. 3. The DHCP server controls the IP address range 192.168.0.10 to 192.168.0.29. 4. The domain controlled by the DNS server is named "factory". 5. The same domain includes the DHCP server, DNS server, CNCs, and a PC for FOCAS1/Ethernet

applications.

. . .

Windows 2000 Server DNS server

DHCP server 192.168.0.254

Domain : factory

CNC Automatic setting

PC Automatic setting

CNC Automatic setting

Example of network configuration

NOTE The setting described above is just an example. For setup in an actual network

configuration in the factory, consult with the network administrator of the factory.

APPENDIX B-64014EN/04

- 254 -

C. EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS/DHCP

C.1 EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DHCP SERVER OF Windows 2000 Server

1. Activating the Microsoft administrative console (DHCP) Click [Programs] → [Administrative Tools] → [DHCP].

2. Adding a scope Click [Action] → [New Scope] to start “New Scope Wizard”.

Click the [Next] button.


- 255 -


Enter "factory" as [Name], and enter "FACTORY" as [Description].

Click the [Next] button. Enter “192.168.0.10” as [Start IP address], enter “192.168.0.29” as [End IP address], enter “24” as [Length], and enter “255.255.255.0” as [Subnet mask].


Click the [Next] button without entering any data.


- 256 -


Keep "8" days unchanged as Period, then click the [Next] button.

Keep [Yes, I want to configure these options now] selected, and click the [Next] button.

Click the [Next] button without entering any data. Enter “192.168.0.254” as IP Address, then click [Add].


- 257 -



Click the [Next] button without entering any data.

Keep [Yes, I want to activate this scope now] selected, and click the [Next] button.


- 258 -


Click [Finish].

3. Adding a scope option Click [Scope[192.168.0.0]factory], then click [Scope Options] → [Action] → [Configure Options].

From the available options, find and check [DNS Domain Name]. Then, enter "factory" as String value.

Click the [OK] button. The following setting is made:


- 259 -


4. Enabling Dynamic DNS Click [Scope[192.168.0.0]factory] → [Properties] → [DNS].

Check [Always update DNC] and [Enable updates for DNS clients that do not support dynamic update].

Click the [OK] button. This completes DHCP server setting.


- 260 -


C.2 EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS SERVER OF Windows 2000 Server

1. Activating the Microsoft administrative console (DNS) Click [Programs] → [Administrative Tools] → [DNS].

2. DNS server configuration Click [Action] → [Configure the server] to start [Configure DNS Server Wizard].



- 261 -


Keep [This is the first DNS server on this network] selected, and click the [Next] button.

Keep [Yes, create a forward lookup zone], and click the [Next] button.

Keep [Standard primary] selected, and click the [Next] button. Enter "factory." as Name. (Do not fail to enter "." after "factory".)



- 262 -


Keep “factory.dns” unchanged, and click the [Next] button.

Keep [Yes, create a reverse lookup zone] selected, and click the [Next] button.

Keep [Standard primary] selected, and click the [Next] button. Enter “192.168.0” as Network ID.


- 263 -



Keep “0.168.192.in-addr.arpa.dns” unchanged, and click the [Next] button.

Click the [Finish] button.


- 264 -


3. Enabling Dynamic DNS Right-click [Forward Lookup Zones] → [factory].

Click [Properties]. For [Allow dynamic updates?], select [Yes].

Click the [OK] button. This completes DNS server setting.

B-64014EN/04 APPENDIX D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION

- 265 -

D FTP CLIENT OPERATION This appendix describes the method of operating an FTP client that operates on the host computer to function as a communication destination for the Data Server functions.

D.1 OPERATION USING THE FTP COMMAND

Login 1 Enter "ftp IP-address-of-NC or host-name" at the command prompt. 2 Enter a user name. 3 Enter a password. 4 The message, "230 User logged in, proceed." indicates that the login process has been completed

successfully.

GET (acquiring a file from the FTP server) 1 Enter "get hard-disk-file-name."

MGET (acquiring files from the FTP server) 1 Enter "mget hard-disk-file-name (including a wildcard character)."

D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION APPENDIX B-64014EN/04

- 266 -

PUT (sending a file to the FTP server) 1 Enter "put host-file-name hard-disk-file-name."

MPUT (sending files to the FTP server) 1 Enter "mput host-file-name (including a wildcard character)."

DIR (acquiring a list of files of the FTP server) 1 Enter dir.

DEL (deleting a file from the FTP server) 1 Enter "del hard-disk-file-name."

TYPE (confirming the transfer type of the FTP client) 1. Enter type. 2. Whether the ascii mode or binary mode is set can be determined.


- 267 -

ASCII, BIN (changing the transfer type of the FTP client) 1. Entering bin can change the mode to the binary mode.

2. Entering ascii can change the mode to the ascii mode.

Logout 1 Enter bye.

D.2 OPERATION USING THE Explorer

D.2.1 Displaying the File List Windows Explorer can display the file list in Data Server by adding the network shortcut that connects to Data Server with FTP connection. Display layout (such as Icon, List, or Detail etc.) of files in Data Server can be selected by standard operation of Windows Explorer.

Register Data Server as a Network Place (for Windows 2000 Professional) 1. Start an Explorer.


- 268 -

2. Select [Map Network Drive] in the submemu of [Tools] on the menu bar.

3. Click “Create a shortcut to a Web folder or FTP site.” to start “Add Network Place Wizard”.

4. Input the user name, the password, and the IP address of Data Server for logging in to Data Server,

then click [Next]. The format is “ftp://[user name]:[password]@[IP address of Data Server]”.


- 269 -

5. Input the name for Data Server, then click [Finish].

6. The file list in Data Server can be displayed by the Explorer.

The icon of Data Server is added in My Network Places. For the next time, the file list in Data Server can be displayed by double-clicking this icon.


- 270 -

Register Data Server as a Network Place (for Windows XP Professional) 1. Start an Explorer.



- 271 -

3. Click “Sign up for online storage or connect to a network server.” to start “Add Network Place Wizard”. Next, click [Next].

4. Select “Choose another network location”, then click [Next].


- 272 -

5. Input the user name, the password, and the IP address of Data Server for logging in to Data Server, then click [Next]. The format is “ftp://[user name]:[password]@[IP address of Data Server]”.

6. Input the name for Data Server, then click [Next].


- 273 -

7. Click [Finish].

8 Check [Enable folder view for FTP sites] in Internet Options as follows. (This item is checked by

default.)


- 274 -

NOTE If this item is not checked, the file list in Data Server is displayed as shown in the

following figure, and the files cannot be transferred by operating drag and drop.

9. The file list in Data Server can be displayed by the Explorer.

The icon of Data Server is added in My Network Places. For the next time, the file list in Data Server can be displayed by double-clicking this icon.


- 275 -

Register Data Server as a Network Location (for Windows Vista Business or Windows 7 Professional)

1. Start an Explorer.

2. Display the menu of [Organize], then check [Menu Bar] in [Layout] to display the menu bar.


- 276 -


4. Click “Connect to a Web site that you can use to store your documents and pictures.” to start “Add

Network Location”. Next, click [Next].


- 277 -

5. Select “Choose a custom network location”, then click [Next].

6. Input the user name, the password, and the IP address of Data Server for logging in to Data Server,

then click [Next]. The format is “ftp://[user name]:[password]@[IP address of Data Server]”.


- 278 -

7. Input the name for Data Server, then click [Next].

8. Click [Finish].


- 279 -

9. The file list in Data Server can be displayed by the Explorer. The icon of Data Server is added in Computer. For the next time, the file list in Data Server can be displayed by double-clicking this icon.

NOTE 1 If Work Offline is run in Internet Explorer, when the file list in Data Server attempt

to be displayed by the Explorer, the error shown below occurs.

In this case, it is necessary to stop Work Offline in Internet Explorer. Remove

check [Work Offline] in submenu of [File] on the menu bar in Internet Explorer.

2 Even if the file list in Data Server is changed by operating CNC, it is not

automatically updated in the Explorer. If the FTP communication with Data Server is not performed for five minutes or more, Data Server disconnects the FTP connection. Execute [Refresh] in the Explorer to acquire the latest file list in Data Server.


- 280 -

D.2.2 File Operation and File Transfer

NOTE Files in Data Server cannot be copied or moved to another folder in Data Server

by standard operation of Windows Explorer.

MOVE FOLDER A work folder in Data Server can be moved by standard operation of Windows Explorer.

CREATE FOLDER A new folder can be created in Data Server by standard operation of Windows Explorer.

NOTE 1 To create a new folder in Data Server by standard operation of Windows

Explorer, the DataServer Explorer connection option (R953) is required. 2 The name of the folder ("New Folder") made by standard operation of Windows

Explorer contains characters that cannot be used in Data Server. Be sure to rename that folder by operation of the Explorer. If not renamed, that folder cannot be used in Data Server. As shown in the following figure, characters that cannot be used in Data Server are displayed as ‘#’ in DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen.

3 The limitation of Data Server is applied. For details, see Subsection 1.2.1,

"Displaying and Operating the File List," in Part IV, "OPERATION."

DELETE A file or folder (multiple files or folders) in Data Server can be deleted by standard operation of Windows Explorer.

NOTE 1 The folder to be deleted need not be empty. When the folder is not empty, all

files and sub-folders in the folder are deleted. 2 There is not limitation of number of files or folders that can be selected at a time. 3 The limitation of Data Server is applied. For details, see Subsection 1.2.1,


RENAME A file or folder in Data Server can be renamed by standard operation of Windows Explorer.

NOTE The limitation of Data Server is applied. For details, see Subsection 1.2.1,



- 281 -

DISPLAY FILE CONTENTS Contents of a file in Data Server can be displayed by standard operation of Windows Explorer.

NOTE Contents of a file is displayed by Internet Explorer regardless of the relation by

the extension. If a file is not downloaded to the personal computer side, the contents of the file cannot be edited.

FILE TRANSFER

Start two Windows Explorers. One Explorer displays the file list in Data Server, and the other displays the file list in the personal computer. Some files can be transferred by operating drag and drop from one window to the other. The figure below shows the example that a file in the personal computer side is transferred to the Data Server side.

File list in PC side

File list in Data Server side

Operates drag & drop

File list in PC side

File list in Data Server side

Operates drag & drop

Example of file transfer by using Windows Explorer


- 282 -

NOTE 1 If an error occurs, check the cause of the error according to the Item,


2 Files cannot sometimes be transferred depending on the operation status and protection status.

3 The attribute of files to be transferred by using Windows Explorer is fixed to binary. When NC programs are transferred as text files, fix the attribute to text by the setting of NC parameter No.929. For details, see Section 2.2, "RELATED NC PARAMETERS," in Part III, "SETTING."

4 When a file is transferred to Data Server, if a file having the same name as a file to be transferred from the personal computer is already present on Data Server, by the setting of bit 2 of NC parameter No.906, you can select whether the existing file is overwritten or an error is caused. For details, see Section 2.2, "RELATED NC PARAMETERS," in Part III, "SETTING."

D.3 SECURITY UNBLOCKING IN Windows XP (Service Pack 2) / Vista

When an attempt is made to start FTP communication for the first time in Windows XP (Service Pack 2) or Windows Vista, the security alert shown below may appear. If the alert appears, consult with the network administrator, and select "Unblock" as necessary.

Security Alert of Windows XP (Service Pack 2)


- 283 -

Security Alert of Windows Vista

CAUTIOJN

Since selecting "Unblock" means change in settings related to network security, be sure to consult with the network administrator in advance.

If "Unblock" is selected carelessly, network security can be compromised.

B-64014EN/04 INDEX

i-1

INDEX

<A> ABOUT USE WITH Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B .................9 ALARM AND DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION...........176 APPLICABLE MODELS ................................................3

<B> BACKING UP/RESTORING COMMUNICATION

PARAMETERS..........................................................33

<C> CABLE CONNECTION.......................................142,145 Cable Materials ............................................................145 CHECK ITEMS AT INSTALLATION .......................152 CHECKING COMMUNICATION..............................182 CHECKING COMMUNICATION WITH A HUB .....181 CHECKING CONNECTION WITH THE TRUNK....181 CHECKING SETTINGS .............................................182 Clamping and Shielding Cables ...................................148 COMMUNICATION RETRY MONITORING

FUNCTION..............................................................177 COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE

CONFIRMATION ...................................................172 COMMUNICATION STATE CONFIRMATION.......171 Component Layout................................................157,160 CONNECTING TO Ethernet .......................................142 Connector Specification ...............................................147 CONTROLLING THE MACHINE REMOTE

DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS FROM THE PMC .........65

<D> DATA SERVER FILE MANAGEMENT......................13 DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS .....................................13 DATA SERVER MODES..............................................15 DATASERVER Explorer CONNECTION....................24 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND

NOTE ........................................................................s-1 DETAILS OF THE BUFFER MODE............................17 DEVICE CHANGE ON THE PROGRAM FOLDER

SCREEN..............................................................95,124 Diagnosis status............................................................120 DIFFERENCES IN FUNCTION BETWEEN THE

EMBEDDED Ethernet AND OPTIONAL BOARD ....7 Displaying and Operating the File List ..........100,110,126 Displaying the File List ................................................268 DNC OPERATION......................................................116 DNS/DHCP CLIENT FUNCTIONS..............................26

<E> ELECTRICAL NOISE COUNTERMEASURES........148 ERROR MESSAGES DISPLAYED DURING

PARAMETER SETTING ..........................................91 Error numbers and error messages ...............................121 ETHERNET CONNECTION CONFIRMATION .......169 Ethernet LOG...............................................................164 EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP........................185

EXAMPLE OF SETTING DNS/DHCP.........................55 EXAMPLE OF SETTING THE DATA SERVER

FUNCTIONS .............................................................47 EXAMPLE OF SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet

FUNCTIONS .............................................................51 EXAMPLE OF SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE

DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS .......................................69 EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DHCP SERVER OF

Windows 2000 Server ..............................................255 EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS SERVER OF

Windows 2000 Server ..............................................261 EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS/DHCP.................254 EXECUTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING

FUNCTION................................................................78

<F> File Names of CNC File Management ...........................14 File Operation and File Transfer ..................................281 File Transfer Operation.........................................106,113 FOCAS2/Ethernet FUNCTIONS...................................25 Forcibly Terminating Diagnosis ..................................122 FTP CLIENT OPERATION ........................................266 FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION .............................30 FTP SERVER FUNCTIONS .......................................118 FTP SERVER MAINTENANCE ................................173

<G> GENERAL.......................................................................3 GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ............... s-1 Grounding the Network................................................150

<H> HARDWARE MAINTENANCE INFORMATION....157 HARDWARE OPTIONS.................................................9

<I> Installation ............................................................133,138 Installation on a stand-alone type unit ..................134,139 Installation on an LCD-mounted type unit............133,138 Installing a memory card.......................................135,140

<L> LEADING OUT THE Ethernet CABLE......................144 LED Indications and Meanings.............................158,161 LIST FILE FORMAT ....................................................22

<M> M198-BASED SUBPROGRAM CALL ......................115 MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS ......27

<N> NC PROGRAM FORMAT............................................20 NC PROGRAM INPUT........................................116,129 NC PROGRAM OUTPUT....................................117,129 Number of Files Which Can Be Registered on a Data

Server .........................................................................14

INDEX B-64014EN/04

i-2

<O> OPERATING THE DATA SERVER FILE LIST

SCREEN.....................................................................96 OPERATING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS .....95 OPERATING THE DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST

SCREEN...................................................................108 OPERATING THE DATA SERVER SETTING

SCREEN.....................................................................36 OPERATING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet SETTING

SCREEN.....................................................................48 OPERATING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER

FUNCTION..............................................................123 OPERATING THE FTP TRANSFER HOST FILE

LIST SCREEN .........................................................125 OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE

DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS .....................................119 OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE

DIAGNOSIS SCREEN ............................................119 OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE

DIAGNOSIS SETTING SCREEN.............................60 OPERATION FROM A DATA SERVER.....................20 OPERATION USING THE Explorer...........................268 OPERATION USING THE FTP COMMAND............266 ORGANIZATION ...........................................................3

<P> PREFACE ........................................................................7 Preparations for File Operation ....................................114 Preparations for File Operation and Editing.................107

<R> RELATED MANUALS...................................................4 RELATED NC PARAMETERS........ 9,43,50,55,64,84,89 REVISION RECORD......................................................1 RJ-45 CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENTS...............144

<S> SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ...........................................s-1 SCREEN LAYOUT .......................................................12 SECURITY UNBLOCKING IN Windows XP (Service

Pack 2) / Vista ..........................................................283 Selecting an Inquiry Destination ..................................120 Selection of Mode ..........................................................73 SELECTION PROCEDURE OF HARDWARE AND

SOFTWARE OPTIONS.............................................10 Separating Signal Lines................................................148 Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B ........................................137,160 Series 30i/31i/32i-A ..............................................133,157 SETTING.....................................................................133 Setting Method by CNC Screen .....................................74 Setting Method by Personal Computer...........................78 SETTING OF DHCP .....................................................53 SETTING OF DNS ........................................................52 SETTING THE COMMUNICATION FUNCTION......33 SETTING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS ...........36 SETTING THE DNS/DHCP FUNCTION.....................52 SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet FUNCTIONS.........48 SETTING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION ...86

SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS .............................................................60

SETTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION................................................................70

SETTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION................................................................70

SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows 2000 Professional (FOR INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE)................................................................185

SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows 7 (FOR INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE)...............233

SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows Vista (FOR INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE)...............216

SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows XP Professional (FOR INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE)................................................................196

Signal Timing Charts .....................................................67 Signals............................................................................65 SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE INFORMATION......164 SOFTWARE OPTIONS ..................................................9 Specifications........................................................133,137 Starting Diagnosis ........................................................120

<T> Text Files and Binary Files ............................................15 Total connection diagram......................................135,140 TROUBLESHOOTING...............................................181 TWISTED-PAIR CABLE SPECIFICATION..............145

<U> UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION ................28

<W> When DHCP is Used with the FOCAS2/Ethernet

Function......................................................................57 When DHCP is Used with the FTP Server Function of

the Data Server ...........................................................56 When DNS/DHCP is Used with the Data Server ...........55 When machine remote diagnosis is forcibly terminated 68 When the start of machine remote diagnosis is accepted67 When the start of machine remote diagnosis is rejected 68 When Using a Macro Variable for Control (Simple

Method) ......................................................................82 When Using a PMC Address for Control (Response

Notice method)...........................................................79 When Using a PMC Address for Control (Simple

Method) ......................................................................81

B-64014EN/04 REVISION RECORD

r-1

REVISION RECORD Edition Date Contents

04 Nov., 2010 • Addition of Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B • Addition of unsolicited messaging function and ftp file transfer function • Correction of errors

03 Aug., 2005 • Addition of such as NC program input/output on the Data Server functions • Correction of errors

02 Sep., 2004 • Addition of the machine remote diagnosis function • Addition of the Series 31i/310i-A, 32i/320i-A • Correction of errors

01 Sep., 2003

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

Edit Apprv.Design

Date Design Description Date 2010.12.13

1/11

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-1

Y.Honda

FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i–MODEL A FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i–MODEL B

Modbus/TCP Server function

N.Mutai

02 2011.06.13 Y.Honda This function is available for Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B



1. Type of applied technical documents

Name FANUC Series 30i–MODEL A/B FANUC Series 31i–MODEL A/B FANUC Series 32i–MODEL A/B FANUC Series 35i–MODEL B Fast Ethernet Fast Data Server OPERATOR’S MANUAL

Spec.No./Version B-64014EN/04

2. Summary of change

Group Name / Outline New,

Add,

Correct,

Delete

Applicable

Date

Basic

Function

Optional

Function

Modbus/TCP Server function is added into APPENDIX E. Add Immediately

Unit

Maintenance

parts

Notice

Correction

Another This function is available for Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B. Add Immediately

Edit Apprv.Design


2/11

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-1

Y.Honda



N.Mutai


E Modbus/TCP Server function

E.1 OVERVIEW

The Server function of Modbus/TCP functions is supported.

NOTE 1 In this function, the client function of Modbus/TCP functions is not supported. 2 The Ethernet function (S707) is necessary to use Modbus/TCP Server function

(R968).

Modbus/TCP data model The following four kinds of data formats are defined as Modbus/TCP data model.

Table name Object type (Data type) Type of READ/WRITE

Discrete input Single bit READ only

Coils Single bit READ-WRITE

Input Registers 16-bit word READ only

Holding Registers 16-bit word READ-WRITE

NOTE 1 In FANUC Modbus/TCP Server function, only ”Holding Registers” can be used.

”Discrete input”, Coils”, and “Input Registers” cannot be used. 2 "READ" means the input of data from the client, and "WRITE" means the data of

output from the client.

Modbus/TCP function code In FANUC Modbus/TCP Server function, the following function codes are supported.

Function code name Code

Read Holding Registers 03h

Write Multiple Registers 10h

Read/Write Multiple Registers 17h

Modbus area (Holding Registers) In Modbus/TCP Server function, the Modbus area (Holding Registers) of 64K words (128K bytes) is prepared.

Edit Apprv.Design


3/11

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-1

Y.Honda



N.Mutai


And the Modbus area can be allocated to the PMC area. As a result, the data accessed from the client device to the Modbus area can be notified to the PMC area, and the user application (Ladder program etc.) can be accessed to the Modbus area through the PMC area. This allocation can be set up to three areas. The minimum access unit of Modbus area is “a word” and the range of the address is 1- 65536.

Specification of Modbus/TCP Server function The specification of FANUC Modbus/TCP Server function is shown in the following. 1 “Automatic TCP connection management” is implemented. This means that user application (such as

Ladder program) does not need to take care of TCP connection. 2 “Non-priority connection pool” is implemented. This means that the oldest connection is disconnected

when the requests from the multiple clients are received and the connections are full, FANUC Modbus/TCP Server function can receive the requests from the maximum 10 clients at the same time. “Priority connection pool” is not implemented.

3 “Access control service” is not implemented. This means that all of device can be accessed without authorization (user name, or password).

Modbus/TCP Client

Write Registers 0 15

Read Registers

0 15

Modbus/TCP Server

Modbus area15 0

(Holding Registers) 7 0

PMC area

Area1

Area2

Area3

00001→

65536→

User Application

Edit Apprv.Design


4/11

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-1

Y.Honda



N.Mutai


E.2 SETTING THE Modbus/TCP SERVER FUNCTION

This chapter describes the communication setting for the Modbus/TCP Server function.

Notes on using the Modbus/TCP Server function

NOTE 1 The client of Modbus/TCP functions is not supported. 2 The number of Modbus/TCP clients that can be connected with one CNC is

maximum 10 at the same time. When more than ten connections are attempted, the oldest communication is disconnected.

3 Please confirm that there is no problem as the entire system when communicating with the device of the other companies.

E.2.1 SETTING THE Modbus/TCP SERVER FUNCTION

This section describes the setting screen for operating the Modbus/TCP Server function.

Procedure

1 Press function key .

2 Soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B) appears. (When soft key

does not appear, press the continue key.) 3 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] to display the Ethernet Setting screen. 4 Press soft keys [COMMON] and [Modbus SET], and then enter the parameters.


Press soft key [COMMON] to display the COMMON screen (BASIC).

Edit Apprv.Design


5/11

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-1

Y.Honda



N.Mutai




IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the Fast Ethernet.

(Example of specification format "192.168.0.100")

SUBNET MASK Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network.


ROUTER IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the router.

Specify this item when the network contains a router.



MAC ADDRESS MAC address of the Fast Ethernet

Modbus SERVER screens

Press soft key [Modbus SET] to display the Modbus SERVER screen.

Edit Apprv.Design


6/11

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-1

Y.Honda



N.Mutai


Modbus/TCP Server screen 1 (BASIC) Modbus/TCP Server screen 2 (AREA1-3)


PORT NUMBER (TCP) Specify the port number for using Modbus/TCP Server function. The input range is

from 0 to 65535. Usually, set 502.

When 0 is set, the Modbus/TCP Server function is not operated.

OPTION1 Bit 0 : BCE

Byte arrangement in the Modbus area is assumed to be

0 : a little endian

1 : a big endian

Bit 1 – 7 : RSV

Be sure to set 0.

STATUS PMC ADDRESS The top address in the E/R area of PMC that stores status is set. The setting range

depends on an effective PMC area. This status is occupied by one byte. Specify a

space (blank) when not using this status. In this case, “---“ is displayed.

DATA Modbus ADDRESS The top address in Modbus area (Holding registers) where I/O is exchanged for the

Modbus/TCP client is set. The setting range is 1 – 65536.

DATA PMC ADDRESS The top address in E/R/D area of PMC that exchanges I/O for the Modbus/TCP

client is set. The setting range depends on an effective PMC area. Only the

even-numbered address can be set. Specify a space (blank) when not exchanging

I/O. In this case, “---“ is displayed.

Edit Apprv.Design


7/11

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-1

Y.Honda



N.Mutai


Item Description

DATA SIZE The data size (unit: word size) that exchanges I/O for the Modbus/TCP client is set.

The setting range depends on an effective PMC area. Set 0 when not exchanging

I/O.

CAUTION The E area in the PMC area is normally allocated to volatile memory. However,

on Series 30i/31i/32i-A and Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B it can also be used as nonvolatile memory by setting the option. When the area is set as nonvolatile memory, the contents of the area are retained even after the power is turned off. So, special attention should be paid not to cause an unpredictable operation when the power is turned on next time.

NOTE 1 When setting the PMC area, note the following:

For a multi-path PMC, enter a PMC address as follows: <Path number>:<PMC address> For R0500 for the second PMC path, for example, enter "2:R500". When only a PMC address (R500) is entered, it is assumed to be the PMC address for the first path (1:R0500). If the ":" key is not provided, the "/" or "EOB" key can be used instead.

2 Be careful not to cause an overlap between an area such as the input data area of the user program and a PMC area used for other purposes.

3 This parameter is backed up and stored with Fast Ethernet. When backing up or storing the parameter, please execute it by the common screen of Fast Ethernet.

4 The changed parameter is effective by turning the power off and on. 5 Please set not to overlap the Modbus area in area 1-3. When the overlapping

setting is done, operation is different in READ/WRITE as follows. In case of READ, the data in area n (n is the biggest number) is read. In case of WRITE, the same data as all the overlapping areas is written.

Byte arrangement of Modbus area (Holding Registers) The byte arrangement in Modbus area is normally a little endian.

Edit Apprv.Design


8/11

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-1

Y.Honda



N.Mutai


When Bit0 of OPTION1 is "1", byte arrangement of data becomes a big endian.

Status The status detected by Modbus/TCP Server function

STATUS

STATUS PMC ADDRESS Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0

Modbus status Bit0 : The serious error was detected. Bit1 - Bit5 : Reserved. Bit6 : The initialization was completed. Bit7 : Under communicating with one Modbus/TCP client or more.

E.2.2 MAINTENANCE SCREENS OF Modbus/TCP SERVER FUNCTION

The connection status of the client of Modbus/TCP can be confirmed on this screen.

Procedure


2 Soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B) appears. (When soft key

does not appear, press the continue key.)

Modbus area(Holding Registers)

PMC areaOn Ethernet line

+00 12h 34h 56h 78h +01

0 15

34h 12h78h 56h

15 0 +00

+01

7 0

78h

34h

56h

12h+00

+01

+02

+03

Modbus area(Holding Registers)

PMC areaOn Ethernet line

+00 12h 34h 56h 78h +01

0 15

12h 34h56h 78h

0 15 +00

+01

7 0

56h

12h

78h

34h+00

+01

+02

+03

Edit Apprv.Design


9/11

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-1

Y.Honda



N.Mutai


3 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] to display the Ethernet Setting screen. 4 Press soft key [Modbus MAINTE], and then Modbus SERVER MAINTENANCE screen (CLIENT LIST)

is displayed.

Modbus/TCP SERVER MAINTENANCE screen (CLIENT LIST)


CLIENT IP address of the Modbus/TCP client communicating with this Modbus/TCP Server is displayed.

(Example of display form "192.168.0.200")

It is displayed in order of communicating with this Server.

TIME The connecting time of the Modbus/TCP client communicating with this Server is displayed.

The displayed time is updated automatically.

The display form displays hour (hhh), minute (mm) and second (ss) in the form of "hhh:mm:ss". When

the maximum value is exceeded by "999: 59:59", the maximum value is not updated from "999: 59:59".

E.2.3 LOG SCREEN OF Modbus/TCP SERVER FUNCTION

The communication log related to Modbus/TCP Server function is displayed.

Edit Apprv.Design


10/11

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-1

Y.Honda



N.Mutai


LOG screen for Modbus/TCP Server function

Procedure


2 Press soft key [BOARD LOG] ([ETHER LOG] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B) to display the Ethernet

log screen. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.) 3 Press soft key [Modbus], and then the information related to the Modbus/TCP Server function is displayed.

Modbus/TCP LOG screen

The latest log information is displayed at the top of the screen. At the right end of a log item, the occurrence date and time of the log item is indicated. Date and time data is indicated in the format “MMM.DD hh:mm:ss”, where MMM represents a month, DD represents a day, hh represents hour, mm represents minute, and ss represents second. The top item in the example above indicates “22:32:47 on September 10”. To clear the log information, press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [CLEAR].

NOTE The Modbus/TCP Server log information is stored in volatile memory and it is lost

when the power of CNC is turned off. Check the log information when an error occurs.

Edit Apprv.Design


11/11

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-1

Y.Honda



N.Mutai


The following lists major log message:

Error Code Log message Meaning and action to be taken

E-0B47 TCP port number of Modbus/TCP Server is

wrong

A value outside the valid setting range might be set.

E-0B48 Status PMC address of Modbus/TCP Server

is out of range


E-0B49 Data PMC address of Modbus/TCP Server is

wrong

The odd address might be set.

E-0B4A Data PMC address of Modbus/TCP Server is

out of range


E-0B4B Modbus area of Modbus/TCP Server is out of

range


E-1001 All Modbus communication paths are busy The communication destination (Modbus/TCP client)

exceeded 10 nodes.

For a new communication destination (Modbus/TCP

client), the oldest connection is disconnected.

E-1003 Version number of Modbus packet is wrong Please specify a correct version number according

to the protocol of Modbus/TCP.

E-1004 Length of Modbus packet is wrong Please specify a correct size according to the

protocol of Modbus/TCP.

E-100B Function code of Modbus packet is wrong The specified function code might not be supported.

Please refer to “1. Modbus/TCP SERVER

FUNCTION” about the supported function code.

E-1015

E-1016

Data address of Modbus packet is wrong Please specify a correct data address according to

the protocol of Modbus/TCP.

E-1017

E-1018

E-1019

Data value of Modbus packet is wrong Please specify a correct data value according to the

protocol of Modbus/TCP.

E-XXXX (No message) Internal error

Report the error number to FANUC.

Edit Apprv.Design


1/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka

FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –MODEL B EtherNet/IP Adapter function

N.Mutai



Name FANUC Series 30i–MODEL A/B FANUC Series 31i–MODEL A/B FANUC Series 32i–MODEL A/B FANUC Series 35i–MODEL B Fast Ethernet Fast Data Server OPERATOR’S MANUAL




Add,

Correct,

Delete

Applicable

Date

Basic

Function

Optional

Function

EtherNet/IP Adapter function is added as Appendix F. Add Immediately

Unit

Maintenance

parts

Notice

Correction

Another

Edit Apprv.Design


2/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai

F EtherNet/IP ADAPTER FUNCTION

F.1 OVERVIEW

F.1.1 INTRODUCTION

EtherNet/IP is a industrial Ethernet network. The specification of EtherNet/IP is managed by ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association), and its globalization and standardization are promoted. Therefore, EtherNet/IP has been adopted by many vendors, and it is possible to connect to various kinds of industrial devices. Moreover, EtherNet/IP devices can be used together with a general-purpose Ethernet devices because a standard Ethernet technology is used.

NOTE 1 EtherNet/IP Adapter function is available for Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –B only. 2 The Ethernet function (S707) is necessary to use EtherNet/IP Adapter function

(R967).

NOTE This chapter targets the person who has basic knowledge about EtherNet/IP.

Therefore, it doesn't explain a basic matter of EtherNet/IP. For details of EtherNet/IP, please refer to Web site (http://www.odva.org) of

ODVA that manages the specification.

Edit Apprv.Design


3/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai

F.1.2 TERMINOLOGY

Direction of DI and DO In this chapter, the signal that CNC receives from Scanner is DI, and the signal that CNC send to Scanner is DO.

Connection To exchange the DI/DO data with EtherNet/IP, first the communication path, called " connection", is established. When the connection is established successfully, the DI/DO data can be exchanged. CNC supports maximum 32 connections.

Adapter and Scanner The scanner sends the adapter the connection request, and the adapter responds to the connection request. When the adapter returns the positive answer, the connection is established. The scanner sends the communication setting to the adapter by the connection request. CNC supports the adapter function.

EDS file The adapter offers the communication setting by the text file called "EDS file". The scanner or scanner setting tool reads this EDS file to acquire the communication setting. By operating the CNC screen, EDS file can be preserved in the memory card or USB memory.

Implicit message and Explicit message In EtherNet/IP, there are two types of communication, one is to transmit DI/DO data to the device regularly, and another is to send a request to the device and receive a response. The former is called "Implicit message" and the latter is called "Explicit message". In Implicit message, DI/DO data is transmitted regularly based on the communication setting notified when the connection is established. There are Class 0 and Class 1 by the difference of the communication procedure. CNC supports Class 1. It uses UDP of Ethernet technology. Both Point-To-Point (unicast) and multicast can be used.

CNC (Adapter)

DO

DI Scanner

Edit Apprv.Design


4/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai

The communication type of Explicit message is server/client. The client transmits the request of reading or writing the data to the server. The server returns the value based on the request from the client, and updates own value by the received value. There are Class 2 to Class 6 by the difference of the communication procedure. CNC supports Class 3. It uses TCP of Ethernet technology. Point-To-Point (unicast) only can be used. This chapter explains Implicit message in section "F.1.4 ALLOCATION SETTING AND SETTING OF SCANNER" and "F.1.5 EDS FILE", and explains Explicit message in section "F.1.7 EXPLICIT MESSAGE".

Originator and Target At Class 1 communication (Implicit message), first, the connection is established. The scanner sends the connection request, and the adapter responds to this request. Therefore, the scanner is called as a originator of connection, and the adapter is called as a target of connection. CNC supports Class 1 target.

Client and Server At Class 3 communication (Explicit message), the client sends the request of reading/writing the data from/to the server, and the server returns the requested value and updates own value by received data. CNC supports Class 3 server.

RPI and API In the communication of Class 1, the scanner specifies the interval of the DI/DO data transmission. The interval that the scanner requests is called RPI (Requested Packet Interval). On the other hand, the interval when the DI/DO data is sent and received by an actual communication is called API (Actual Packet Interval).

Exclusive Owner, Input Only and Listen Only In Class1 communication, there are following three types of communication.

Type of

communication

Description

Exclusive Owner Both DI signal from the scanner to the adapter and DO signal from the adapter to the

scanner is transmitted. To prevent the double writing, it is not allowed to write the value to

the same DI signal from multiple devices.

Input Only Only the DO signal from the adapter to the scanner is exchanged.

Listen Only Only the DO signal from the adapter to the scanner is exchanged. It is effective only if other

Exclusive Owner or Input Only connection is established.

Exclusive Owner is used in one-by-one communication. When the adapter notifies DO signal to many scanner devices, Input Only is used. Listen Only is for the special purpose like the monitor and it is not used usually.

Edit Apprv.Design


5/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai

Allocation setting In CNC, the data area exchanged between the scanner is specified by the setting called "allocation setting". The PMC data area is used. Maximum four allocation settings can be specified.

Network composition of I/O transmission Both the adapter and the scanner can have multiple settings. The data area of DI/DO and the transmission interval can be specified separately. It is possible to communicate with a different device at each setting. Moreover, one DO area of the adapter can be transmitted to multiple scanners. In this case, the multicast is used.

F.1.3 SPECIFICATION OF CNC ADAPTER FUNCTION

Specification of CNC Item Description

Supported CNC type Series 30i/31i/32i/35i -MODEL B

Supported hardware Following hardware is supported.

- Multi-function Ethernet

Fast Ethernet circuit mounted on the main board of the LCD-mounted type

Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -B (Connector name: CD38B)

- Fast Ethernet Board

Option board mounted in the optional slot (Connector name: CD38R)

Hardware that operates the EtherNet/IP Adapter function and the Ethernet function is

specified by parameter No.970. Please refer to "F3. RELATING NC PARAMETER" for

details.

Software component The two following software options are necessary to use this function.

- EtherNet/IP Adapter function (R967)

Multiple scanners are connected to oneadapter

Scanner

Adapter

Scanner

DO DI DO DI

DI DO DI DO

Setting1 Setting2

Setting1 Setting1

DO signal of the adapter is transmittedby multicast

Scanner

Adapter

Scanner

DO

DI DI

Setting1

Setting1 Setting1

Edit Apprv.Design


6/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai

- Ethernet function (S707)

The EtherNet/IP Adapter function operates with the same hardware as the Ethernet

function. It cannot operate with another hardware.

Data Server function (S737) is exclusion to the EtherNet/IP Adapter function.

EtherNet/IP Adapter function and Data Server function cannot be specified at the

same time.

EtherNet/IP Adapter function and FL-net function (J692) cannot operated with the

same hardware. If the same hardware is specified, EtherNet/IP Adapter function does

not operate.

NOTE When EtherNet/IP Adapter function is used, up to 5 FOCAS2/Ethernet clients can

be connected to one CNC.

Specification of EtherNet/IP Adapter Item Description

Communication type Class 1 target, Class 3 server

Data type of CNC PMC data (R, E and D area)

Maximum number of

allocation setting

4

Maximum data size per

allocation setting

256 byte

Maximum number of

connection

32

Range of RPI 4 ms to 10,000 ms (Setting unit : 1ms)

Bridge to DeviceNet Not supported

Specification of communication Item Description

IP address Specified by either of the following methods.

- Enters a fixed value from the CNC screen.

- Acquires from DHCP server.

(It is also possible to use the same IP address after that when acquiring it from the

DHCP server once.)

Port number Class 1 : 2222 (Fixed)

Edit Apprv.Design


7/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai

Class 3 : 44818 (Fixed)

Ethernet interface Following settings are supported.

- 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX

- Half duplex or Full duplex

- Auto Negotiation or Fixed

Please refer to "F3. RELATING NC PARAMETER" for details.

F.1.4 ALLOCATION SETTING AND SETTING OF SCANNER

The I/O area used to exchange data with the scanner is specified in the allocation setting. The address and the size of the PMC area are set. Maximum four settings are specified. The following is the example that two allocation settings are used.

Number of Allocation

setting

PMC address Size

DI 1:R1000 8 1

DO 1:R1008 8

DI 1:R2000 16 2

DO 1:R2016 16

DI Not used Not used 3

DO Not used Not used

DI Not used Not used 4

DO Not used Not used

The scanner uses the adapter internal data number to specify the data to exchange. It is the values such as 101, 151, 102 and 152 in the following figure. The number of this internal data is called the instance of the Assembly object. In CNC, the relation between the number of the allocation setting and the instance of the Assembly object is fixed, and the relation is written in the EDS file. The setting tool of the scanner reads the EDS file, and acquires the relation between the allocation setting and the instance of Assembly object. The operator specifies the number of allocation setting as the connection used by the communication. Therefore, when the scanner device is set by using EDS file, the data area of the CNC can be specified by the number of the allocation setting. The general procedure of the setting for EtherNet/IP is as follows. A. The value is set to the allocation setting in the CNC screen.

Edit Apprv.Design


8/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai

B. EDS file is output by CNC. C. The setting tool of the scanner reads the EDS file. D. The operator selects the allocation setting of CNC by operating the setting tool of the scanner, and specifies

the scanner setting if necessary. E. The setting of EtherNet/IP is transmitted from the setting tool to the scanner device. The instance of the

Assembly object corresponding to the selected allocation setting of CNC is notified to the scanner device. F. The scanner device establishes the connection to CNC by using the instance of the Assembly object, and

exchanges the DI/DO data.

Scanner device CNC

EtherNet/IP Adapter function

Internal data (Assembly object) PMC area

101

102

152

Class 1 Communication

Allocation Setting 1

Allocation Setting 2

151

EDS file Allocation Setting - Instance of Assembly

object

PC

Setting tool of Scanner

A.

A.

B.

C.

D.

E. (The instance of the Assembly object is notified.)

F.

F.

Selection of the Allocation Setting->Specifies Assembly object

Class 1 Communication

Edit Apprv.Design


9/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai

NOTE 1 In this chapter, the procedures of A and B in the figure are explained. Please refer

to the manual of the scanner device for the procedure from C to E. 2 If either of the following case is applied, it is necessary to specify the instance of

the Assembly object corresponding to the allocation setting of CNC at the scanner or the setting tool of the scanner. - The scanner is set without using EDS file. - Class 3 communication is executed to CNC.

3 Please refer to "F.6.1 SUPPORTED CLASS AND INSTANCE" for details of the instance of the Assembly object.

F.1.5 EDS FILE

The setting of the connection that is acceptable by the adapter is described in EDS file with text format. By operating the CNC screen, EDS file is output to the memory card or the USB memory.

Type There are following two types in EDS file.

Type How to create Description

Standard EDS file Output EDS file after all

allocation settings are disabled.

EDS file that can be used for the general purpose

The content of the allocation setting is not reflected.

EDS file corresponding to

the allocation setting

Output EDS file after at least

one allocation setting is

enabled.

EDS file where the content of the allocation setting is

reflected

Items to set in the setting tool of the scanner are few and

the setting is easy.

Contents of EDS file The contents other than the setting of the connection are the same between the standard EDS file and the EDS file corresponding to the allocation setting. This section explains the setting of the connection.

Standard EDS file

The setting of the following connections is preserved regardless of the content of the allocation setting of CNC. [Four Allocation Settings : No.01 to No.04] * [Three types of communication : Exclusive Owner, Input Only and Listen Only]

= Total 12 types The DI/DO data size is not preserved in EDS file.

Edit Apprv.Design


10/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai

Please specify the size at the setting tool of the scanner according to the allocation setting of CNC.

EDS file corresponding to the allocation setting

The contents correspond to the allocation setting of CNC. Only the enabled allocation setting is preserved. Only the type of effective communication types are preserved based on the DI/DO size of the allocation setting of CNC.

DI/DO size

in Allocation Setting Exclusive Owner Input Only Listen Only

DI size : 1 or more

DO size : 1 or more Enabled Enabled Enabled

DI size : 0

DO size : 1 or more Disabled Enabled Enabled

DI size : 1 or more

DO size : 0 Enabled Disabled Disabled

DI/DO size specified by the allocation setting of CNC is preserved in EDS file. Therefore, the setting of the size by the setting tool of the scanner is unnecessary. Standard EDS file can be used by any CNC, and any setting is possible. However, it is necessary to specify the value corresponding to the allocation setting of CNC at the setting tool of the scanner. When EDS file corresponding to the allocation setting is used, the setting at the setting tool of the scanner is easy because the allocation setting of CNC is reflected. However, this EDS file can not be used with CNC of other setting. Please use it properly according to the usage.

NOTE The value of ProductCode, MajRev and MinRev are the same between Standard

EDS file and EDS file corresponding to the allocation setting. The setting tool of the scanner may be not able to distinguish these files.

Selection of the connection in the setting tool of the scanner The setting of the connection preserved in EDS file is listed in the item of "Connection I/O type" or "Connection Name" in the setting tool of the scanner.

Edit Apprv.Design


11/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai

Example of the scanner setting tool

The meaning of the name of the connection displayed in the setting tool of the scanner is as follows.

Please select the allocation setting and the type of communication that is used by the communication with the adapter.

F.1.6 UNIT OF DATA, CONCURRENCY, ENDIAN

Unit of the data and concurrency The unit of the I/O data exchanged with the scanner can be selected from byte (1 byte), word (2 byte), and long (4 byte). The unit of data, the restriction of the PMC address, and the restriction of the size are as follows.

Unit of data Restriction of PMC address Restriction of size

Byte (1 byte) N.A. N.A.

Word (2 byte) Aligned with 2-byte boundaries

(Even address only)

Aligned with 2-byte boundaries

(Even size only)

Long (4 byte) Aligned with 4-byte boundaries

(Value can be fourthly divided only)



The concurrency of the data is secured by the specified unit.

No.01 Exclusive Owner

Number of the allocation setting : No.01 to No.04

Type of communication : Exclusive Owner, Input Only or Listen Only

Edit Apprv.Design


12/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai

Please refer to "OPTION" of "Allocation screen" in "F.2.3. EtherNet/IP ADAPTER SETTING SCREEN" for the setting method.

Conversion of endian Whether the conversion of endian is executed or not can be specified. When the endian is not converted, the data is treated as a little endian. When endian is converted, the data is treated as a big endian. Please refer to "OPTION" of "Allocation screen" in "F.2.3. EtherNet/IP ADAPTER SETTING SCREEN" for the setting method. - Unit of data is Word (2 byte) and the endian is not converted.

- Unit of data is Word (2 byte) and the endian is converted.

- Unit of data is Long (4 byte) and the endian is not converted.

- Unit of data is Long (4 byte) and the endian is converted.

PMC areaEthernet line

+00 12h 34h56h 78h+01

0 15 7 0

78h

34h

56h

12h+00

+01

+02

+03


+00 12h 34h56h 78h+01

0 15 7 0

56h

12h

78h

34h+00

+01

+02

+03


+00 12h 34h 56h 78h0 31

7 0

34h

78h

12h

56h+00

+01

+02

+03

PMC area7 0

56h

12h

78h

34h+00

+01

+02

+03

Ethernet line

+00 12h 34h 56h 78h0 31

Edit Apprv.Design


13/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai

F.1.7 Explicit message

In Explicit message, there are two types of communication, connection type and non-connection type. CNC supports both types. But this chapter explains only the Explicit message of non-connection type because it is used commonly. In Explicit message (Class 3), the PMC area can be read and written as well as Implicit message (Class 1). In CNC (Explicit message server), the PMC area read and written is specified by using the allocation setting. In Explicit message client, the area to read and write is specified by class and instance. It is necessary to specify the instance of the Assembly object to read and write the PMC area of CNC. Please refer to "F.6.1 SUPPORTED CLASS AND INSTANCE" for the relation between the allocation setting and the instance of Assembly object. The procedure to read and write the PMC area by the Explicit message is as follows. 1. Specify the allocation setting of PMC area at the allocation screen of CNC. 2. Confirm the instance of Assembly object corresponding to the specified allocation setting.

Example) DO (T->O) of allocation setting No.1 is 65h and DI (O->T) of allocation setting No.1 is 97h. 3. In the Explicit message client, execute the function, Get_Attribute_Sigle (reading) or Set_Attribute_Single

(writing), with the argument of Assembly class (04h), instance corresponding to the allocation setting (65h and 97h, etc) .

Edit Apprv.Design


14/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai

F.2 SETTING AND MAINTENANCE

This section explains the setting and the maintenance of the EtherNet/IP Adapter function. To communicate with devices by EtherNet/IP, first set IP address, then specify the setting of EtherNet/IP Adapter function.

F.2.1 SETTING OF IP ADDRESS

There are two methods of setting IP address. 1. Inputs a fixed value from the CNC screen. 2. Acquires a value from DHCP server Please select the setting method according to the operation of the network.

Inputs a fixed value from the CNC screen. Please input the value to IP address, subnet mask and router IP address referring to the section "COMMON screen (BASIC)" in "III. SETTING 3.1 OPERATING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet SETTING SCREEN" of this manual. When the FOCAS2 function is not used, the input to the items PORT NUMBER (TCP), PORT NUMBER (UDP) and TIME INTERVAL are unnecessary.

Acquires a value from DHCP server Please input the value to the necessary items referring to "III. SETTING 4.SETTING THE DNS/DHCP FUNCTION" of this manual. When IP address is acquired from the DHCP server, there are two kinds of operation procedures. 1. Every time when the power supply is turned on, the setting is acquired from the DHCP server. 2. When the setting is acquired from the DHCP server, the setting is preserved in the nonvolatile memory.

When the power supply is turned on next time and after that time, the preserved setting is used, and the setting is not acquired from the DHCP server any longer.

Please refer to item “OPTION 1” in “Setting item” of “Basic screen” in “F.2.3 EtherNet/IP ADAPTER SETTING SCREEN” for details.

Edit Apprv.Design


15/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai

F.2.2 SCREEN LAYOUT

The kind of the hardware that is used by EtherNet/IP Adapter function is shown on the title bar of each screen.

Title Description

[MULTI-FUNC ETHER] Fast Ethernet circuit mounted on the main board of the LCD-mounted type

Series 30i/31i/32i /35i -B

[BOARD(SLOT1)] Option board mounted in the optional slot 1




F.2.3 EtherNet/IP ADAPTER SETTING SCREEN

EtherNet/IP Adapter setting screen consists of the basic screen (page 1) and the allocation screens (page 2 to 5). A common setting to EtherNet/IP Adapter function is specified on the basic screen. A setting for each allocation setting is specified on allocation screens.

Edit Apprv.Design


16/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai

NOTE 1 Before changing a parameter on the EtherNet/IP Adapter setting screen, set the

MDI mode or emergency stop state. 2 If the Change protection level of the Ethernet function is higher than the Operation

level in 8-level data protection function, it is not possible to change the settings.

Procedure


2 Soft key [ETHERNET] appears. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.) 3 Press soft key [ETHERNET] to display Ethernet Setting screen. 4 Press soft key [EIP A SET]. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.)

5 Press Page key to switch the page, and then enter the parameters.

Basic screen

1st page is basic screen. A common setting in the EtherNet/IP Adapter function is done.

EtherNet/IP Adapter setting screen (Basic)

Press soft key [(OPRT)] as needed and then use the following soft keys. [DI DATA] :

Edit Apprv.Design


17/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai


DI DATA ON

ABNORMAL

Specify the operation when the update of DI area stops.

HOLD : DI area is held. (Nothing is done).

CLEAR : DI area is cleared to be zero.

Soft key is used to change the setting. Press Soft key [(OPRT)], [DI DATA], and then select [HOLD]

or [CLEAR].

STATUS

ADDRESS

Specify the top address in the R/E/D area of PMC where the status of EtherNet/IP Adapter function

is stored.

When status is not used, set " " (blank). "---" is displayed in STATUS ADDRESS and "0" is displayed

in STATUS SIZE.

The setting range depends on an effective PMC area. It depends on the value of STATUS SIZE too.

STATUS SIZE

Specify the size of PMC area where status is stored. The content of status that is output to PMC

area is limited according to this size.

When status is not used, set "0". "---" is displayed in STATUS ADDRESS and "0" is displayed in

STATUS SIZE.

The setting range is either 0, 1 or 3.

OPTION 1

Bit 0-1 : These bits specify the operation when IP address, subnet mask, router IP address, DNS IP

address 1 and 2 and domain are acquired from DHCP server by using DHCP client function

(No.904#6).

Bit 0 : Parameters acquired by DHCP client function are

0 : not saved in nonvolatile memory (SRAM).

1 : saved in nonvolatile memory . When succeeding in saving, Bit 1 is automatically set to 1.

Bit 1 : DHCP client function is

0 : enabled.

1 : disabled. (It is not possible to set this bit manually.)

Bit 2-4 : Reserved (Must be zero)

Bit 7 : EtherNet/IP function is

0 : enabled.

1 : disabled.

When disabled, the communication is not done. And in the maintenance screen, the indicators

of MS and NS turn off, and the value zero is displayed in all items from VENDOR ID to SERIAL

NO.

OPTION 2

Bit 0 : When the power supply is turned on next time, the setting of EtherNet/IP is

0 : not initialized.

1 : initialized.

Edit Apprv.Design


18/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai


CAUTION 1 The E area in the PMC area is normally allocated to volatile memory. However, it

can also be used as nonvolatile memory by setting the option. When the area is set as nonvolatile memory, the contents of the area are retained even after the power is turned off. So, special attention should be paid not to cause an unpredictable operation when the power is turned on next time.

2 Be careful not to cause an overlap between a specified area and a PMC area used for other purposes.

NOTE 1 When a parameter is changed, CNC becomes POWER MUST BE OFF alarm

state. For the changed parameters to take effect, turn the CNC power off and back on again.

2 For a multi-path PMC, enter a PMC address as follows: <Path number>:<PMC address> For R0500 for the second PMC path, for example, enter "2:R500". When only a PMC address (R500) is entered, it is assumed to be the PMC address for the first path (1:R0500). If the ":" key is not provided, the "/" or "EOB" key can be used instead.


PORT NUMBER (TCP) The standard port number for EtherNet/IP TCP (44818) is displayed.

PORT NUMBER (UDP) The standard port number for EtherNet/IP UDP (2222) is displayed.

Status The status is a data detected by EtherNet/IP Adapter function. When STATUS SIZE is 1, only the first byte of status is output to PMC area, and when STATUS SIZE is 3, all information is output.

Status #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

+0 OPE - - - - - - ERR +1 - - - - ENA4 ENA3 ENA2 ENA1 Status address +2 - - - - IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1

Edit Apprv.Design


19/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai

Offset Bit Name Description

#0 ERR Error (MS : recoverable fault or unrecoverable fault)

#1-6 Reserved +0

#7 OPE Operating correctly (MS : device operational)

#0 ENA1 State of allocation 01 is enabled.




+1

#4-7 Reserved

#0 IN1 Exclusive owner connection is connected to allocation 01.




+2

#4-7 Reserved

CAUTION Even if the value of IN1 to IN4 is one, it is not guaranteed that the value of DI signal

is effective. Please confirm whether the communication is effective by the value of an actual signal.

Edit Apprv.Design


20/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai

Allocation screen

Page 2 to 5 is allocation screen. Page 2 to 5 corresponds to allocation 01 to 04.

EtherNet/IP Adapter setting screen (Allocation)

Press soft key [(OPRT)] as needed and then use the following soft keys. [STATE] :

Edit Apprv.Design


21/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai


STATE

Specify whether the allocation is used or not.

ENABLE : This allocation is used.

DISABLE : This allocation is not used.

If STATE is “ENABLE”, the setting can not be changed. When trying to change the setting, the

message "Change ENABLE into DISABLE" is displayed.

To change the setting, first set the item STATE to be "DISABLE". When the change is completed,

set the item STATE to be "ENABLE".

When the item STATE is changed to "ENABLE", the conformance of the setting is confirmed. If

there is a problem, the message is displayed and item STATE keeps "DISABLE".

Moreover, when NC stands up, the conformance of the setting is confirmed. If there is a problem,

item STATE is changed to "DISABLE" automatically.

Soft key is used for setting. Press Soft key [(OPRT)], [STATE], and then select [ENABLE] or

[DISABLE].

TYPE

Specify the type of area where DI/DO data is stored.

0 : DI/DO data is not used.

1 : DI/DO data is allocated to PMC area.

When the item TYPE is changed, ADDRESS is cleared to "---" and SIZE is cleared to zero.

If " "(Space) is set to ADDRESS or "0" is set to SIZE, "0" is displayed in TYPE, "---" is displayed in

ADDRESS and "0" is displayed to SIZE. The setting becomes unused.

ADDRESS

Specify the address of the area where DI/DO data is stored.

When the item TYPE is "0", the value cannot be set.

When the item TYPE is "1", the top address of PMC area is set. R, D or E area can be specified.

The setting range depends on the actual range of R area, E area, and D area of PMC.

It is necessary to set the area specified by ADDRESS and SIZE within the range of PMC area.

SIZE

Specify the size of area where DI/DO data is stored.

When TYPE is “0”, the value can not be set.

When TYPE is "1", the size of PMC area is set.

The range is 1 to 256 (byte).

It is necessary to set the area specified by ADDRESS and SIZE within the range of PMC area.

OPTION

Bit 0 : Unit of data is Word (2 byte).

0 : Disabled

1 : Enabled

When enabled, both ADDREE and SIZE must be aligned with 2-byte boundaries.

Example) ADDRESS / SIZE = R1000/2, R1002/4, E1004/6

Bit 1 : Unit of data is Long (4 byte).

Edit Apprv.Design


22/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai

0 : Disabled

1 : Enabled

When enabled, both ADDRESS and SIZE must be aligned with 4-byte boundaries.

Example) ADDRESS / SIZE = R1000/4, R1004/8, E1008/12

When both Bit 0 and Bit 1 are 0, unit of data is byte (1 byte).

When both Bit 0 and Bit 1 are 1, the setting is error.

Bit 2 : Endian conversion is

0 : disabled

1 : enabled


CAUTION 1 The E area in the PMC area is normally allocated to volatile memory. However, it

can also be used as nonvolatile memory by setting the option. When the area is set as nonvolatile memory, the contents of the area are retained even after the power is turned off. So, special attention should be paid not to cause an unpredictable operation when the power is turned on next time.


NOTE 1 When item STATE is changed, CNC becomes POWER MUST BE OFF alarm

state. For the changed parameters to take effect, turn the CNC power off and back on again.


Conformance of the allocation setting When the item STATE is changed to "ENABLE", the conformance of the setting is confirmed. If either of the following conditions is filled, the item STATE cannot be changed to "ENABLE" because there is a problem. - For both DI and DO, the item TYPE is "0". - The item TYPE is set to "1", but the item ADDRESS is "---" or the item SIZE is 0.

Edit Apprv.Design


23/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai

- The range of DI/DO area is out of PMC area. - OPTION Bit 0 and Bit 1 are both set to "1". - OPTION Bit 0 is set to "1", but the unit of the item ADDRESS or SIZE is not aligned with 2-byte boundaries. - OPTION Bit 0 is set to "1", but the unit of the item ADDRESS or SIZE is not aligned with 4-byte boundaries.

F.2.4 BACKING UP AND RESTORING SETTING

This section explains how to back up or restore the setting of EtherNet/IP Adapter function. The setting can be preserved in the memory card or USB memory. When backing up and restoring the setting of the EtherNet/IP Adapter function, the communication parameters of the Ethernet function is backed up and restored too.

Procedure


2 Soft key [ETHERNET] appears. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.) 3 Press soft key [ETHERNET] to display Ethernet Setting screen. 4 Press soft key [EIP A SET]. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.) 5 Press soft key [(OPRT)], and then [+]. The soft keys [BACKUP], [RESTORE], [ALL BACKUP], and

[ALL RESTORE] for backing up or restoring settings appear. 6 Press the soft key [BACKUP], [RESTORE], [ALL BACKUP], or [ALL RESTORE]. The soft keys

[EXECUTE] and [CANCEL] appear. 7 Enter the name of a file to be backed up or restored in the key-in buffer, and press the soft key

[EXECUTE]. The operation selected at the above step is executed. The character string “EXECUTING” blinks during execution.

Edit Apprv.Design


24/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai

BACKUP The communication parameters for EtherNet/IP Adapter function and Fast Ethernet function are saved from the SRAM of the CNC main unit to the memory card or the USB memory. If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, the specified file name is used. If no file name is specified, the file name “EIPADPT.MEM” is used.

RESTORE The communication parameters for EtherNet/IP Adapter function and Fast Ethernet function are read from the memory card or the USB memory and saved to the SRAM of the CNC main unit. If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, the specified file name is used. If no file name is specified, the file name “EIPADPT.MEM” is used.

ALL BACKUP All valid communication parameters for embedded Ethernet, Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server, PROFIBUS-DP master/slave, DeviceNet master/slave, FL-net, CC-Link remote device, EtherNet/IP Adapter are saved from the SRAM of the CNC main unit to the memory card or the USB memory. If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, the specified file name is used. If no file name is specified, the file name “NETWORK.MEM” is used.

Edit Apprv.Design


25/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai

ALL RESTORE All valid communication parameters for embedded Ethernet, Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server, PROFIBUS-DP master/slave, DeviceNet master/slave, FL-net, CC-Link remote device and EtherNet/IP adapter are read from the memory card or the USB memory and saved to the SRAM of the CNC main unit. However, if a communication function related to a valid communication parameter is disabled in the CNC, that parameter is not saved to the SRAM. If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, the specified file name is used. If no file name is specified, the file name “NETWORK.MEM” is used.

CAUTION While an external input/output device such as the memory card or USB memory is

being accessed, do not turn the power to the CNC off or remove the external input/output device. Doing so may damage the external input/output device.



requires power-off. 3 When the 8-level data protection function is enabled, whether back up or restore of

the communication parameter for Ethernet function and EtherNet/IP Adapter function is allowed or not depends on the setting of that function.

Related NC parameter

0020 0020 I/O CHANNEL: Input/output device selection, or interface number for a foreground input/output device


[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 4: Selects the memory card as the input/output device.

17: Selects the USB memory as the input/output device.

It is not possible to backup and restore the communication parameters by using other devices.

F.2.5 OUTPUT OF EDS FILE

This chapter explains the method of outputting the EDS file to the memory card or the USB memory.

Edit Apprv.Design


26/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai

If the state of all allocation setting is disable, the standard EDS file is stored. If at least one of the allocation setting is enable, EDS file corresponding to the allocation setting is stored.

Procedure


2 Soft key [ETHERNET] appears. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.) 3 Press soft key [ETHERNET] to display Ethernet Setting screen. 4 Press soft key [EIP A SET]. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.) 5 Press soft key [(OPRT)], and then [+]. The soft key [EDS OUTPUT] appears. 6 Press the soft key [EDS OUTPUT]. The soft keys [EXECUTE] and [CANCEL] appear. 7 Enter the file name of EDS file in the key-in buffer, and press the soft key [EXECUTE] to output EDS file.

If the file name is not specified, the file name “F_CNC101.EDS” is used. The character string “EXECUTING” blinks during execution.



Edit Apprv.Design


27/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai

NOTE 1 Output of EDS file can only be performed in the MDI mode or EDIT mode. 2 When the 8-level data protection function is enabled, whether output of EDS file is

allowed or not depends on the setting of that function.




[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 4: Selects the memory card as the input/output device.

17: Selects the USB memory as the input/output device.


F.2.6 EtherNet/IP ADAPTER MAINTENANCE SCREEN

EtherNet/IP adapter maintenance screen consists of the adapter information screen (page 1), scanner list screens (page 2 to 5) and scanner detail screen. Adapter information screen shows the information about LED display of MS and NS, and information of the adapter such as Vendor ID, Device Type, and so on. Scanner list screen shows the list of connected scanners. Scanner detail screen shows the detailed information like RPI and API for the selected scanner.

Procedure


2 Soft key [ETHERNET] appears. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.) 3 Press soft key [ETHERNET] to display Ethernet Setting screen. 4 Press soft key [EIP A MAINTE]. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.)

5 Press Page key to switch the page.

Edit Apprv.Design


28/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai

Adapter information screen

1st page is a adapter information screen. Information about the adapter is displayed.

EtherNet/IP Adapter maintenance screen (adapter information)


MS LED display of Module Status and its meaning are displayed.

NS LED display of Network Status and its meaning are displayed.

VENDOR ID Vendor ID of the adapter is displayed in hex.

DEVICE TYPE Device type of the adapter is displayed in hex.

PRODUCT CODE Product code of the adapter is displayed in hex.

REVISION Revision of the adapter is displayed. The format is “Major revision.Minor revision”.

SERIAL NO. Serial number of the adapter is displayed in hex.

The LED display of MS and its meaning are as follows.

LED display of MS Meaning

Steady Off DISABLE FUNCTION

Flashing Green STANDBY

Steady Green DEVICE OPERATIONAL

Flashing Red RECOVERABLE FAULT

Steady Red UNRECOVERABLE FAULT

Edit Apprv.Design


29/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai

The LED display of NS and its meaning is as follows.

LED display of NS Meaning

Steady Off (MS is steady off too) ---

Steady Off NO IP ADDRESS

Flashing Green NO CONNECTIONS

Steady Green CONNECTED

Flashing Red CONNECTION TIMEOUT

Steady Red DUPLICATE IP ADDRESS

Scanner list screen

Page 2 to 5 is a scanner list screen. Scanner currently connected is displayed.

EtherNet/IP Adapter maintenance screen (scanner list)

Press soft key [(OPRT)] as needed and then use the following soft keys.


SCANNER LIST

IP address of the scanner now connecting to the adapter is displayed in the list.

The scanner displayed in the list can be filtered by the allocation setting.

Press soft key [(OPRT)], and then [FILTER].

If the soft key [FILTER] is pressed, the end of the title changes as follows.

[ALL] -> [ALLOCATION01]->[ALLOCATION02]->[ALLOCATION03]->[ALLOCATION04]->[ALL]->

Edit Apprv.Design


30/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai

Only the scanner connected with the allocation setting of the title is displayed in the list.

The connection type Explicit Message is displayed in [ALL].

IP ADDRESS IP address of the connected scanner is displayed.

TIME The time connected with the scanner is displayed in the form of HHH:MM:SS.

When connect time exceeds 999:59:59, the display is not updated as 999:59:59.

Scanner detail screen

Procedure 1 On a scanner list screen, move the cursor to select the scanner for detail display. 2 Press soft key [(OPRT)], and then [DETAIL]. The scanner detail screen is displayed. 3 To return to the scanner list screen, press soft key [LIST].

EtherNet/IP Adapter maintenance screen (scanner detail)


IP ADDRESS

IP address of the scanner is displayed.

When the connection is lost while displaying this scanner detail screen, the message "Disconnected"

is displayed beside the IP address. In this case, the value of each item is not updated. Please return

to the list, and select the scanner again.

TIME It is the same as the item TIME in the scanner list screen.

ALLOCATION The number of the allocation that is used in the connection of the scanner is displayed.

RPI (ms) It is a sending and receiving interval of the DI/DO data that the scanner requested to EtherNet/IP

adapter.

Edit Apprv.Design


31/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai

O=>T (Originator => Target) means DI data receive interval (scanner => adapter ).

T=>O (Target => Originator) means DO data send interval (adapter => scanner).

API (ms)

It is a sending and receiving interval of the DI/DO data that the EtherNet/IP Adapter function actually

processed.

O=>T means DI data receive interval, and T=>O means DO data send interval.

RECV It is a number of packets that the adapter function normally received.

The range is from 0 to 65535. The value returns to 0 when it exceeds 65535.

LOST It is a number of packets that were not able to receive by the adapter function.


SEND It is a number of packets that the adapter function normally sent.


F.2.7 EtherNet/IP ADAPTER FUNCTION LOG SCREEN

The log screen shows the log data about EtherNet/IP Adapter function.

Procedure


2 Press soft key [ETHER LOG] to display the Ethernet log screen. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.)

3 Press soft key [EIP ADAPT], and then the information related to the EtherNet/IP Adapter function is displayed.

EtherNet/IP Adapter function log screen

Edit Apprv.Design


32/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai

The latest log information is displayed at the top of the screen. At the right end of a log item, the occurrence date and time of the log item is indicated. Date and time data is indicated in the format “MMM.DD hh:mm:ss”, where MMM represents a month, DD represents a day, hh represents hour, mm represents minute, and ss represents second. To clear the log information, press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [CLEAR].

NOTE The log information of EtherNet/IP Adapter function is stored in volatile memory

and it is lost when the power of CNC is turned off. Check the log information when an error occurs.

The following lists major log message:


E-1107 EtherNet/IP function and FL-net function cannot

be used at the same time

It is specified that the EtherNet/IP function and

the FL-net function are operated with the same

hardware.

Please confirm the value of parameter No.970,

971, and 972.

E-1109 All Connections of EtherNet/IP Adapter are busy Connections of the maximum number have

already been made.

The connection cannot be established exceeding

the maximum number.

E-110A Connect Request from EtherNet/IP Scanner is

refused

The unacceptable connection request was

received from the scanner.

E-110B Connect Request from EtherNet/IP Scanner is

refused (RPI Error)



RPI specified from the scanner is beyond the

limits of value (4-10,000ms) that can be

accepted.

E-110C Connect Request from EtherNet/IP Scanner is

refused (DI/DO Size Error)



The size of DI or DO specified from the scanner

is different from the size specified by the

allocation setting..

Edit Apprv.Design


33/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai


E-110D Connect Request from EtherNet/IP Scanner is

refused (Assembly Instance Error)



The instance of the Assembly object specified

from the scanner is not in the adapter function.

The instance of the Assembly object is created if

the allocation setting is enabled. Please confirm

whether the allocation setting is enabled.

Edit Apprv.Design


34/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai

F.3 RELATING NC PARAMETER

NC parameter related to EtherNet/IP Adapter function is as follows.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 907 100 FUL FIX

NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is

continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit

#0 FIX : In EtherNet/IP Adapter function, the auto-negotiation of Ethernet communication is 0 : valid. (10Mbps/100Mbps and full duplex/half duplex is distinguished automatically.) 1 : invalid. (The setting is specified by the following parameters, #1 FUL and #2 100.)

#1 FUL : In EtherNet/IP Adapter function, the communication of Ethernet is 0 : Half-duplex. 1 : Full-duplex This bit is effective only if #0 FIX is 1.

#2 100 : In EtherNet/IP Adapter function, the transmission rate of Ethernet is 0 : 10Mbps 1 : 100Mbps This bit is effective only if #0 FIX is 1.

0970 Select hardware that operates Ethernet or Data Server function

0971 Select hardware that operates first FL-net function

0972 Select hardware that operates second FL-net function


continued. [Input type] Parameter input

Edit Apprv.Design


35/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai

[Data type] Byte [Valid data range] -1 to 6

Hardware that operates each function is selected.

Value Hardware

-1 Not used

0 Unsetting

1 Multi-function Ethernet

2 (reserved)

3 Fast Ethernet board mounted in slot 1




NOTE 1. EtherNet/IP Adapter function operates with Ethernet function on the same

hardware that is specified by parameter No.970. 2. EtherNet/IP Adapter function cannot be operated on the same hardware as the

FL-net function. Therefore, parameter No.970 and No.971 or No.970 and No.972 cannot be set to the same value.

Edit Apprv.Design


36/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai

F.4 COMMUNICATION CONDITION

F.4.1 RPI AND DATA SIZE

In EtherNet/IP, the cycle of the data transmission is specified by RPI of each connection. The data length per second is calculated by the RPI and data size of each connection. CNC supports maximum four allocation settings. The total of data length per second is obtained by totaling these values.

NOTE Both DI size and DO size are added to the data length per second.

The maximum value of the total of data length per second that EtherNet/IP Adapter function of CNC can operate is about 128,000 bytes. Please adjust the setting of RPI and the data size within this range.

NOTE The above mentioned maximum value of the total of the data length per second is

the value for the condition that other Ethernet function like FOCAS2/Ethernet function or CNC Screen Display Function than EtherNet/IP Adapter function is not used. There is a possibility of influencing to the performance when the FOCAS2/Ethernet function or CNC Screen Display Function is used together with the EtherNet/IP Adapter function.

The actual load can be confirmed by the value of RPI and API displayed on the scanner detail screen. If the value of API is larger than RPI, the processing performance of CNC may be not enough. Please set the value of RPI and size so that the value of API is not regularly larger than RPI.

Total of data length per second (byte) =

( Size of Allocation setting No.1 (DI + DO)) (byte) * ) + 1000

RPI of Allocation setting No.1 (ms)





( Size of Allocation setting No.4 (DI + DO)) (byte) * ) 1000


Edit Apprv.Design


37/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai

Example 1) CNC communicates with a PLC by using Allocation setting No.1 with DI=200 bytes, DO=200 bytes, and RPI=4ms.

Total of data length per second = (200 + 200) * 1000 / 4 = 100,000 (bytes) Example 2) CNC communicates with three PLCs by using Allocation setting No.1 to 3. - PLC 1 : DI=64 bytes, DO=64 bytes, RPI=4ms - PLC 2 : DI = 128 bytes, DO = 128 bytes, RPI=20ms - PLC 3 : DI = 256 bytes, DO = 256 bytes, RPI = 20ms

Total of data length per second

= ((64 + 64) * 1000 / 4) + ((128+128)*1000/20) + ((256+256)*1000/20)) = 70,4000 (bytes)

Adapter

CNC

Allocation setting No.1

Scanner

PLC DO=200 bytes, RPI=4ms

DI=200bytes, RPI=4ms

Adapter

CNC


Scanner

PLC 1 DO=64 bytes, RPI=4ms

DI=64 bytes, RPI=4ms

Allocation setting No.2 PLC 2 DI=128 bytes, RPI=20ms

DO=128 bytes, RPI=20ms



Edit Apprv.Design


38/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai

F.4.2 INPUT/OUTPUT RESPONSE TIME

This section explains the input/output response time seen from the scanner. It is assumed that input/output signal is processed by the ladder program in the scanner. In this case, input/output response time seen from the scanner is estimated by the following expression.

Input/output response time seen from the scanner = Tin1 + Tin2 + Tin3 + Tin-out + Tout1 + Tout2 + Tout3

Scanner output data reading time (Tin1) It is the time from when the ladder program sets the value of output signal until EtherNet/IP scanner function receives the value of the signal in the scanner. Please refer to the manual of the scanner device for details.

Scanner ouput processing time (Tin2) It is the time from when EtherNet/IP scanner function receives the value of the signal until EtherNet/IP Adapter function receives the value from the network. The EtherNet/IP scanner function transmits the signal to the network at intervals of API(RPI). It takes Ethernet transmission time from the scanner to the adapter, but it can be estimated as almost zero. Therefore, the maximum value is API(RPI).

Scanner Ladder program EtherNet/IP

Scanner function

CNC Adapter

EtherNet/IPAdapter function

PMC Data area

Ladder Program

Tin1

Tin2

Tin3Tin-out

Tout1

Tout2

Tout3

Edit Apprv.Design


39/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai

Adapter input data writing time (Tin3) It is the time from when EtherNet/IP Adapter function received the value of signal from the network until adapter function writes the value to PMC data area. CNC copies the received data into the PMC data area immediately. Therefore, it can be estimated to be almost zero.

Adapter ladder program processing time (Tin-out) The ladder program operates in a cycle that is a multiple of 4 ms or 8 ms depending on the size of the ladder program. The actual time can be measured with SCAN TIME on the PMC STAUS screen.

Adapter output data reading time (Tout1) It is the time from when the ladder program sets the value of output signal to the PMC data area until EtherNet/IP Adapter function reads it in CNC. When RPI is smaller than 32ms, this time is the same time as RPI. When RPI is 32ms or more, it is fixed value of 32ms.

Adapter output processing time (Tout2) It is the time from when EtherNet/IP Adapter function reads the value of the signal until EtherNet/IP scanner function receives it. The EtherNet/IP Adapter function transmits the signal to the network at intervals of API(RPI). It takes Ethernet transmission time from the adapter to the scanner, but it can be estimated as almost zero. Therefore, the maximum value is API(RPI).

Scanner input data writing time (Tout3) It is the time from when EtherNet/IP scanner function receives the data from the network until it sends the data to the ladder program. Please refer to the manual of the scanner device for details.

Edit Apprv.Design


40/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai

NOTE 1 In CNC, the time from when the ladder program sets the value to the signal until the

data is sent to the network is estimated in the expression, Tout1 + Tout2. The maximum value is as follows. - When RPI is smaller than 32 ms, RPI * 2 (ms) - When RPI is 32 ms or more, RPI + 32 (ms)

2 When the connection of the Class1 communication has not established it, the value of Tout1 is a fixed value of 32ms. Therefore, when the value is read by the Explicit message when Class1 is not communicated, the value is updated in each 32ms. When the value is written by the Explicit message, data is immediately reflected in the PMC data area.

Edit Apprv.Design


41/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai

F.5 NOTES ON CREATING A LADDER PROGRAM

The following provides notes on creating a ladder program required to construct a safety system in a system that uses EtherNet/IP Adapter function.

CAUTION The time after the power is turned on until communication is actually started may

vary depending on the connected device status and other factors. If it is necessary to strictly determine whether communication starts, use not the time or status, but actual communication data.

Input and output signals

An output signal from the CNC is written by the ladder program into the PMC data area. The reading/writing process of the EtherNet/IP Adapter function reads the signal and sent it to the Ethernet network. An input signal also flows a similar route in the opposite direction.

ラダープログラム処理

PMC

レジスタ（メモリ）

DeviceNetマスタ機能

リフレッシュ処理

ＣＮＣ

Ladder program Process

PMC

PMC

area


Reading/writingProcess

Input signal Output signal

CNC

Scanner

Ethernet

data

Ladder program process and reading/writing process by EtherNet/IP Adapter function

Processing by the ladder program and the reading/writing process by the EtherNet/IP Adapter function operate asynchronously with one another. Processing by the ladder program can operate independently of reading/writing process by the EtherNet/IP Adapter function, so the ladder program can be repeatedly executed at high-speed. The following figure shows a time chart of the internal operation of the CNC with signals output from the ladder program.

Edit Apprv.Design


42/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai

１

１２

２３

３

Reading/writing process of EtherNet/IP : １１２２３３

１１２２３３

２１

Content of data area A: Content of data area B:

３

mth (m+1)th (m+2)th

nth

１，１２，２３，３

Ladder program process

(n+1)th (n+2)th (n+3)th

Transferred to scanner

１１２２３３

２，１

３

２

２

１

１０

０

The upper part of the figure indicates that processing by the ladder program is performed periodically and writing to data area A or data area B in the PMC is performed in the ladder program. The middle part indicates that how data area A and data area B are updated in this case. There are differences in the timing in which data is written to data area A or data area B even in the same execution cycle of the ladder program, so data area A and data area B are not updated at the same time. The lower part indicates that reading/writing process by the EtherNet/IP Adapter function is cyclically made to read data in data area A and data area B. Since data area A and data area B are not updated at the same time, for example, in the case of (n+1)th refreshing, the data written by one execution of the ladder program cannot be read as one set. Conversely, when input signals from a scanner are processed in the ladder program, the data written by one execution of writing may not be read by one execution of the ladder program.

CAUTION Reading/writing process by the EtherNet/IP Adapter function is made

asynchronously with the execution of the ladder program. Therefore, keep the following in mind when creating a ladder program. 1. When a input signal from EtherNet/IP set in the specified PMC address is read

from two points in the ladder program, even if the ladder program can be executed in one cycle, there is no guarantee that the same value can be read.

2. When the ladder program writes an output signal to EtherNet/IP in the specified PMC address, the signal may be transferred to a scanner device before the ladder program is completely executed.

Edit Apprv.Design


43/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai

Concurrency of data

When DI data or DO data is handled with the ladder program, the concurrency of long data (4-byte data) and word data (2-byte data) is guaranteed (there is no data spikes) under the corresponding constraints.

CAUTION If the following constraints are not satisfied, the concurrency of long data or word

data is not guaranteed.

Concurrency of long data (4-byte data) To guarantee the concurrency of data, satisfy the following two conditions. 1. In the ladder program, the following commands are used in units of four bytes.

Commands: MOVD, MOVN, XMOVB, SETND, XCHGD, DSCHB, TBLRD, TBLWD, DSEQD, DSNED, DSGTD, DSLTD, DSGED, DSLED, DMAXD, DMIND, EQD, NED, GTD, LTD, GED, LED, RNGD, COMPB, EOR, AND, OR, NOT, EORD, ANDD, ORD, NOTD, SHLD, SHRD, ROLD, RORD, BSETD, BRSTD, BTSTD, BPOSD, BCNTD, CODB, DCNVB, DECB, TBCDD, FBCDD, ADDB, SUBB, MULB, DIVB, NUMEB, ADDSD, SUBSD, MULSD, DIVSD, MODSD, INCSD, DECSD, ABSSD, NEGSD

2. When DI data or DO data is assigned to PMC data area at the allocation screen of EtherNet/IP Adapter function, the value of item "ADDRESS" and "SIZE" are aligned with 4-byte boundaries. Example) ADDRESS/SIZE = 1:R0000/4, 1:R0004/8, 1:R0008/12, 1:E0000/16

3. By setting Bit 0 of "OPTION" as "1", and Bit 1 as "0" at the allocation screen of EtherNet/IP Adapter function, the data unit of four bytes is specified.

Concurrency of word data (2-byte data) To guarantee the concurrency of data, satisfy the following two conditions. 1. In the ladder program, the following commands are used in units of two bytes.

Commands: MOVW, MOVN, XMOVB, SETNW, XCHGW, DSCHB, TBLRW, TBLWW, DSEQW, DSNEW, DSGTW, DSLTW, DSGEW, DSLEW, DMAXW, DMINW, EQW, NEW, GTW, LTW, GEW, LEW, RNGW, COMPB, EOR, AND, OR, NOT, EORW, ANDW, ORW, NOTW, SHLW, SHRW, ROLW, RORW, BSETW, BRSTW, BTSTW, BPOSW, BCNTW, CODB, DCNVB, DECB, TBCDW, FBCDW, ADDB, SUBB, MULB, DIVB, NUMEB, ADDSW, SUBSW, MULSW, DIVSW, MODSW, INCSW, DECSW, ABSSW, NEGSW

Edit Apprv.Design


44/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai

2. When DI data or DO data is assigned to PMC data area at Allocation screen of EtherNet/IP Adapter function, the value of item "ADDRESS" and "SIZE" are aligned with 2-byte boundaries. Example) ADDRESS/SIZE = 1:R0000/2, 2:R0002/4, 3:R0004/6, 1:E0002/8

3. By setting Bit 0 of "OPTION" as "0", and Bit 1 as "1" at the allocation screen of EtherNet/IP Adapter function, the data unit of two bytes is specified.

Concurrency of byte data (1-byte data) There are no special constraints. The concurrency is always guaranteed in 1-byte data.

Edit Apprv.Design


45/45

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-2

T.Hosaka


N.Mutai

F.6 ATTACHED MATERIAL

F.6.1 SUPPORTED CLASS AND INSTANCE

Supported class and instance are as follows.

Name Class code Instance number

Identity 01h 01h

Message Router 02h 01h

Assembly 04h 64h, 65h, 66h, 67h, 68h, 97h, 98h, 99h, 9Ah, FEh, FFh

Connection Manager 06h 01h

Port F4h 01h

TCP/IP F5h 01h

Ethernet Link F6h 01h

The relation between the number of allocation setting and instance number of Assembly object is as follows.

Output Assembly (T->O) Input Assembly (O->T) Number of

allocation

setting

Exclusive Owner,

Input Only, Listen Only Exclusive Owner Input Only Listen Only

1 65h (101)

Size : 1 to 256 byte

97h (151)


2 66h (102)


98h (152)


3 67h (103)


99h (153)


4 68h (104)


9Ah (154)


FEh (254)

Size : 0 byte

FFh (255)

Size : 0 byte

Number of

allocation

setting

Configuration Assembly

1

2

3

4

64h (100)

Size : 0 byte

Edit Apprv.Design


1/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura

FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -MODEL B FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A

EtherNet/IP Scanner function

N.Mutai

FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i -MODEL B FANUC Power Motion i -MODEL A



Name FANUC Series 30i–MODEL A/B FANUC Series 31i–MODEL A/B FANUC Series 32i–MODEL A/B FANUC Series 35i–MODEL B Fast Ethernet Fast Data Server OPERATOR'S MANUAL




Add,

Correct,

Delete

Applicable

Date

Basic

Function

Optional

Function

EtherNet/IP Scanner function is added as Appendix G. Add Immediately

Unit

Maintenance

parts

Notice

Correction

Another

Edit Apprv.Design


2/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

Index

G EtherNet/IP SCANNER FUNCTION ····················································································································· 3

G.1 OVERVIEW ········································································································································· 3

G.1.1 INTRODUCTION ···································································································· 3

G.1.2 TERMINOLOGY······································································································ 4

G.1.3 CNC OPTION AND EtherNet/IP FUNCTION ······························································ 8

G.1.4 SPECIFICATION OF CNC SCANNER FUNCTION······················································ 8

G.1.5 SETTING PROCEDURE OF SCANNER ····································································10

G.1.6 UNIT OF DATA, CONCURRENCY, ENDIAN ·····························································11

G.2 SETTING AND MAINTENANCE ······································································································· 13

G.2.1 SETTING OF IP ADDRESS······················································································13

G.2.2 SCREEN LAYOUT··································································································14

G.2.3 EtherNet/IP SCANNER SETTING SCREEN ······························································14

G.2.4 BACKING UP AND RESTORING SETTING ······························································31

G.2.5 OUTPUT OF EDS FILE···························································································34

G.2.6 Initialize ················································································································36

G.2.7 EtherNet/IP SCANNER MAINTENANCE SCREEN ····················································37

G.2.8 EtherNet/IP FUNCTIONS LOG SCREEN ··································································43

G.3 RELATING NC PARAMETER ··········································································································· 46

G.4 COMMUNICATION CONDITION······································································································· 49

G.4.1 RPI AND API ·········································································································49

G.4.2 RPI AND DATA SIZE·······························································································51

G.4.3 INPUT/OUTPUT RESPONSE TIME ·········································································54

G.5 NOTES ON CREATING A LADDER PROGRAM·············································································· 57

G.6 EXAMPLE OF CONNECTION ·········································································································· 61

G.6.1 EXAMPLE (1)·········································································································61

G.6.2 EXAMPLE (2)·········································································································65

G.6.3 EXAMPLE (3)·········································································································68

G.7 ATTACHED MATERIAL ···················································································································· 74

G.7.1 SUPPORTED CLASS AND INSTANCE ·····································································74

G.7.2 ERROR CODE OF EtherNet/IP ················································································75

G.7.3 SCANNER SETUP BY EDS FILE ·············································································77

G.7.4 SCANNER SETUP BY OTHER COMPANIES TOOL ···················································82

Edit Apprv.Design


3/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

G EtherNet/IP SCANNER FUNCTION

G.1 OVERVIEW

G.1.1 INTRODUCTION

EtherNet/IP is an industrial Ethernet network. The specification of EtherNet/IP is managed by ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association), and its globalization and standardization are promoted. Therefore, EtherNet/IP has been adopted by many vendors, and it is possible to connect to various kinds of industrial devices. Moreover, EtherNet/IP devices can be used together with general-purpose Ethernet devices because a standard Ethernet technology is used.

NOTE 1 EtherNet/IP Scanner function is available for Series 30i/31i/32i/35i -B and Power

Motion i -A. 2 The Ethernet function (S707) is necessary to use EtherNet/IP Scanner function

(R966).

NOTE This chapter targets the person who has basic knowledge about EtherNet/IP.

Therefore, it doesn't explain a basic matter of EtherNet/IP. For details of EtherNet/IP, please refer to Web site (http://www.odva.org) of

ODVA that manages the specification.

G.1.2 TERMINOLOGY

Direction of DI and DO In this chapter, the signal that CNC (scanner) receives from adapter is DI, and the signal that CNC send to adapter is DO.

CNC (Scanner)

DO

DI Adapter

Connection To exchange the DI/DO data with EtherNet/IP, first the communication path, called "connection", is established. When the connection is established successfully, the DI/DO data can be exchanged. Both EtherNet/IP Scanner function and EtherNet/IP Adapter function support maximum 32 connections.

Adapter and Scanner The equipment that requests the connection to the adapter is the scanner. The equipment that responds to the connection request from the scanner is the adapter. When the adapter returns the positive answer, the connection is established. The scanner sends the communication setting to the adapter by the connection request. CNC supports the scanner function and the adapter function. This chapter explains about scanner function. In the following explanations, "EtherNet/IP functions" means both EtherNet/IP Adapter function and EtherNet/IP Scanner function.

EDS file In EtherNet/IP, the equipment specification is provided by the text file called "EDS file". The information about the communication setting that the adapter can accept, or the communication control of the scanner. The scanner setting tool reads this EDS file to acquire the communication setting. EtherNet/IP functions allow preserving EDS file to the memory card or USB memory by operating the CNC screen.

Implicit message and Explicit message

Edit Apprv.Design

In EtherNet/IP, there are two types of communication, one is to transmit DI/DO data to the device regularly, and another is to send a request to the device and receive a response. The former is called "Implicit message" and the latter is called "Explicit message".


4/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

Edit Apprv.Design


5/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

In Implicit message, DI/DO data is transmitted regularly based on the communication setting notified when the connection is established. There are Class 0 and Class 1 by the difference of the communication procedure. CNC supports Class 1. It uses UDP of Ethernet technology. Both Point-To-Point (unicast) and multicast can be used. The communication type of Explicit message is server/client. The client transmits the request of reading or writing the data to the server. The server returns the value based on the request from the client, and updates own value by the received value. There are Class 2 to Class 6 by the difference of the communication procedure. CNC supports Class 3. It uses TCP of Ethernet technology. Point-To-Point (unicast) only can be used.

Originator and Target At Class 1 communication (Implicit message), first, the connection is established. The scanner sends the connection request, and the adapter responds to this request. Therefore, the scanner is called as an originator of connection, and the adapter is called as a target of connection. EtherNet/IP Scanner function supports Class 1 originator.

Fixed / Variable data size In the communication of EtherNet/IP, fixed/variable data size is specified in the connection request. In case of a fixed size connection, always the specified size of data will be transferred. In case of a variable size connection, the amount of data on each transmission may be a variable size, up to the size specified in the connection. Normally, Implicit message uses fixed size transmission, and Explicit message uses variable size transmission.

Header format In the class 1 communication, there are following four types of transmission data format; 32-bit header format, modeless format, heartbeat format, and zero length data format. EtherNet/IP Scanner function calls each type as Run/Idle, modeless, heartbeat, and zero length. EtherNet/IP Scanner function supports Run/Idle, modeless and heartbeat format.

Type of header Description

Run/Idle 2 byte sequence count and 4 byte header are added to the top of data.

4 byte header contains Run/Idle notification.

Modeless 2 byte sequence count is added to the top of data.

Run/Idle notification cannot be transferred.

Heartbeat This type can be used when data size is zero. Only the 2 byte sequence count is

transferred. Run/Idle notification cannot be transferred.

Zero length This type can be used when data size is variable. The 2 byte sequence count is added to

the top of data. Run/Idle notification is transferred by transmission data size. When data

size is zero means Idle, and data size is one or more means Run.

Edit Apprv.Design


6/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

Client and Server At Class 3 communication (Explicit message), the client sends the request of reading/writing the data from/to the server, and the server returns the requested value and updates own value by received data.

RPI and API In the communication of Class 1, the scanner specifies the interval of the DI/DO data transmission. The interval that the scanner requests is called RPI (Requested Packet Interval). On the other hand, the interval when the DI/DO data is sent and received by an actual communication is called API (Actual Packet Interval).

Type of communication In Class1 communication, there are following four types of communication. EtherNet/IP Scanner function supports Exclusive Owner, Input Only, and Listen Only.

Type of

Communication

Description

Exclusive Owner Both DO data from the scanner to the adapter and DI data from the adapter to the scanner

is transmitted. To prevent the double writing, it is not allowed to write the value to the same

area of adapter from multiple scanners.

Input Only Only the DI data from the adapter to the scanner is exchanged.

Listen Only Only the DI data from the adapter to the scanner is exchanged. It is effective only if other

Exclusive Owner or Input Only connection is established.

Redundant Owner Both DO data from the scanner to the adapter and DI signal from the adapter to the

scanner are exchanged. It differs from Exclusive Owner, Redundant Owner is allowed to

write the value to the same area of adapter from multiple scanners.

Exclusive Owner is used in one-by-one communication. When the adapter notifies DO signal to many scanner devices, Input Only is used. Listen Only is for the special purpose like the monitor and it is not used usually.

Production trigger Production trigger specifies the data transmission timing of adapter. Usually, scanner uses a cyclic trigger, and also can use same trigger of adapter. EtherNet/IP Scanner function supports all of production trigger type of adapter, but EtherNet/IP Scanner function only supports cyclic trigger of scanner.

Type of trigger Description

Cyclic Data is transmitted regularly according to the RPI value.

Change of state Data is transmitted regularly according to the RPI value.

In addition, data is transmitted immediately when the state of the equipment changes.

Application Data is transmitted regularly according to the RPI value.

In addition, it is also possible to transmit data according to the arbitrary timing.

Network composition of I/O transmission Both the adapter and the scanner can have multiple settings. The data area of DI/DO and the transmission interval can be specified separately. It is possible to communicate with a different device at each setting.

Multiple adapters are connected to onescanner

Multiple scanners are connected to oneadapter

Edit Apprv.Design


7/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

Moreover, one DO area of the adapter can be transmitted to multiple scanners. In this case, the multicast is used. If multicasting of DO is performed by all equipments when equipments support both adapter function and scanner function, each equipment can read the signal of other equipments.

ONLINE and OFFLINE There are two states of ONLINE and OFFLINE in EtherNet/IP Scanner function of CNC. If a power supply is switched on, CNC start in the state of ONLINE. CNC communicates according to the preserved setting. Change the state from ONLINE to OFFLINE to change a setup. All executed communications are terminated when the state changes into OFFLINE. When a parameter is changed, CNC becomes POWER MUST BE OFF alarm state. When the changing of setup is completed, turn the CNC power off and back on again. CNC becomes to ONLINE state and the changed setup becomes effective.

Scanner Setting1 Setting2

DO DI DO DI

DI DO DI DO Setting1 Adapter

Scanner Scanner

Adapter

Setting1

DO DI DO DI

DI

Setting1

DO DI DO

Setting1 Setting2 Setting1 Adapter

DO Multicasting by all of equipmentsDO signal of the adapter is transmittedby multicast

Scanner Setting1

DO

DI DI

Scanner Setting1

Setting1 Adapter

No.1 No.2 No.3

Adapter DO

Scanner 1 DI

Scanner 2 DI

Adapter DO

Scanner 1 DI

Scanne

Scanne

r 2 DI

r 1 DI

Scanner 2 DI

Adapter DO

Edit Apprv.Design


8/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

G.1.3 CNC OPTION AND EtherNet/IP FUNCTION

In the option of CNC, EtherNet/IP Adapter function and EtherNet/IP Scanner function are provided. These functions are independent each other, and these can be operated as three types; only adapter function, only scanner function, and adapter + scanner function. When both the adapter function and the scanner function are specified, it operates with the same hardware. The adapter function and the scanner function cannot be operated with different hardware. The function of EtherNet/IP supported by each option is as follows.

CNC option Supported EtherNet/IP function

EtherNet/IP Adapter function - Class 1 target

- Class 3 server that reads and writes DI/DO signal

EtherNet/IP Scanner function - Class 1 originator

The adapter function is required to communicate with scanner equipment such as PLC or etc. The adapter function is required to read or write DI/DO signal of CNC from the external machine by the explicit message of the class 3. The scanner function is required to connect the adapter equipment such as a remote I/O or an image sensor.

G.1.4 SPECIFICATION OF CNC SCANNER FUNCTION

Specification of CNC Item Description

Supported CNC type Series 30i/31i/32i/35i -MODEL B, Power Motion i -MODEL A

Supported hardware Following hardware is supported.

- Multi-function Ethernet

Fast Ethernet circuit mounted on the main board of the LCD-mounted type

Series 30i /31i /32i /35i -B and Power Motion i -A (Connector name: CD38B)

- Fast Ethernet Board

Option board mounted in the optional slot (Connector name: CD38R)

Hardware that operates EtherNet/IP Scanner function and the Ethernet function is

specified by parameter No.970. Please refer to "G.3 RELATING NC PARAMETER"

for details.

Software component The two following software options are necessary to use this function.

- EtherNet/IP Scanner function (R966)

- Ethernet function (S707)

The EtherNet/IP functions operate with the same hardware as the Ethernet function. It

Edit Apprv.Design


9/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

cannot operate with another hardware.

Data Server function (S737) is exclusion to EtherNet/IP functions. EtherNet/IP

functions and Data Server function cannot be specified at the same time.

EtherNet/IP functions and FL-net function (J692) cannot be operated with the same

hardware. If the same hardware is specified, EtherNet/IP functions do not operate.

NOTE When EtherNet/IP functions are used, up to 5 FOCAS2/Ethernet clients can be

connected to one CNC.

Specification of EtherNet/IP Scanner Item Description

Communication type Class 1 originator

Data type of CNC PMC data (R, E and D area)

Maximum number of

communication setting

32

Maximum data size per

allocation setting

256 byte

Maximum number of

connection

32

Range of RPI 4 ms to 10,000 ms (Setting unit : 1ms)

Bridge to DeviceNet Not supported

Redundant Owner Not supported

Fixed/Variable size Fixed size is supported. Variable size is not supported.

Transport type DI (T=>O)

Multicast and unicast (Point-to-Point) are supported. NULL is not supported.

DO (O=>T)

Unicast (Point-to-Point) is supported. Multicast and NULL are not supported.

Header format DI (T=>O)

Run/Idle, modeless, and heartbeat are supported. Zero length is not supported.

DO (O=>T)

Run/Idle, modeless, and heartbeat are supported. Zero length is not supported.

Priority DI (T=>O)

Scheduled, low, high, and urgent are supported.

DO (O=>T)

Edit Apprv.Design


10/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

Scheduled is supported. Low, high, and urgent are not supported.

Production trigger DI (T=>O)

Cyclic, change of state, and application are supported.

DO (O=>T)

Cyclic is supported. Change of state and application are not supported.

Specification of communication Item Description

IP address Specified by either of the following methods.

- Enters a fixed value from the CNC screen.

- Acquires from DHCP server.

(It is also possible to use the same IP address after that when acquiring it from the

DHCP server once.)

Port number Class 1 : 2222 (Fixed)

Class 3 : 44818 (Fixed)

Ethernet interface Following settings are supported.

- 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX

- Half duplex or Full duplex

- Auto Negotiation or Fixed

Please refer to "G.3 RELATING NC PARAMETER" for details.

G.1.5 SETTING PROCEDURE OF SCANNER

Maximum 32 communication settings can be specified in the scanner. One communication setting creates one connection. The scanner can be set by the following two methods.

1. Setup on the CNC screen. 2. Use other company's scanner setting tool such as "RSNetWorx for EtherNet/IP" of Rockwell Automation,

etc. See "G.7.4 SCANNER SETUP BY OTHER COMPANIES TOOL" about details of the method of setting the scanner by using RSNetWorx for EtherNet/IP. The flow of the operation to setup on the screen of CNC is as follows.

Operation Description

1 If the state is ONLINE,

change to OFFLINE.

If the state is ONLINE, CNC is communicating by the preserved setting, and the

setting cannot be changed. Change the state from ONLINE to OFFLINE to change

a setting. All communications are terminated when the state changes into

OFFLINE.

Edit Apprv.Design


11/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

2 Select the

communication setting

Select the communication setting for changing value from 32 communication

settings.

3 If the communication

state is "ENABLE",

change to "DISABLE".

The setting which the communication state is "ENABLE" is effective to

communicate, and the "DISABLE" setting is not effective to communicate.

Change the communication state to "DISABLE" to change values.

4 Change value by the

simple screen.

In the simple screen, set the item for which the setting is necessary.

5 Change value by the

detail screen if

necessary.

In the detail screen, more detailed setting can be done. In many cases, CNC can

communicate equipments by only the simple screen setting.

6 Change the

communication state to

"ENABLE".

When the setup is completed, change the communication state to "ENABLE".

CNC confirm settings when the communication state changes into "ENABLE".

7 Repeat from 2 to 7

operations if necessary.

To change plural settings, operate these repeatedly.

8 Turn the CNC power off

and on.

CNC becomes to ONLINE state and CNC start to communicating with new

settings.

G.1.6 UNIT OF DATA, CONCURRENCY, ENDIAN

Unit of the data and concurrency The unit of the I/O data exchanged with the scanner can be selected from byte (1 byte), word (2 byte), and long (4 byte). The unit of data, the restriction of the PMC address, and the restriction of the size are as follows.

Unit of data Restriction of PMC address Restriction of size

Byte (1 byte) N.A. N.A.

Word (2 byte) Aligned with 2-byte boundaries

(Even address only)


(Even size only)

Long (4 byte) Aligned with 4-byte boundaries




The concurrency of the data is secured by the specified unit. Please refer to "G.2.3.2 Simple screen" for the setting method.

Conversion of endian Whether the conversion of endian is executed or not can be specified. When the endian is not converted, the data is treated as a little endian. When endian is converted, the data is treated as a big endian. Please refer to "G.2.3.2 Simple screen" for the setting method. - Unit of data is Word (2 byte) and the endian is not converted.


+00 12h 34h56h 78h+01

0 15 7 0

78h

34h

56h

12h+00

+01

+02

+03

- Unit of data is Word (2 byte) and the endian is converted.


+00 12h 34h56h 78h+01

0 15 7 0

56h

12h

78h

34h+00

+01

+02

+03

- Unit of data is Long (4 byte) and the endian is not converted.


+00

Edit Apprv.Design


12/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

- Unit of data is Long (4 byte) and the endian is converted.

12h 34h 56h 78h0 31

7 0

78h

34h12h

56h+00

+01

+02

+03

PMC area7 0

56h

12h

78h

34h+00

+01

+02

+03

Ethernet line

+00 12h 34h 56h 78h0 31

Edit Apprv.Design


13/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

G.2 SETTING AND MAINTENANCE

This section explains the setting and the maintenance of EtherNet/IP Scanner function. To communicate with devices by EtherNet/IP, first set IP address, then specify the setting of EtherNet/IP Scanner function.

G.2.1 SETTING OF IP ADDRESS

There are two methods of setting IP address. 1. Inputs a fixed value from the CNC screen. 2. Acquires a value from DHCP server Please select the setting method according to the operation of the network.

Inputs a fixed value from the CNC screen. Please input the value to IP address, subnet mask and router IP address referring to the section "COMMON screen (BASIC)" in "III. SETTING 3.1 OPERATING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet SETTING SCREEN" of this manual. When the FOCAS2 function is not used, the input to the items PORT NUMBER (TCP), PORT NUMBER (UDP) and TIME INTERVAL are unnecessary.

Acquires a value from DHCP server Please input the value to the necessary items referring to "III. SETTING 4.SETTING THE DNS/DHCP FUNCTION" of this manual. When IP address is acquired from the DHCP server, there are two kinds of operation procedures. 1. Every time when the power supply is turned on, the setting is acquired from the DHCP server. 2. When the setting is acquired from the DHCP server, the setting is preserved in the nonvolatile memory.

When the power supply is turned on next time and after that time, the preserved setting is used, and the setting is not acquired from the DHCP server any longer.

Please refer to item "Basic screen" of "G.2.3.1 Basic screen, List screen" for details.

G.2.2 SCREEN LAYOUT

The kind of the hardware that is used by EtherNet/IP Scanner function is shown on the title bar of each screen.

Title Description

[MULTI-FUNC ETHER] Fast Ethernet circuit mounted on the main board of the LCD-mounted type

Series 30i/31i/32i/35i -B and Power Motion i -A





G.2.3 EtherNet/IP SCANNER SETTING SCREEN

This section explains setting screens for the operation of EtherNet/IP Scanner function. Setting screens consists of the following screens.

Consist of setting screens of EtherNet/IP Scanner function

Basic screen 1/2

List screen 2/2 Simple screen 1/2, 2/2 Detail screen 1/4 - 4/4

Edit Apprv.Design


14/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

In the basic screen, basic settings of EtherNet/IP Scanner function can be set. The list screen shows communication setting list, and it is possible to move to the simple screen by selecting the communication setting to which the value should be changed. In the simple screen, settings to communicate with adapter equipment can be set. In the detail screen, detail settings can be set, if necessary.

NOTE 1 Before changing a parameter on the EtherNet/IP Scanner setting screen, set the

MDI mode or emergency stop state. 2 If the Change protection level of the Ethernet function is higher than the Operation

level in 8-level data protection function, it is not possible to change the settings.

G.2.3.1 Basic screen, List screen

Procedure


2 Soft key [ETHERNET] appears. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.) 3 Press soft key [ETHERNET] to display Ethernet Setting screen. 4 Press soft key [EIP S SET]. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.)

5 Basic screen on the 1st page is displayed. Press Page key to switch the page, and then enter

the parameters.

Edit Apprv.Design


15/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

Basic screen

1st page is basic screen. A common setting in EtherNet/IP Scanner function is done.

EtherNet/IP Scanner setting screen (Basic)

Operation Press soft key [(OPRT)] as needed and then use the following soft keys.

[(OPRT)] : [OFFLINE] : [DI DATA] :


NETWORK

Initial value : ONLINE

There are two states of ONLINE and OFFLINE.

ONLINE : CNC is communicating by the preserved setting, and settings cannot be

changed.

OFFLINE : All communications of EtherNet/IP Scanner function are terminated.

Settings can be changed.

If a power supply is switched on, CNC will start with ONLINE. Change the NETWORK from

ONLINE to OFFLINE by screen operation to change a setup. Turn the CNC power off and

back on again to change the NETWORK from OFFLINE to ONLINE.

Edit Apprv.Design


16/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

Edit Apprv.Design


17/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

Soft key is used for setting. Press soft key [(OPRT)], [OFFLINE], and then select

[EXECUTE].

DI DATA ON

ABNORMAL

Initial value : HOLD

Specify the operation when the update of DI area stops.

HOLD : DI area is held when DI area isn't updated by communication error of adapter.

(Nothing is done).

CLEAR : DI area is cleared to be zero when DI area isn't updated by communication

error of adapter.

Soft key is used to change the setting. Press soft key [(OPRT)], [DI DATA], and then select

[HOLD] or [CLEAR].

STATUS ADDRESS

Initial value : ---

Specify the top address in the R/E/D area of PMC where the status of EtherNet/IP Scanner

function is stored. Please refer to the "STATUS", described later, for details of status.

When status is not used, set " " (blank). "---" is displayed in STATUS ADDRESS and "0" is

displayed in STATUS SIZE.

The setting range depends on an effective PMC area. It depends on the value of STATUS

SIZE too.

STATUS SIZE

Initial value : 0

Range of value:

0,1,4,7,10,13

Specify the size of PMC area where status is stored. The content of status that is output to

PMC area is limited according to this size.

When status is not used, set "0". "---" is displayed in STATUS ADDRESS and "0" is

displayed in STATUS SIZE.

OPTION 1

Initial value : 00000000

Bit 0-1 : These bits specify the operation when IP address, subnet mask, router IP address,

DNS IP address 1 and 2 and domain are acquired from DHCP server by using DHCP

client function (No.904#6).

Bit 0 : Parameters acquired by DHCP client function are

0 : not saved in nonvolatile memory (SRAM).

1 : saved in nonvolatile memory. When succeeding in saving, Bit 1 is automatically

set to 1.

Bit 1 : DHCP client function is

0 : enabled.

1 : disabled. (It is not possible to set this bit manually.)

Bit 2 : When both the scanner function and the adapter function are available, specify the

contents of output to the EDS file.

0 : Output the EDS file for the scanner function when outputting it from the scanner

function setting screen.

Output the EDS file for the adapter function when outputting it from the adapter

function setting screen.

1 : Output the EDS file which include the contents for both the adapter and the scanner

function regardless of the output screen.


Bit 7 : EtherNet/IP functions are

0 : enabled.

1 : disabled.

When disabled, the communication is not done. And in the scanner maintenance

screen, the indicators of MS and NS turn off, and the value zero is displayed in all

items from VENDOR ID to SERIAL NO.

OPTION 2

Initial value : 00000000

Bit 0 : When the power supply is turned on next time, initialization of the setting of

EtherNet/IP scanner is

0 : not executed.

1 : executed.


CAUTION 1 The D area in the PMC area is allocated to nonvolatile memory. In addition, the E

area in the PMC area is normally allocated to volatile memory. However, it can also be used as nonvolatile memory by setting the option. When the area is set as nonvolatile memory, the contents of the area are retained even after the power is turned off. So, special attention should be paid not to cause an unpredictable operation when the power is turned on next time.


Edit Apprv.Design


18/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

Edit Apprv.Design


19/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

NOTE 1 When a parameter except the "NETWORK" is changed, CNC becomes POWER

MUST BE OFF alarm state. For the changed parameters to take effect, turn the CNC power off and back on again.

2 When the "NETWORK" is changed to OFFLINE, setting can be changed from other setting screens.

3 The following items are shared with EtherNet/IP adapter and scanner functions. When both the scanner function and adapter function are available, the changed content is reflected to the other. - DI DATA ON ABNORMAL - OPTION 1

4 The communication of the scanner function stops when "NETWORK" is changed to OFFLINE. When both the scanner function and the adapter function are available, The communication of the adapter function doesn't stop when "NETWORK" is changed to OFFLINE.



PORT NUMBER (TCP) The standard port number for EtherNet/IP TCP (44818) is displayed.

PORT NUMBER (UDP) The standard port number for EtherNet/IP UDP (2222) is displayed.

Status The status is a data detected by EtherNet/IP Scanner function. The 1st byte is status of the entire EtherNet/IP Scanner function. The 2nd byte or later are the status of each communication. It uses 3 bytes for every 8 communication settings. Output amounts of the communication settings to PMC area are specified by the status size.

Status size Description

0 Status is not output.

1 The status of entire EtherNet/IP Scanner function is outputted.

4, 7, 10, 13 The status of entire EtherNet/IP Scanner function and the status of 8, 16, 24, or 32

Edit Apprv.Design


20/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

communication settings are outputted.

Status

+0 OPE - - - - - - ERR +1 ENA08 ENA07 ENA06 ENA05 ENA04 ENA03 ENA02 ENA01+2 CON08 CON07 CON06 CON05 CON04 CON03 CON02 CON01+3 IN08 IN07 IN06 IN05 IN04 IN03 IN02 IN01 +4 ENA16 ENA15 ENA14 ENA13 ENA12 ENA11 ENA10 ENA09- - - - - - +9 IN24 IN23 IN22 IN21 IN20 IN19 IN18 IN17

+10 ENA32 ENA31 ENA30 ENA29 ENA28 ENA27 ENA26 ENA25+11 CON32 CON31 CON30 CON29 CON28 CON27 CON26 CON25

Status address

+12 IN32 IN31 IN30 IN29 IN28 IN27 IN26 IN25

The figures of two digits of the end of signal name shows the number of the communication setting, and it is shown as xx in the following tables.

Signal Name Description

ERR Error (MS : recoverable fault or unrecoverable fault)

OPE Operating correctly (MS : device operational)

ENAxx The state specified by communication setting xx is "ENABLE".

CONxx Connecting with equipment specified by communication setting xx.

INxx Connecting with equipment specified by communication setting xx, and DI area is updated by received

data.

List screen

2nd page is list screen. When the cursor is moved and the communication setting is selected, the outline of the setting is displayed. The STATE can be changed to "ENABLE" or "DISABLE". And it is possible to move to a simple screen.

EtherNet/IP Scanner setting screen (List)

Operation Press soft key [(OPRT)] as needed and then use the following soft keys.

[(OPRT)] : [STATE] :

Select a setting and press soft key [(OPRT)], [SIMPLE SET], then it is possible to move to a simple screen.


STATE

Initial value : "DISABLE"

There are "ENABLE", "DISABLE", and "ERROR" state.

ENABLE : This setting is enabled. CNC is communicating by the preserved setting.

This setting cannot be changed.

DISABLE, ERROR : This setting is disabled and the communication is not executed.

This setting can be changed.

In this screen, STATE can be changed to "ENABLE" or "DISABLE". When the item STATE

is changed to "ENABLE", the setting is confirmed. If there is not a problem, item STATE

Edit Apprv.Design


21/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

keeps "ENABLE". If there is a problem, item STATE change to "ERROR".

Soft key is used for setting. Press soft key [(OPRT)], [STATE], and then select [ENABLE]

or [DISABLE].


LIST

Displays the state of each communication setting. This value corresponds to the "STATE"

in setting item.

O : Enable

- : Disable

E : Error

SETTING NO. Number of the communication setting specified with the cursor.

IP ADDRESS IP address of the communication setting specified with the cursor.

ADDRESS, SIZE, RPI Address, size, and RPI of the communication setting specified with the cursor.

Each of DI (T=>O) and DO (O=>T) value is displayed.

DI+DO DATA_LEN/SEC

Data length per second, which communicates with an adapter of the communication setting

specified with the cursor.

Both DI and DO length are counted. Setting unit is [byte / second]. If STATE is not

"ENABLE", this value is 0.

DI+DO DATA_LEN/SEC

(TOTAL)

Total values of "DI+DO DATA_LEN/SEC" of all communication settings.

Setting unit is [byte / second].

G.2.3.2 Simple screen

Procedure 1 On the list screen, move the cursor to select the communication setting. 2 Press soft key [(OPRT)], and then [SIMPLE]. The simple screen is displayed.


4 Input values to all setting items. 5 If necessary, move to detail screen to input values to detailed items. 6 To return to the list screen, press soft key [LIST].

Edit Apprv.Design


22/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

NOTE If the "NETWORK" is ONLINE or the "STATE" is ENABLE, settings can be

displayed but setting cannot be changed. To change settings, change the "NETWORK" to OFFLINE and change the "STATE" to DISABLE.

Simple screen

Settings to communicate with adapter equipment can be set. 1st page is a setting for the target that is the communication destination, and 2nd page is a setting for CNC that is the originator.

EtherNet/IP Scanner setting screen (Simple 1/2, 2/2)

Operation In the 2nd page, press soft key [DATA UNIT] or [ENDIAN CHANGE] as needed, then press the following soft key.

[DATA UNIT] : [ENDIAN CHANGE] :

To return to the list screen, press soft key [SET LIST]. To move to the detail screen, press soft key [DETAIL SET].

Edit Apprv.Design


23/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

Edit Apprv.Design


24/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai


IP ADDRESS

Initial value : blank (SP)

Specify the IP address or the hostname of the adapter equipment of the communication

destination.

To use a hostname, the DNS client function (No.904#5) is required.

ASSEMBLY INSTANCE

Initial value : 0

Range of value:

0 to 65536

or blank (SP)

Specify the input assembly number, output assembly number, and configuration

assembly number of the adapter equipment assembly class.

When number is not used, set " " (blank).

In "T=>O" or "O=>T", T means target (adapter) and O means originator (scanner)

SIZE

Initial value : 0

Range of value: 0 to 256

Specify the size (byte) of the area where input/output data is stored.

RPI

Initial value : 32

Range of value: 4 to 10000

Specify the interval of sending data (packet) in EtherNet/IP.

T=>O means sending interval of Target (adapter).

O=>T means sending interval of Originator (scanner).

Setting unit is 1ms.

DATA UNIT

Initial value : 1 byte

Select the data unit from 1, 2, or 4 byte.

Soft key is used for setting. Press soft key [(OPRT)], [DATA UNIT], and then select from

[1-BYTE], [2-BYTE], or [4-BYTE].

ENDIAN

Initial value : DISABLE

Specify whether to convert endian.

DISABLE : Endian is not converted.

ENABLE : Endian is converted.

Soft key is used for setting. Press soft key [(OPRT)], [ENDIAN CHANGE], and then

select from [ENABLE] or [DISABLE].

TYPE

Initial value : 0

Range of value: 0 or 1

Specify the type of area where DI/DO data is stored.

00 : UNUSED DI/DO data is not stored. If input/output data size is 0, set this value.

01 : PMC DI/DO data is stored to PMC area.

ADDRESS

Initial value : ---

Specify the address of the area where DI/DO data is stored.

When the item TYPE is "00:UNUSED ", the value cannot be set.

When the item TYPE is "01:PMC ", the start address of PMC area, R/D/E, can be set.

The setting range depends on the actual range of R area, E area, and D area of PMC. It

is necessary to set the area specified by ADDRESS and SIZE within the range of PMC

area.

CAUTION 1 The D area in the PMC area is allocated to nonvolatile memory. In addition, the E

area in the PMC area is normally allocated to volatile memory. However, it can also be used as nonvolatile memory by setting the option. When the area is set as nonvolatile memory, the contents of the area are retained even after the power is turned off. So, special attention should be paid not to cause an unpredictable operation when the power is turned on next time.


NOTE For a multi-path PMC, enter a PMC address as follows:

<Path number>:<PMC address> For R0500 for the second PMC path, for example, enter "2:R500". When only a PMC address (R500) is entered, it is assumed to be the PMC address for the first path (1:R0500). If the ":" key is not provided, the "/" or "EOB" key can be used instead.

G.2.3.3 Detail screen

Procedure 1 On the simple screen, press soft key [DETAIL]. The detail screen is displayed.


3 Input values to setting items. 4 To return to the list screen, press soft key [LIST].

NOTE If the "NETWORK" is ONLINE or the "STATE" is ENABLE, settings can be

displayed but setting cannot be changed. To change settings, change the "NETWORK" to OFFLINE and change the "STATE" to DISABLE.

Detail screen

Detail settings to communicate with adapter equipment can be set. 1st page is a setting of data transfer for Target to Originator, and 2nd page is a setting of data transfer for Originator to Target.

Edit Apprv.Design


25/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

EtherNet/IP Scanner setting screen (Detail 1/4, 2/4)

Operation Press soft key [TRANSPORT], [HEADER FORMAT], or [PRIORITY] as needed, then press the following soft key.

[TRANSPORT] :

[HEADER FORMAT] :

[PRIORITY] :

Edit Apprv.Design


26/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

3rd page is a setting of electronic key, and 4th page is a setting of whole communication.

EtherNet/IP Scanner setting screen (Detail 3/4, 3/4)

Operation Press soft key [COMPATIBILITY], [TIME OUT], or [PRODUCT TRIGER] as needed, then press the following soft key.

[COMPATIBILITY] :

[TIME OUT] :

[PRODUCT TRIGER] :

To return to the simple screen, press soft key [SIMPLE SET].

Edit Apprv.Design


27/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

Edit Apprv.Design


28/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai


TRANSPORT TYPE

Initial value : UNICAST

Specify the data transport type between Target (adapter) and Originator (scanner), "1 to

multiple" or "1 to 1".

MULTICAST : 1 to multiple

UNICAST : 1 to 1 ("Point-to-Point")

Only the T=>O transport type can be specified. The O=>T transport type is fixed as

"UNICAST".

Soft key is used for setting. Press soft key [TRANSPORT TYPE], and then select from

[MULTICAST] or [UNICAST].

HEADER FORMAT

Initial value :

T => O : MODELESS

O => T : HEARTBEAT

Specify the header format used by data transport.

RUN/IDLE : Use 32 bit Run/Idle flag

MODELESS : Don't use Run/Idle flag, and header size is more than 1.

HEARTBEAT : Don't use Run/Idle flag, and header size is 0.

If header format for "O=>T" has not been changed from initial value, this is changed

automatically by the SIZE value. It is changed to "RUN/IDLE" if SIZE value is 1 or more,

and is changed to "HEARTBEAT" if SIZE value is 0.

When the value is specified from the screen, the specified value is used after that.

Soft key is used for setting. Press soft key [HEADER FORMAT], and then select from

[RUN/IDLE], [MODELESS], or [HEARTBEAT].

This setting is specified according to the adapter equipment, and the following

combinations are frequently used

Exclusive Owner

T => O: MODELESS

O => T: RUN/IDLE

Input Only or Listen Only

T => O: MODELESS

O => T: HEARTBEAT

PRIORITY

Initial value: SCHEDULED

Specify the priority of the data transmission of EtherNet/IP.

LOW: Data is transmitted by low priority.

HIGH: Data is transmitted by high priority.

SCHEDULED: Data is transmitted regularly according to the specified RPI value.

URGENT: Data is transmitted by urgent priority.

Only the T=>O priority of the data transmission can be specified. The O=>T priority is

fixed as "SCHEDULED".

Soft key is used for setting. Press soft key [PRIORITY], and then select from [LOW],

Edit Apprv.Design


29/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

[HIGH], [SCHEDULE], or [URGENT].

ELECTRONIC KEY

If it is necessary to specify the adapter equipment to avoid communicating with the

adapter equipment not intended, input values to the following items from "VENDOR ID" to

"COMPATIBILITY".

If it is not necessary to specify the adapter equipment, keep them to initialized value.

The adapter equipment verifies the ELECTRONIC KEY that received from scanner

equipment in the connection request and the own adapter information. If there is

difference, the connection request is refused.

VENDOR ID

Initial value : 0000H

Range of value:

0000H to FFFFH

Specify the vendor ID of adapter equipment.

Specify "0" if verification is not necessary.

DEVICE TYPE


Range of value:

0000H to FFFFH

Specify the device type of adapter equipment.


PRODUCT CODE


Range of value:

0000H to FFFFH

Specify the product code of adapter equipment.


REVISION

Initial value : 0.000

Range of value :

0.0 to 127.255

Specify the revision of adapter equipment.

Format is the following.

<Major number>.<Minor number>

Specify "0.0" if verification is not necessary.

COMPATIBILITY

Initial value : DISABLE

Specify the presence of the compatibility of the specified Electronic key information

verification.

DISABLE (All of electronic key item has not been changed from initial value.):

Electronic key information is not sent to the adapter equipment. Therefore, it is

not verified.

DISABLE (Some of electronic key item had been changed.):

Electronic key information is sent to the adapter equipment, and is verified

without compatibility. It is possible to connect only when the value of all items

agree with the adapter equipment.

ENABLE:

Electronic key information is sent to the adapter equipment, and is verified with

compatibility. It is possible to connect if the adapter equipment judges it is

compatible even if information of the electronic key is different.

Edit Apprv.Design


30/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

It is necessary to set a correct value to "VENDOR ID", "PRODUCT CODE", and

Major number of "REVISION".

Soft key is used for setting. Press soft key [COMPATIBILITY], and then select from

[ENABLE] or [DISABLE].

TIMEOUT MULTIPLIER

Initial value : x4

Range of value :

x4 to x512

Specify the multiplier used to calculate of the timeout value for the sending/receiving of

the DI/DO data.

Timeout value = RPI value of DI (T=>O) * TIMEOUT MULTIPLIER

When the timeout multiplier is [x4] and RPI is 10ms, if 40 ms pass from the last data

reception and the following data is not received yet, it is judged to be a timeout.

Soft key is used for setting. Press soft key [TIMEOUT], and then select from [x4] to [x512].

RECONNECT

Initial value : 0

Range of value :

0 to 60, blank

Specify the time until reconnection is demanded when the connection is closed by some

reasons. Setting unit is 1 second.

It is reconnected after waiting the time specified again when failing in reconnection.

---:

Reconnection is disabled. To specify this input " " (blank).

0 to 60:

Demand reconnection when the specified time passes.

Initial value 0 means 10 seconds.

PRODUCTION TRIGGER

Initial value: CYCLIC

Specify the timing that the adapter equipment transmits data.

CYCLIC:

Data is transmitted regularly according to the specified RPI value.

CHANGE STATE:


In addition, adapter equipment transmits data when state of the equipment

changes.

APPLICATION:


In addition, adapter equipment can transmit data according to the arbitrary

timing.

The timing that the scanner equipment transmits data is fixed as "CYCLIC".

Soft key is used for setting. Press soft key [PRODUCT TRIGGER], and then select from

[CYCLIC], [CHANGE STATE], and [APPLICATION].

OPTION1

Initial value: 00000000

Bit 0-7:

Reserved (Must be zero)

OPTION2

Initial value: 00000000

Bit 0-7:

Reserved (Must be zero)

G.2.4 BACKING UP AND RESTORING SETTING

This section explains how to back up or restore the setting of EtherNet/IP Scanner function. The setting can be preserved in the memory card or USB memory. When backing up and restoring the setting of EtherNet/IP Scanner function, the communication parameters of the Ethernet function is backed up and restored too.

Procedure


2 Soft key [ETHERNET] appears. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.) 3 Press soft key [ETHERNET] to display Ethernet Setting screen. 4 Press soft key [EIP S SET] to display EtherNet/IP Scanner screen. (When soft key does not appear, press

the continue key.) 5 Press soft key [(OPRT)], and then [+]. The soft keys [BACKUP], [RESTORE], [ALL BACKUP], and

[ALL RESTORE] for backing up or restoring settings appear. 6 Press the soft key [BACKUP], [RESTORE], [ALL BACKUP], or [ALL RESTORE]. The soft keys

[EXECUTE] and [CANCEL] appear. 7 Enter the name of a file to be backed up or restored in the key-in buffer, and press the soft key

[EXECUTE]. The operation selected at the above step is executed. The character string "EXECUTING" blinks during execution.

Edit Apprv.Design


31/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

BACKUP The communication parameters for EtherNet/IP Scanner function and Fast Ethernet function are saved from the SRAM of the CNC main unit to the memory card or the USB memory. If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, the specified file name is used. If no file name is specified, the file name "EIPSCANR.MEM" is used.

RESTORE The communication parameters for EtherNet/IP Scanner function and Fast Ethernet function are read from the memory card or the USB memory and saved to the SRAM of the CNC main unit. If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, the specified file name is used. If no file name is specified, the file name "EIPSCANR.MEM" is used.

ALL BACKUP All valid communication parameters for embedded Ethernet, Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server, PROFIBUS-DP master/slave, DeviceNet master/slave, FL-net, CC-Link remote device, EtherNet/IP Scanner/Adapter are saved from the SRAM of the CNC main unit to the memory card or the USB memory. If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, the specified file name is used. If no file name is specified, the file name "NETWORK.MEM" is used.

Edit Apprv.Design


32/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

ALL RESTORE All valid communication parameters for embedded Ethernet, Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server, PROFIBUS-DP master/slave, DeviceNet master/slave, FL-net, CC-Link remote device and EtherNet/IP Scanner/Adapter are read from the memory card or the USB memory and saved to the SRAM of the CNC main unit. However, if a communication function related to a valid communication parameter is disabled in the CNC, that parameter is not saved to the SRAM. If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, the specified file name is used. If no file name is specified, the file name "NETWORK.MEM" is used.





requires power-off. 3 When the output level of 8-level data protection of Ethernet function is higher than

that of the operation level, all backup/backup cannot be done, and warning message "PROTECTED" is displayed. (When other communication features exist, all backup is possible. )

4 When the change level of 8-level data protection of Ethernet function is higher than the operation level, restore/all restore cannot be done, and warning message "PROTECTED" is displayed. (When other communication features exist, all restore is possible. )



[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 4: Selects the memory card as the input/output device. 17: Selects the USB memory as the input/output device.


Edit Apprv.Design


33/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

G.2.5 OUTPUT OF EDS FILE

This chapter explains the method of outputting the EDS file to the memory card or the USB memory. When both the scanner function and the adapter function are available, the contents of output to the EDS file can be specified by the OPTION 1 Bit 2 in the basic screen.

OPTION 1 Bit 2 value

in the basic screen The contents of output to the EDS file

0

Output the EDS file for the scanner function when outputting it from the scanner function

setting screen. Output the EDS file for the adapter function when outputting it from the

adapter function setting screen.

Standard EDS file name for the scanner function is "FSCNC101.EDS", and standard file

name for the adapter function is "F_CNC101.EDS".

1 Output the EDS file which include the contents for both the adapter and the scanner

function regardless of the output screen. Standard EDS file name is "FWCNC101.EDS".

Procedure


2 Soft key [ETHERNET] appears. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.) 3 Press soft key [ETHERNET] to display Ethernet Setting screen. 4 Press soft key [EIP S SET] to display EtherNet/IP Scanner screen. (When soft key does not appear, press

the continue key.) 5 Press soft key [(OPRT)], and then [+]. The soft key [EDS OUTPUT] appears. 6 Press the soft key [EDS OUTPUT]. The soft keys [EXECUTE] and [CANCEL] appear. 7 Enter the file name of EDS file in the key-in buffer, and press the soft key [EXECUTE] to output EDS file.

If the file name is not specified, the standard file name is used. The character string "EXECUTING" blinks during execution.

Edit Apprv.Design


34/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai



NOTE 1 Output of EDS file can only be performed in the MDI mode or EDIT mode. 2 When the 8-level data protection function is enabled, whether output of EDS file is

allowed or not depends on the setting of that function.



[Input type] Setting input [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 4: Selects the memory card as the input/output device. 17: Selects the USB memory as the input/output device.


Edit Apprv.Design


35/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

G.2.6 Initialize

In the list screen, the communication setting specified with the cursor can be initialized

Procedure


2 Soft key [ETHERNET] appears. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.) 3 Press soft key [ETHERNET] to display Ethernet Setting screen. 4 Press soft key [EIP S SET]. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.)

5 Press page key to display 2nd page, list screen.

6 Press soft key [(OPRT)], press soft key [+] twice, then the soft key [INITIALIZE] for initialize appears. 7 Move the cursor to select the communication setting to be initialized. 8 Press soft key [INITIALIZE], soft key [EXECUTE] and [CANCEL] are displayed. 9 Press soft key [EXECUTE] then selected communication setting is initialized.

Edit Apprv.Design


36/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

G.2.7 EtherNet/IP SCANNER MAINTENANCE SCREEN

This section explains maintenance screens for EtherNet/IP Scanner function. Maintenance screens consist of the following screens.

Consist of maintenance screens of EtherNet/IP Scanner function In the scanner information screen, the scanner information can be confirmed. The maintenance list screen shows information list of connected adapter, and it is possible to move to detail information screen from this screen. The adapter information acquisition screen can acquire the adapter information specified by IP address and can show them.

Scanner information 1/3

Maintenance information list 2/3 Detail information

Adapter information acquisition 3/3

G.2.7.1 Scanner information screen, Maintenance information list screen, Adapter information acquisition screen

Procedure


2 Soft key [ETHERNET] appears. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.) 3 Press soft key [ETHERNET] to display Ethernet Setting screen. 4 Press soft key [EIP S MAINTE]. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.)

5 The scanner information screen on the 1st page is displayed. Press Page key to switch the

page.

Edit Apprv.Design


37/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

Scanner information screen

1st page is the scanner information screen. The information about the scanner function of CNC such as MS or NS LED display, Vendor ID, Device Type, and so on can be confirmed in this screen.

EtherNet/IP Scanner maintenance screen (Scanner information)


MS LED display of Module Status and its meaning are displayed.

NS LED display of Network Status and its meaning are displayed.

VENDOR ID Vendor ID of the scanner is displayed in hex.

DEVICE TYPE Device type of the scanner is displayed in hex.

PRODUCT CODE Product code of the scanner is displayed in hex.

REVISION Revision of the scanner is displayed. The format is "Major revision.Minor revision".

SERIAL NO. Serial number of the scanner is displayed in hex.

The LED display of MS and its meaning are as follows.

LED display of MS Meaning

Steady Off DISABLE FUNCTION

Flashing Green STANDBY

Steady Green DEVICE OPERATIONAL

Flashing Red RECOVERABLE FAULT

Steady Red UNRECOVERABLE FAULT

Edit Apprv.Design


38/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

The LED display of NS and its meaning is as follows.

LED display of NS Meaning

Steady Off (MS is steady off too) ---

Steady Off NO IP ADDRESS

Flashing Green NO CONNECTIONS

Steady Green CONNECTED

Flashing Red CONNECTION TIMEOUT

Steady Red DUPLICATE IP ADDRESS

Maintenance information list screen

Page 2 is a maintenance information list screen. Each communication setting state is displayed.

EtherNet/IP Scanner maintenance screen (Maintenance information list)

Operation When the cursor is moved and the communication setting is selected, the outline of the setting is displayed. Press soft key [DETAIL], it is possible to move to the detail information screen about selected communication setting. Press soft key [GET INFO], it is possible to move to the adapter information acquisition screen and can acquire the adapter information.

Edit Apprv.Design


39/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai


MAINTENANCE

LIST

Each communication setting state is displayed.

O : I/O is communicating.

E : Communication fault occurs, I/O is not communicating.

- : Communication setting status is disabled.

SETTING NO. Communication setting number.

IP ADDRESS IP address of the communication setting. If the hostname is specified in the simple setting screen,

the converted IP address will be displayed.

STATUS

The status of the communication setting. It corresponds to the symbol of the "LIST" shown by "( )".

COM OK (O) : I/O is communicating

COM ERROR (E) : Communication fault occurs, I/O is not communicating.

DISABLE (-) : Communication setting status is disabled.

ERR GEN

ERR EXT

Display error code that shows the cause when STATUS is a "COM ERROR".

"ERR GEN" means the general error code and "ERR EXT" means the extended error code.

Error code value is determined by the EtherNet/IP specification. Refer to the "G.7.2 ERROR CODE

OF EtherNet/IP" about these error codes and meaning.

TIME The time connected with equipment is displayed in the form of HHH:MM:SS. The maximum value is

999:59:59.

Adapter information acquisition screen

Page 3 is the adapter information acquisition screen. Communicate with the adapter equipment of specified IP address, and display acquired information.

EtherNet/IP Scanner maintenance screen (Adapter information acquisition)

Edit Apprv.Design


40/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

Edit Apprv.Design


41/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

Operation 1 Specify a value to "IP ADDRESS" and press [GET INFO]. 2 This screen communicates with the adapter equipment of specified IP address, and display acquired

information.

NOTE Depending on circumstances of some adapter equipment, the transmission of the

I/O data might stop when information acquisition is executed from this screen while transmitting the I/O data.

Use information acquisition of this screen only for confirming communication target in case of network setting.

Do not use information acquisition of this screen when system operation is actually begun, and when the I/O data is transmitted.


IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address or host name of the adapter equipment to acquire information.


PRODUCT NAME Acquired product name is displayed. "GET INFO ERROR" is displayed when acquisition fails.

VENDOR ID Acquired vendor ID is displayed.

DEVICE TYPE Acquired device type is displayed.

PRODUCT CODE Acquired product code is displayed.

REVISION Acquired revision is displayed.

SERIAL NO. Acquired serial number is displayed.

G.2.7.2 Detail information screen

Procedure 1 On the maintenance list screen, move the cursor to select the communication setting. 2 Press soft key [DETAIL], detail information screen is displayed.

EtherNet/IP Scanner maintenance screen (Detail information)

Operation Press soft key [LIST] to return to the maintenance list screen. Press soft key [GET INFO], it is possible to move to the adapter information acquisition screen and can acquire the adapter information.


IP ADDRESS IP address of the selected communication setting is displayed.

STATUS

ERR GEN

ERR EXT

TIME

These are same as items in the maintenance information list screen.

RPI (ms) The value of RPI set in the simple screen is displayed. Setting unit is 1ms.

API (ms)

It is a sending and receiving interval of the DI/DO data that EtherNet/IP Scanner function actually

processed.

O=>T means DO data receive interval, and T=>O means DI data send interval. Setting unit is 1ms.

RECV It is a number of packets that the Scanner function normally received.


LOST It is a number of packets that were not able to receive by the Scanner function.


SEND It is a number of packets that the Scanner function normally sent.

Edit Apprv.Design


42/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai


G.2.8 EtherNet/IP FUNCTIONS LOG SCREEN

The log screen shows the log data about EtherNet/IP Adapter and Scanner function.

Procedure


2 Press soft key [ETHER LOG] to display the Ethernet log screen. (When soft key does not appear, press the continue key.)

3 Press soft key [ETHERNET/IP], and then the information related to EtherNet/IP functions is displayed.

EtherNet/IP functions log screen

The latest log information is displayed at the top of the screen. At the right end of a log item, the occurrence date and time of the log item is indicated. Date and time data is indicated in the format "MMM.DD hh:mm:ss", where MMM represents a month, DD represents a day, hh represents hour, mm represents minute, and ss represents second. To clear the log information, press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [CLEAR].

Edit Apprv.Design


43/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

Edit Apprv.Design


44/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

NOTE The log information of EtherNet/IP functions is stored in volatile memory and it is

lost when the power of CNC is turned off. Check the log information when an error occurs.

The following lists major log message: In the "A/S", "A" means log of the Adapter function, and "S" means log of the Scanner function. XX means a general error code, and YY means an extended error code. Refer to the "G.7.2 ERROR CODE OF EtherNet/IP" for the detail of these error codes.

Error Code Log message A/S Meaning and action to be taken

E-1107 EtherNet/IP function and FL-net function

cannot be used at the same time

A

S

It is specified that the EtherNet/IP function and the

FL-net function are operated with the same

hardware. Please confirm the value of parameter

No.970, 971, and 972.

All Connections of EtherNet/IP Adapter are

busy [General=XXH:Extended=YYH]

A The connection request sent from the scanner was

refused because the connection number exceed

maximum number(32).

E-1109

All Connections of EtherNet/IP Adapter are

busy

[General=XXH:Extended=YYH:Scanner]

S The scanner sent connection request to the

adapter, but it was refused because all connection

of the adapter had already been used.

E-110A Connect Request from EtherNet/IP Scanner

is refused

A The unacceptable connection request was received

from the scanner.

E-110B Connect Request from EtherNet/IP Scanner

is refused (RPI Error)


from the scanner.

RPI specified from the scanner is beyond the limits

of value (4-10,000ms) that can be accepted.

E-110C Connect Request from EtherNet/IP Scanner

is refused (DI/DO Size Error)


from the scanner.

The size of DI or DO specified from the scanner is

different from the size specified by the allocation

setting.

Edit Apprv.Design


45/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

Error Code Log message A/S Meaning and action to be taken

E-110D Connect Request from EtherNet/IP Scanner

is refused (Assembly Instance Error)


from the scanner.

The instance of the Assembly object specified from

the scanner is not in the adapter function. The

instance of the Assembly object is created if the

allocation setting is enabled. Please confirm

whether the allocation setting is enabled.

[Connection has timed out. (Adapter:UU)] A The allocation setting number UU has timed out. E-110E

[Connection has timed out. (Scanner:VV)] S The communication setting number VV has timed

out.

[Connection has closed. (Adapter:UU)] A The allocation setting number UU has closed. E-110F

[Connection has closed. (Scanner:VV)] S The communication setting number VV has closed.

E-1151 Response from EtherNet/IP Adapter was not

received [General=XXH:Extended=YYH]

S The connection request was sent to the adapter, but

the response from the adapter was not received.

Confirm whether the adapter power supply is on, or

whether the adapter is correctly connected to the

network.

E-1152 Error Response from EtherNet/IP Adapter

was received [General=XXH:Extended=YYH]

S The error response was received from the adapter.

E-1153 Connect Request is refused

[General=XXH:Extended=YYH]

S The connection request from the scanner was

refused by the adapter.

E-1154 Connect Request is refused (DI/DO Size

Error) [General=XXH:Extended=YYH]


refused by the adapter. The size of DI/DO specified

by the scanner is different from the adapter.

E-1155 Connect Request is refused (RPI Error)



refused by the adapter. RPI specified by the

scanner cannot be accepted with the adapter.

E-1156 Connect Request is refused (ElectronicKey

Mismatch) [General=XXH:Extended=YYH]


refused by the adapter. The electronic key specified

by the scanner is different from the adapter.

E-1157 Connect Request is refused (Assembly

Instance Error)



refused by the adapter. The assembly instance

specified by the scanner cannot be used in the

adapter.

Edit Apprv.Design


46/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

G.3 RELATING NC PARAMETER

NC parameter related to EtherNet/IP functions is as follows.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 904 DHC DNS



#5 DNS : The DNS client function is: 0: Not used. 1: Used.

#6 DHC : The DHCP client function is: 0: Not used. 1: Used.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 907 100 FUL FIX



#0 FIX : In a hardware where EtherNet/IP Adapter function or EtherNet/IP Scanner function is running, the auto-negotiation of Ethernet communication is

0 : valid. (10Mbps/100Mbps and full duplex/half duplex is distinguished automatically.) 1 : invalid. (The setting is specified by the following parameters, #1 FUL and #2 100.)

#1 FUL : In a hardware where EtherNet/IP Adapter function or EtherNet/IP Scanner function is running, the communication of Ethernet is

Edit Apprv.Design


47/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

0 : Half-duplex. 1 : Full-duplex This bit is effective only if #0 FIX is 1.

#2 100 : In a hardware where EtherNet/IP Adapter function or EtherNet/IP Scanner function is running, the transmission rate of Ethernet is 0 : 10Mbps 1 : 100Mbps This bit is effective only if #0 FIX is 1.

0970 Select hardware that operates Ethernet or Data Server function

0971 Select hardware that operates first FL-net function

0972 Select hardware that operates second FL-net function


continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] -1 to 6 Hardware that operates each function is selected.

Value Hardware

-1 Not used

0 Unsetting

1 Multi-function Ethernet

2 (reserved)





Edit Apprv.Design


48/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

NOTE 1. When EtherNet/IP functions are available, these functions operate together with

Ethernet function on the same hardware that is specified by parameter No.970. 2. EtherNet/IP functions cannot be used with Data server function. Only Data server

function can be used when both EtherNet/IP functions and Data server function option are specified.

3. EtherNet/IP functions cannot be used on the same hardware as the FL-net function. Therefore, if FL-net function is used with EtherNet/IP functions, parameter No.970 and No.971, or No.970 and No.972 cannot be set to the same value.

G.4 COMMUNICATION CONDITION

It should be set that the load of the communication becomes within the range of the ability of equipment for stable EtherNet/IP communication. This chapter explains guidance for using EtherNet/IP functions under suitable load.

G.4.1 RPI AND API

RPI (Requested Packet Interval) is the interval of sending data in EtherNet/IP functions, and API (Actual Packet Interval) is a sending and receiving interval of the DI/DO data that EtherNet/IP functions actually processed. These values are confirmed in the detail screen of the scanner maintenance screen or in the scanner detail screen of the adapter maintenance screen.

EtherNet/IP scanner maintenance screen (Detail) EtherNet/IP adapter maintenance screen (Scanner detail)

Edit Apprv.Design


49/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

Edit Apprv.Design


50/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

Direction Mean of RPI and API Judgment of value

T => O RPI : Specified value of the data-sending

interval for adapter.

API : Interval when scanner received the data

from adapter.

The processing of adapter (destination

equipment) is:

RPI=API : In time

RPI<API : Not in time

Scanner

maintenance

screen

O => T RPI : Specified value of the data-sending

interval for scanner.

API : Interval when scanner sent data to

adapter.

The processing of scanner (CNC) is:

RPI=API : In time


O => T RPI : Specified value of the data-sending

interval for scanner.

API : Interval when adapter received the data

from scanner.

The processing of scanner (destination

equipment) is:

RPI=API : In time


Adapter

maintenance

screen

T => O RPI : Specified value of the data-sending

interval for adapter.

API : Interval when adapter sent data to

scanner.

The processing of adapter (CNC) is:

RPI=API : In time


Confirm that API and RPI of O => T is almost the same value when CNC is used as scanner. Confirm API and RPI of T => O is almost the same value when CNC is used as adapter. There is a possibility that the processing of CNC is not in time when the value of API is greatly different from RPI or the value of API changes periodically and it doesn't stabilize. Change RPI to a bigger value to give a margin There is another method to confirm the communication load; at first set a value that is smaller than the necessary value to RPI, then confirm that API is not greatly different from RPI. By this method, it can be confirmed whether there is still margin in processing when RPI is set to the necessary value. The minimum value of RPI is 4ms. A value that is smaller than this cannot be set.

NOTE In CNC, EtherNet/IP functions are executed with high priority than other Ethernet

function like FOCAS2/Ethernet function or CNC screen display function. Therefore, when EtherNet/IP functions are used together with other Ethernet functions, it is necessary to give a margin enough for processing of EtherNet/IP functions. Otherwise, time to process other Ethernet functions cannot be assigned, and there is a possibility that these functions cannot be executed correctly.

G.4.2 RPI AND DATA SIZE

In EtherNet/IP, the cycle of the data transmission is specified by RPI of each connection. The data length per second is calculated by the RPI and data size of each connection. This data length per second can be used as a guidance of a setup. The adapter function and the scanner function are running on the same resources (hardware or software). If the adapter function and the scanner function are used at the same time, total of data length per second is sum of these values.

Total of data length per second (byte) = Scanner function total of data length per second + Adapter function total of data length per second

The data length per second of scanner function is displayed to a screen. See "DI+DO DATA_LEN/SEC (TOTAL)" in the list of scanner setting screen.

EtherNet/IP Scanner setting screen (List)

Edit Apprv.Design


51/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

The data length per second of adapter function can be calculated by RPI value specified by scanner. The adapter function supports maximum four allocation settings. The total of data length per second is obtained by totaling these values.

Total of data length of the adapter function per second (byte) = ( Size of Allocation setting No.1 (DI + DO)) (byte) * ) +

1000






( Size of Allocation setting No.4 (DI + DO)) (byte) * ) 1000


NOTE Both DI size and DO size are added to the data length per second.

The maximum value of the total of data length per second that EtherNet/IP functions of CNC can operate is about 128,000 bytes. Please adjust the setting of RPI and the data size within this range. In addition, if CNC communicates with two or more equipments, set the larger value than the value of "Number of connected equipment * 2 [ms]" to the RPI. If the number of connected equipment is five, set the larger value than 10ms to RPI. The minimum value of RPI is 4ms.

NOTE The above-mentioned maximum value of the total of data length per second is

guidance. This is not guarantee of the performance. When EtherNet/IP functions are used together with other Ethernet functions like "FOCAS2/Ethernet function" or "CNC screen display function", it is necessary to give a margin enough.

Edit Apprv.Design


52/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

The example of calculating total of data length per second of the adapter is shown as follows. Example 1) CNC communicates with a PLC by using Allocation setting No.1 with DI=200 bytes, DO=200 bytes, and RPI=4ms.

Scanner CNC

PLC DO=200 bytes, RPI=4ms

DI=200bytes, RPI=4ms Allocation setting No.1

Adapter

Total of data length per second = (200 + 200) * 1000 / 4 = 100,000 (bytes) Example 2) CNC communicates with three PLCs by using Allocation setting No.1 to 3. - PLC 1 : DI = 64 bytes, DO = 64 bytes, RPI = 8 ms - PLC 2 : DI = 128 bytes, DO = 128 bytes, RPI = 20 ms - PLC 3 : DI = 256 bytes, DO = 256 bytes, RPI = 20 ms

Adapter

CNC


Scanner

PLC 1 DO=64 bytes, RPI=8ms

DI=64 bytes, RPI=8ms





Total of data length per second

= ((64 + 64) * 1000 / 8) + ((128 + 128) * 1000 / 20) + ((256 + 256) * 1000 / 20)) = 54,400 (bytes)

Edit Apprv.Design


53/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

G.4.3 INPUT/OUTPUT RESPONSE TIME

This section explains the input/output response time seen from the scanner when CNC is used for both adapter and scanner. The input/output response time seen from the scanner is the total time of the following sequence; output signal is set by the ladder program in the scanner, the signal value is notified to the adapter, processed by the ladder program in the adapter, and input signal is processed by the ladder program in the scanner again. In this case, input/output response time seen from the scanner is estimated by the following expression.

Input/output response time seen from the scanner = Tin1 + Tin2 + Tin3 + Tin-out + Tout1 + Tout2 + Tout3

CNC (Adapter) EtherNet/IPAdapter function

PMC Data area

Ladder Program

Tin2

Tin3Tin-out

Tout1

Tout2

CNC (Scanner) EtherNet/IPScanner function

PMC Data area

Ladder Program

Tout3

Tin1

Scanner output data reading time (Tin1) It is the time from when the ladder program sets the value of output signal until EtherNet/IP Scanner function receives the value of the signal in the scanner. When RPI of O => T is smaller than 32ms, this time is the same time as RPI. When RPI is 32ms or more, it is fixed value of 32ms.

Scanner output processing time (Tin2)

Edit Apprv.Design

It is the time from when EtherNet/IP Scanner function receives the value of the signal until EtherNet/IP Adapter function receives the value from the network. The EtherNet/IP Scanner function transmits the signal to the


54/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

Edit Apprv.Design


55/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

network at intervals of API(RPI). It takes Ethernet transmission time from the scanner to the adapter, but it can be estimated as almost zero. Therefore, the maximum value is API(RPI).

Adapter input data writing time (Tin3) It is the time from when EtherNet/IP Adapter function received the value of signal from the network until adapter function writes the value to PMC data area. CNC copies the received data into the PMC data area immediately. Therefore, it can be estimated to be almost zero.

Adapter ladder program processing time (Tin-out) The ladder program operates in a cycle that is a multiple of 4 ms or 8 ms depending on the size of the ladder program. The actual time can be measured with SCAN TIME on the PMC STAUS screen.

Adapter output data reading time (Tout1) It is the time from when the ladder program sets the value of output signal to the PMC data area until EtherNet/IP Adapter function reads it in CNC. When RPI is smaller than 32ms, this time is the same time as RPI. When RPI is 32ms or more, it is fixed value of 32ms.

Adapter output processing time (Tout2) It is the time from when EtherNet/IP Adapter function reads the value of the signal until EtherNet/IP Scanner function receives it. The EtherNet/IP Adapter function transmits the signal to the network at intervals of API(RPI). It takes Ethernet transmission time from the adapter to the scanner, but it can be estimated as almost zero. Therefore, the maximum value is API(RPI).

Scanner input data writing time (Tout3) It is the time from when EtherNet/IP Scanner function receives the data from the network until it sends the data to the ladder program. CNC copies the received data into the PMC data area immediately. Therefore, it can be estimated to be almost zero.

Edit Apprv.Design


56/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

NOTE 1 In CNC, the time from when the ladder program sets the value to the signal until

the data is sent to the network is as follows. - Scanner function : Tin1+Tin2 - Adapter function : Tout1+Tout2 In both cases, the maxima is as follows. - When RPI is smaller than 32 ms, RPI * 2 (ms) - When RPI is 32 ms or more, RPI + 32 (ms)

2 When the connection of the Class1 communication has not established it, the value of Tout1 is a fixed value of 32ms. Therefore, when the value is read by the Explicit message when Class1 is not communicated, the value is updated in each 32ms. When the value is written by the Explicit message, data is immediately reflected in the PMC data area.

G.5 NOTES ON CREATING A LADDER PROGRAM

The following provides notes on creating a ladder program required to construct a safety system in a system that uses EtherNet/IP functions.

CAUTION The time after the power is turned on until communication is actually started may

vary depending on the connected device status and other factors. If it is necessary to strictly determine whether communication starts, use not the time or status, but actual communication data.

Input and output signals

An output signal from the CNC is written by the ladder program into the PMC data area. The reading/writing process of EtherNet/IP functions reads the signal and sent it to the Ethernet network. An input signal also flows a similar route in the opposite direction. Though the following figures describe the adapter function, it is similar to the scanner function.

ラダープログラム処理

PMC

レジスタ（メモリ）

DeviceNetマスタ機能

リフレッシュ処理

ＣＮＣ

Ladder program Process

PMC

PMC

area


Reading/writingProcess

Input signal Output signal

CNC

Scanner

Ethernet

data

Ladder program process and reading/writing process by EtherNet/IP functions

Processing by the ladder program and the reading/writing process by EtherNet/IP functions operate asynchronously with one another. Processing by the ladder program can operate independently of reading/writing process by EtherNet/IP functions, so the ladder program can be repeatedly executed at high-speed.

Edit Apprv.Design


57/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

The following figure shows a time chart of the internal operation of the CNC with signals output from the ladder program.

１

１２

２３

３

Reading/writing process of EtherNet/IP : １１２２３３

１１２２３３

２１

Content of data area A:

Content of data area B:

３

mth (m+1)th (m+2)th

nth

１，１２，２３，３

Ladder program process

(n+1)th (n+2)th (n+3)th

Transferred to scanner

１１２２３３

２，１

３２

２

１

１

００

Time chart

The upper part of the figure indicates that processing by the ladder program is performed periodically and writing to data area A or data area B in the PMC is performed in the ladder program. The middle part indicates that how data area A and data area B are updated in this case. There are differences in the timing in which data is written to data area A or data area B even in the same execution cycle of the ladder program, so data area A and data area B are not updated at the same time. The lower part indicates that reading/writing process by EtherNet/IP functions is cyclically made to read data in data area A and data area B. Since data area A and data area B are not updated at the same time, for example, in the case of (n+1) Th refreshing, the data written by one execution of the ladder program cannot be read as one set. Conversely, when input signals from a scanner are processed in the ladder program, the data written by one execution of writing may not be read by one execution of the ladder program.

Edit Apprv.Design


58/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

CAUTION Reading/writing process by EtherNet/IP functions is made asynchronously with

the execution of the ladder program. Therefore, keep the following in mind when creating a ladder program. 1. When an input signal from EtherNet/IP set in the specified PMC address is

read from two points in the ladder program, even if the ladder program can be executed in one cycle, there is no guarantee that the same value can be read.

2. When the ladder program writes an output signal to EtherNet/IP in the specified PMC address, the signal may be transferred to a scanner device before the ladder program is completely executed.

Concurrency of data

When DI data or DO data is handled with the ladder program, the concurrency of long data (4-byte data) and word data (2-byte data) is guaranteed (there is no data spikes) under the corresponding constraints.

CAUTION If the following constraints are not satisfied, the concurrency of long data or word

data is not guaranteed.

Concurrency of long data (4-byte data) To guarantee the concurrency of data, satisfy the following two conditions. 1. In the ladder program, the following commands are used in units of four bytes.

Commands: MOVD, MOVN, XMOVB, SETND, XCHGD, DSCHB, TBLRD, TBLWD, DSEQD, DSNED, DSGTD, DSLTD, DSGED, DSLED, DMAXD, DMIND, EQD, NED, GTD, LTD, GED, LED, RNGD, COMPB, EOR, AND, OR, NOT, EORD, ANDD, ORD, NOTD, SHLD, SHRD, ROLD, RORD, BSETD, BRSTD, BTSTD, BPOSD, BCNTD, CODB, DCNVB, DECB, TBCDD, FBCDD, ADDB, SUBB, MULB, DIVB, NUMEB, ADDSD, SUBSD, MULSD, DIVSD, MODSD, INCSD, DECSD, ABSSD, NEGSD

2. When DI data or DO data is assigned to PMC data area at the allocation screen of EtherNet/IP Adapter function, the value of item "ADDRESS" and "SIZE" are aligned with 4-byte boundaries. Example) ADDRESS/SIZE = 1:R0000/4, 1:R0004/8, 1:R0008/12, 1:E0000/16

3. By setting Bit 0 of "OPTION" as "1", and Bit 1 as "0" at the allocation screen of EtherNet/IP functions, the data unit of four bytes is specified.

Edit Apprv.Design


59/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

Edit Apprv.Design


60/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

Concurrency of word data (2-byte data) To guarantee the concurrency of data, satisfy the following two conditions. 1. In the ladder program, the following commands are used in units of two bytes.

Commands: MOVW, MOVN, XMOVB, SETNW, XCHGW, DSCHB, TBLRW, TBLWW, DSEQW, DSNEW, DSGTW, DSLTW, DSGEW, DSLEW, DMAXW, DMINW, EQW, NEW, GTW, LTW, GEW, LEW, RNGW, COMPB, EOR, AND, OR, NOT, EORW, ANDW, ORW, NOTW, SHLW, SHRW, ROLW, RORW, BSETW, BRSTW, BTSTW, BPOSW, BCNTW, CODB, DCNVB, DECB, TBCDW, FBCDW, ADDB, SUBB, MULB, DIVB, NUMEB, ADDSW, SUBSW, MULSW, DIVSW, MODSW, INCSW, DECSW, ABSSW, NEGSW

2. When DI data or DO data is assigned to PMC data area at Allocation screen of EtherNet/IP Adapter function, the value of item "ADDRESS" and "SIZE" are aligned with 2-byte boundaries. Example) ADDRESS/SIZE = 1:R0000/2, 2:R0002/4, 3:R0004/6, 1:E0002/8

3. By setting Bit 0 of "OPTION" as "0", and Bit 1 as "1" at the allocation screen of EtherNet/IP functions, the data unit of two bytes is specified.

Concurrency of byte data (1-byte data) There are no special constraints. The concurrency is always guaranteed in 1-byte data.

G.6 EXAMPLE OF CONNECTION

This chapter describes the example of connecting the EtherNet/IP adapter and the EtherNet/IP scanner by Series 30i/31i/32i/35i -B and Power Motion i -A.

G.6.1 EXAMPLE (1)

This section describes the parameter settings to connect one EtherNet/IP scanner and two EtherNet/IP adapters.

Equipment #2

Equipment #1 Equipment #3

DI Scan

DOScan

DI Scan

DOScan

DO Adpt

DI Adpt

DOAdpt

DI Adpt

Setting 01 Setting 02

Allocation 01 Allocation 01

Example of connection EtherNet/IP (1)

Edit Apprv.Design


61/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

G.6.1.1 The image of data exchange

In the above-mentioned three equipments, the equipment #1 and #3 are running as EtherNet/IP scanner, and equipment #2 is running as EtherNet/IP adapter. Therefore, equipment #2 can read DO data of other two equipments.

Setting #1 Setting #2 Setting #3

Adapter Scanner Adapter

192.168.0.101 192.168.0.102 192.168.0.103

1:R0000 Adpt: Status 1:R0000 Adpt: Status

1:R0003 1:R0003

1:R0004 Scan: Status

1:R0008

1:R0100 Adpt: DO Alloc. 01 1:R0100 Scan: DI Setting 01

1:R0164 Adpt: DI Alloc. 01 1:R0164 Scan: DO Setting 01

1:R0228 1:R0228 Scan: DI Setting 02 1:R0228 Adpt: DO Alloc. 01

1:R0292 Scan: DO Setting 02 1:R0292 Adpt: DI Alloc. 01

1:R0356

G.6.1.2 Parameter setting example

Parameters for the equipment #1

Items of Adapter Parameters

DI DATA ON ABNORMAL HOLD

STATUS ADDRESS 1:R0000

STATUS SIZE 3

OPTION 1 00000000

OPTION 2 00000000

ALLOCATION 01 ENABLE

DI TYPE 01

DI ADDRESS 1:R0164

DI SIZE 64

DO TYPE 01

DO ADDRESS 1:R0100

DO SIZE 64

Edit Apprv.Design


62/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

Edit Apprv.Design


63/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

OPTION 00000000


Items of Adapter Parameters



STATUS SIZE 3

OPTION 1 00000000

OPTION 2 00000000

ALLOCATION 01 ENABLE

DI TYPE 01

DI ADDRESS 1:R0292

DI SIZE 64

DO TYPE 01

DO ADDRESS 1:R0228

DO SIZE 64

OPTION 00000000

Parameters in the masked area are initial value. Parameters for the equipment #2

Items of Scanner Parameters Items of Scanner Parameters



STATUS SIZE 4

OPTION 1 00000000

OPTION 2 00000000

SETTING 01 ENABLE SETTING 02 ENABLE

IP ADDRESS 192.168.0.101 IP ADDRESS 192.168.0.103

T => O ASSEMBLY INSTANCE 101 T => O ASSEMBLY INSTANCE 101

T => O SIZE 64 T => O SIZE 64

T => O RPI 4 T => O RPI 4

O => T ASSEMBLY INSTANCE 151 O => T ASSEMBLY INSTANCE 151

O => T SIZE 64 O => T SIZE 64

O => T RPI 4 O => T RPI 4

CONFIGURATION 100 CONFIGURATION 100

Edit Apprv.Design


64/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

DATA UNIT 1 BYTE DATA UNIT 1 BYTE

ENDIAN DISABLE ENDIAN DISABLE

DI (T => O) TYPE 01 DI (T => O) TYPE 01

DI (T => O) ADDRESS 1:R0100 DI (T => O) ADDRESS 1:R0228

DO (O => T) TYPE 01 DO (O => T) TYPE 01

DO (O => T) ADDRESS 1:R0164 DO (O => T) ADDRESS 1:R0292

T => O TRANSPORT TYPE UNICAST T => O TRANSPORT TYPE UNICAST

T => O HEADER FORMAT MODELESS T => O HEADER FORMAT MODELESS

T => O PRIORITY SCHEDULED T => O PRIORITY SCHEDULED

O => T TRANSPORT TYPE UNICAST O => T TRANSPORT TYPE UNICAST

O => T HEADER FORMAT RUN/IDLE O => T HEADER FORMAT RUN/IDLE

O => T PRIORITY SCHEDULED O => T PRIORITY SCHEDULED

ELECTRONIC KEY VENDOR ID 0000H ELECTRONIC KEY VENDOR ID 0000H

ELECTRONIC KEY DEVICE

TYPE

0000H ELECTRONIC KEY DEVICE TYPE 0000H

ELECTRONIC KEY PRODUCT

CODE

0000H ELECTRONIC KEY PRODUCT

CODE

0000H

ELECTRONIC KEY REVISION 0.000 ELECTRONIC KEY REVISION 0.000

ELECTRONIC KEY

COMPATIBILITY

DISABLE ELECTRONIC KEY

COMPATIBILITY

DISABLE

TIMEOUT MULTIPLIER X4 TIMEOUT MULTIPLIER X4

RECONNECT 0 RECONNECT 0

PRODUCTION TRIGGER CYCLIC PRODUCTION TRIGGER CYCLIC

OPTION1 00000000 OPTION1 00000000

OPTION2 00000000 OPTION2 00000000

Parameters in the masked area are initial value.

G.6.2 EXAMPLE (2)

This section describes the parameter settings to connect two EtherNet/IP scanners and one EtherNet/IP adapter.

Equipment #2


DI Adpt

DOAdpt

DI Adpt

DOAdpt

DO Scan

DI Scan

DOScan

DI Scan

Allocation01

Setting 01 Setting 01

Allocation02



In the above-mentioned three equipments, the equipment #1 and #3 are running as EtherNet/IP scanner, and #2 is running as EtherNet/IP adapter. Therefore, equipment #2 can read DO data of other two equipments.


Scanner Adapter Scanner

192.168.0.101 192.168.0.102 192.168.0.103

1:R0000 Adpt: Status

1:R0003

1:R0004 Scan: Status 1:R0004 Scan: Status

1:R0008 1:R0008

1:R0100 Scan: DO Setting 01 1:R0100 Adpt: DI Alloc. 01

1:R0164 Scan: DI Setting 01 1:R0164 Adpt: DO Alloc. 01

1:R0228 1:R0228 Adpt: DI Alloc. 02 1:R0228 Scan: DO Setting 01

1:R0292 Adpt: DO Alloc. 02 1:R0292 Scan: DI Setting 01

1:R0356

Edit Apprv.Design


65/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

Edit Apprv.Design


66/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai


Parameters for the equipment #1 Parameters for the equipment #3


DI DATA ON ABNORMAL HOLD DI DATA ON ABNORMAL HOLD

STATUS ADDRESS 1:R0004 STATUS ADDRESS 1:R0004

STATUS SIZE 4 STATUS SIZE 4

OPTION 1 00000000 OPTION 1 00000000

OPTION 2 00000000 OPTION 2 00000000















DO (O => T) ADDRESS 1:R0100 DO (O => T) ADDRESS 1:R0228

T => O TRANSPORT TYPE UNICAST T => O TRANSPORT TYPE UNICAST




O => T HEADER FORMAT RUN/IDLE O => T HEADER FORMAT RUN/IDLE




TYPE

0000H ELECTRONIC KEY DEVICE

TYPE

0000H


CODE


CODE

0000H

Edit Apprv.Design


67/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai


ELECTRONIC KEY

COMPATIBILITY


COMPATIBILITY

DISABLE




OPTION1 00000000 OPTION1 00000000

OPTION2 00000000 OPTION2 00000000

Parameters in the masked area are initial value. Parameters for the equipment #2

Items of Adapter Parameters Items of Adapter Parameters



STATUS SIZE 3

OPTION 1 00000000

OPTION 2 00000000

ALLOCATION 01 ENABLE ALLOCATION 02 ENABLE

DI TYPE 01 DI TYPE 01

DI ADDRESS 1:R0100 DI ADDRESS 1:R0228

DI SIZE 64 DI SIZE 64

DO TYPE 01 DO TYPE 01

DO ADDRESS 1:R0164 DO ADDRESS 1:R0292

DO SIZE 64 DO SIZE 64

OPTION 00000000 OPTION 00000000


G.6.3 EXAMPLE (3)

This section describes the parameter settings to send own DO data to the other equipments.

Equipment #2


DIScan

DIScan

DI Scan

DOAdpt

DOAdpt

DIScan

Setting01

Alloc. 01 Alloc. 01

Alloc.01

Setting02

DOAdpt

DIScan

DIScan

Setting01

Setting 01

Setting 02

Setting02



In the above-mentioned three equipments, all equipments are running as both EtherNet/IP scanner and EtherNet/IP adapter, and DO data are transmitted by the multicast. Therefore, all equipments can read DO data of other equipments.


Scanner + Adapter Scanner + Adapter Scanner + Adapter

192.168.0.101 192.168.0.102 192.168.0.103

1:R0000 Adpt: Status 1:R0000 Adpt: Status 1:R0000 Adpt: Status

1:R0003 1:R0003 1:R0003

1:R0004 Scan: Status 1:R0004 Scan: Status 1:R0004 Scan: Status

1:R0008 1:R0008 1:R0008

1:R0100 Adpt: DO Alloc. 01 1:R0100 Scan: DI Setting 01 1:R0100 Scan: DI Setting 01

1:R0164 Scan: DI Setting 01 1:R0164 Adpt: DO Alloc. 01 1:R0164 Scan: DI Setting 02

1:R0228 Scan: DI Setting 02 1:R0228 Scan: DI Setting 02 1:R0228 Adpt: DO Alloc. 01

1:R0292 1:R0292 1:R0292

Edit Apprv.Design


68/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

Edit Apprv.Design


69/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai




DI DATA ON ABNORMAL HOLD ALLOCATION 01 ENABLE

STATUS ADDRESS 1:R0000 DI TYPE 00

STATUS SIZE 3 DI ADDRESS ---

OPTION 1 00000000 DI SIZE 0

OPTION 2 00000000 DO TYPE 01

DO ADDRESS 1:R0100

DO SIZE 64

DI TYPE 00000000




STATUS SIZE 4

OPTION 1 00000000

OPTION 2 00000000















DO (O => T) ADDRESS --- DO (O => T) ADDRESS ---

T => O TRANSPORT TYPE MULTICAST T => O TRANSPORT TYPE MULTICAST

Edit Apprv.Design


70/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai




O => T HEADER FORMAT HEARTBEAT O => T HEADER FORMAT HEARTBEAT




TYPE


TYPE

0000H


CODE


CODE

0000H


ELECTRONIC KEY

COMPATIBILITY


COMPATIBILITY

DISABLE




OPTION1 00000000 OPTION1 00000000

OPTION2 00000000 OPTION2 00000000









DO ADDRESS 1:R0164

DO SIZE 64

OPTION 00000000




STATUS SIZE 4

OPTION 1 00000000

Edit Apprv.Design


71/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

OPTION 2 00000000
























TYPE


TYPE

0000H


CODE


CODE

0000H


ELECTRONIC KEY

COMPATIBILITY


COMPATIBILITY

DISABLE




OPTION1 00000000 OPTION1 00000000

OPTION2 00000000 OPTION2 00000000

Edit Apprv.Design


72/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai









DO ADDRESS 1:R0228

DO SIZE 64

OPTION 00000000




STATUS SIZE 4

OPTION 1 00000000

OPTION 2 00000000

















Edit Apprv.Design


73/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai








TYPE


TYPE

0000H


CODE


CODE

0000H


ELECTRONIC KEY

COMPATIBILITY


COMPATIBILITY

DISABLE




OPTION1 00000000 OPTION1 00000000

OPTION2 00000000 OPTION2 00000000


Edit Apprv.Design


74/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

G.7 ATTACHED MATERIAL

G.7.1 SUPPORTED CLASS AND INSTANCE

Supported class and instance are as follows. The line where item "A" is checked is a class supported by the adapter function, and where item "S" is checked is a class supported by the scanner function.

Name A S Class code Instance number

Identity 01h 01h

Message Router 02h 01h

Assembly 04h 64h, 65h, 66h, 67h, 68h, 97h, 98h, 99h, 9Ah, FEh, FFh

Connection Manager 06h 01h

Connection Configuration F3h 01h

Port F4h 01h

TCP/IP F5h 01h

Ethernet Link F6h 01h

The relation between the number of allocation setting and instance number of Assembly object in the adapter function is as follows.

Output Assembly (T->O) Input Assembly (O->T) Number of allocation

setting Exclusive Owner,

Input Only, Listen Only Exclusive Owner Input Only Listen Only

1 65h (101) Size : 1 to 256 byte

97h (151) Size : 1 to 256 byte

2 66h (102) Size : 1 to 256 byte

98h (152) Size : 1 to 256 byte

3 67h (103) Size : 1 to 256 byte

99h (153) Size : 1 to 256 byte

4 68h (104) Size : 1 to 256 byte

9Ah (154) Size : 1 to 256 byte

FEh (254) Size : 0 byte

FFh (255) Size : 0 byte

Number of allocation

setting Configuration Assembly

1

2

3

4

64h (100) Size : 0 byte

Edit Apprv.Design


75/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

G.7.2 ERROR CODE OF EtherNet/IP

The meaning of error code of EtherNet/IP displayed on the maintenance screen or the log screen is as follows.

ERR GEN

(Hex)

ERR EXT

(Hex) Detected By Description

01 0100 Adapter Connection is in use

01 0103 Adapter Transport class1 or specified trigger is not supported

01 0106 Adapter The Exclusive Owner connection has already existed

01 0107 Adapter Connection is requested to be closed, but it has already closed

01 0108 Adapter Specified transport type is not supported

01 0109 Adapter Specified DI or DO size is not accepted for to the adapter

01 0110 Adapter Specified assembly instance is not configured

01 0111 Adapter Specified RPI is not supported

01 0113 Scanner

Adapter Cannot create new connection any more

01 0114 Adapter Specified vender ID or the product code is different from the value in

the electronic key

01 0115 Adapter Specified device type is different from the value in the electronic key

01 0116 Adapter Specified revision is different from the value in the electronic key

01 0117 Adapter Specified DI or DO assembly instance is not supported

01 0118 Adapter Specified configuration application path is not supported

01 0119 Adapter Connection request for Listen Only fails since there is no non-Listen

Only connection types currently open.

01 011A Adapter Cannot create new connection any more

01 011B Adapter The Adapter to Scanner RPI is smaller than the Production Inhibit

Time

01 0203 Scanner

Adapter Connection has timed out

01 0204 Scanner Unconnected request such as a connection request has timed out

01 0205 Adapter Parameter for unconnected request is error

01 0206 Scanner Message for unconnected transmission is too large

01 0207 Scanner Acknowledge for unconnected message was received but a data

response message was not received.

01 0301 Scanner

Adapter There is not enough buffer memory

Edit Apprv.Design


76/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

01 0302 Scanner

Adapter There is not enough network bandwidth for data

01 0303 Scanner

Adapter There is no reception connection ID filter can be used

01 0304 Scanner

Adapter It is not configured to send the schedule priority data.

01 0311 Scanner Specified port is not available

01 0312 Scanner Specified link address is invalid

01 0315 Scanner

Adapter

Specified segment type or segment value in the connection path is

invalid

01 0316 Adapter Specified connection path in the connection close request is invalid

01 0317 Scanner

Adapter Schedule is not specified

01 0318 Scanner Link address to self is invalid

01 0319 Adapter Secondary resource cannot be used

01 031A Adapter Rack connection has already been established

01 031B Adapter Module connection has already been established

01 031C Scanner

Adapter Miscellaneous error

01 031D Adapter Redundant connection mismatch

01 031E Adapter In the sending side device, there is no available user configurable

receiving side link reception resource anymore

01 031F Adapter In the sending side device, there is no user configurable receiving

side link reception resource

01 0800 Scanner Network link is offline

01 0810 Adapter There is no target application data can be used.

01 0811 Scanner There is no originator application data can be used.

01 0812 Scanner Node address has changed since the network was scheduled

01 0813 Adapter It is not configured for off-subnet multicast

G.7.3 SCANNER SETUP BY EDS FILE

This chapter describes the contents of the EDS file of the adapter, and the method of setting them to a setup screen of the scanner.

G.7.3.1 Structure of the EDS file

The EDS file is classified in the section. It is possible to set two or more fields in the one section. The parameter is set to each field. ";" (semicolon) is placed at the end of the parameter. It is possible to set two or more parameters in the one field. In that case, the separator "," is placed between parameter and parameter. It is a comment from character "$" to the end of line.

$Comment

[Section name 1]

Field name 1= Parameter;

Field name 2= Parameter 1, Parameter 2, Parameter 3;

---

[Section name 2]

---

G.7.3.2 Section [Device]

The equipment information of the adapter is described in the section [Device]. Input this value to "ELECTRONIC KEY" of the detail screen. However, if the confirmation of the adapter equipment is unnecessary, there is no need to change the value of "ELECTRONIC KEY" from the initial value.

Setting item of the detail screen Field name in the EDS file

VENDOR ID VendCode

DEVICE TYPE ProdType

PRODUCT CODE ProdCode

MajRev REVISION

MinRev

Edit Apprv.Design


77/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

Example)

Edit Apprv.Design


78/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

The setting value of the "ELECTRONIC KEY" is as follows in case of the above-mentioned EDS file.

Setting item of the detail screen Parameter

VENDOR ID 591(Dec) / 24F (Hex)

DEVICE TYPE 12(Dec) /C (Hex)

PRODUCT CODE 101(Dec) /65 (Hex)

REVISION 1.3

G.7.3.3 Section [Connection Manager]

The specification of the connection that can be created by Adapter equipment is described in the section [Connection Manager]. If more than one field is specified, select the suitable field by referring the 13th parameter, "Connection name". 15 parameters specified in the field and the correspondences of input item of the scanner setting screen are as follows.

Setting item in the

setting screen

Parameter in the

EDS file

Description Remarks

Bit 0 : Class 0

Bit 1 : Class 1

Bit 2 : Class 2

Bit 3 : Class 3

Bit 4 : Class 4

Bit 5 : Class 5

(None) 1st parameter

Bit 0-6

Bit 6 : Class 6

This is the communication class.

The scanner function supports only

class 1.

Bit 16 : CYCLIC

Bit 17 : CHANGE STATE

PRODUCTION

TRIGGER

1st parameter

Bit 16-18

Bit 18 : APPLICATION

(None) 1st parameter Bit 24 : Listen Only This is the communication type

[Device]

VendCode = 591;

ProdType = 12;

ProdCode = 101;

MajRev = 1;

MinRev = 3;

Edit Apprv.Design


79/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

Bit 25 : Input Only

Bit 26 : Exclusive Owner

Bit 24-27

Bit 27 : Redundant Owner

The scanner function doesn't support

Redundant Owner.

Bit 0 : O=>T fixed size

Bit 1 : O=>T variable size

Bit 2 : T=>O fixed size

(None) 2nd parameter

Bit 0-3

Bit 3 : T=>O variable size

This is the assembly data size, fixed

size or variable size.


fixed size.

0 : MODELESS

3 : HEARTBEAT

O => T

HEADER FORMAT

2nd parameter

Bit 8-10

4 : RUN/IDLE

0 : MODELESS

3 : HEARTBEAT

T => O

HEADER FORMAT

2nd parameter

Bit 12-14

4 : RUN/IDLE

Bit 16 : NULL

Bit 17 : MULTICAST

O => T

TRANSPORT TYPE

2nd parameter

Bit 16-19

Bit 18 : UNICAST


UNICAST.

Bit 20 : NULL

Bit 21 : MULTICAST

T => O

TRANSPORT TYPE

2nd parameter

Bit 20-23

Bit 22 : UNICAST

All of Transport type bit acceptable by

the Adapter can be specified in the EDS

file.

Specify the one Transport type from

them in the setting screen.

Bit 24 : LOW

Bit 25 : HIGH

Bit 26 : SCHEDULED

O => T

PRIORITY

2nd parameter

Bit 24-27

Bit 27 : URGENT


SCHEDULED.

Bit 28 : LOW

Bit 29 : HIGH

Bit 30 : SCHEDULED

T => O

PRIORITY

2nd parameter

Bit 28-31

Bit 31 : URGENT

O => T

RPI

3rd parameter Numerical value

(Unit:μsecond)

ParamN

If this parameter is PramN or is empty,

specify the RPI value.

Edit Apprv.Design


80/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

O => T

SIZE

4th parameter Numerical value

(Unit:byte)

ParamN

If this parameter is "PramN" or is

empty, it means that the setting of input

size of the adapter equipment is

necessary.

At first, specify this parameter to the

adapter equipment, and then specify

the same value to the scanner

equipment.

(None) 5th parameter This is the format of O => T.

T => O

RPI

6th parameter Numerical

value(Unit:μsecond)

ParamN

If this parameter is PramN or is empty,

specify the RPI value.

T => O

SIZE

7th parameter Numerical

value(Unit:μsecond)

ParamN

If this parameter is "PramN" or is

empty, it means that the setting of

output size of the adapter equipment is

necessary.

At first, specify this parameter to the

adapter equipment, and then specify

the same value to the scanner

equipment.

(None) 8th parameter This is the format of T => O.

(None) 9th parameter Configuration #1 size

(None) 10th parameter Configuration #1 format

(None) 11th parameter Configuration #2 size

(None) 12th parameter Configuration #2 format

These parameters cannot be specified

from setting screen

If necessary, use the other companies

setting tool.

(None) 13th parameter Connection name This is the connection name.

(None) 14th parameter Help string This is the help string for the connection

name.

O => T

ASSEMBLY INSTANCE

15th parameter Numerical value (Hex) This is the one byte value after the 1st

"2C".

T => O

ASSEMBLY INSTANCE

15th parameter Numerical value (Hex) This is the one byte value after the 2nd

"2C".

CONFIG

ASSEMBLY INSTANCE

15th parameter Numerical value (Hex) This is the one byte value after the "24".

Example)

[Connection Manager] Connection1 =

0x04010002, 0x44640405, Param1, Param2, , Param3, Param4, , , , , , "class1 - exclusive owner", "", "20 04 24 64 2C 97 2C 65";

The setting value of scanner setting screens to communicate with the above-mentioned EDS file is as follows.

Setting item Screen Parameter

Transport trigger Detail setting 4/4 CYCLIC

O => T Header format Detail setting 2/4 RUN/IDLE

T => O Header format Detail setting 1/4 MODELESS

O => T Transport type Detail setting 2/4 UNICAST

T => O Transport type Detail setting 1/4 UNICAST

(Select from UNICAST or MULTICAST)

O => T Priority Detail setting 2/4 SCHEDULED (Fixed)

T => O Priority Detail setting 1/4 SCHEDULED

O => T RPI Simple setting 1/2 Specify the needed communication interval.

O => T Size Simple setting 1/2 Specify size suitable for the adapter equipment.

T => O RPI Simple setting 1/2 Specify the needed communication interval.

T => O Size Simple setting 1/2 Specify size suitable for the adapter equipment.

O => T Assembly instance Simple setting 1/2 151 (Decimal)

T => O Assembly instance Simple setting 1/2 101 (Decimal)

Configuration Assembly instance Simple setting 1/2 100 (Decimal)

It is necessary to specify about CNC such as PMC address, etc. in the 2/2 page of the simple screen.

Edit Apprv.Design


81/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

Edit Apprv.Design


82/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

G.7.4 SCANNER SETUP BY OTHER COMPANIES TOOL

G.7.4.1 Outline

The parameter of the scanner function can be set from the scanner setting screen of CNC, but it is possible to set them from the "RSNetWorx for EtherNet/IP" (hereinafter referred to as "RSNetWorx") that is personal computer software released by Rockwell Automation company. When the adapter needs a detailed setting concerning the configuration, it is not possible to set it from the scanner setting screen. Use the RSNetWorx. A detailed setting concerning the configuration is necessary in the following condition.

- In the "Configuration Manager" section for communication in EDS file of an adapter, 9th to 12th parameters have some value.

If these parameters are empty, setup can be done by both scanner setting screen and RSNetWorx. RSNetWorx operation in this manual was confirmed with revision 10.00.00(CPR 9 SR2). The setting procedure by RSNetWorx is the following. 1. Create setting parameter on RSNetWorx. 2. Transmit the parameter from RSNetWorx to CNC. 3. Setup PMC address in CNC.

NOTE 1. When both adapter CNC and scanner CNC are connected in the same network,

setting by RSNetWorx is not possible. Refer to the "G.6 EXAMPLE OF CONNECTION", and setup by CNC scanner setting screen.

2. If a setup is transmitted to CNC from RSNetWorx, a communication setup of CNC will be overwritten sequentially from No. 1.

G.7.4.2 Operation

In this section, the setting procedure of scanner by RSNetWorx is described. Refer to the Rockwell Automation manual about details of operation procedure of the Rockwell Automation's software.

Create setting parameter on RSNetWorx

1. Operate the RSLinx that is software for the personal computer released by Rockwell Automation company, and set IP address of CNC to the AB_ETH driver. As a result, RSNetWorx can communicate with CNC. Select "Communications", "Configure Drivers", from RSLinks menu. And select "Ethernet devices" from "Driver Types", and then add the IP address of CNC.

RSLinx Driver setting screen

2. Run RSNetWorx. 3. Register EDS files for adapter equipment and for the CNC Scanner function.

Select "Tools", "EDS Wizard" from the menu of RSNetWork and register the EDS file according to the instruction of the screen. When an EDS file was registered, equipment is added to the tree on the left side of the screen.

NOTE To register an EDS file for CNC, use the EDS file of the Scanner function. The EDS

file which include both Adapter function and Scanner function cannot be used. Refer to the "G.2.5 OUTPUT OF EDS FILE" for details of EDS file output.

Edit Apprv.Design


83/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

4. Double-click CNC (Series 30i) from the tree at the left of RSNetWorx. When IP address is input and the

OK button is pushed, the icon (gray cube) is displayed at the right of the screen. Display the icon of the adapter equipment that should be connected by the same procedure.

RSNetWorx for EtherNet/IP

5. Right-click the icon of CNC (Series 30i), and select "Scanlist Configuration" from the pop-up menu.

The Scanlist Configuration screen is displayed. The line with green background color is a scanner, and the line with white background color is an adapter.

Scanlist Configuration screen

Edit Apprv.Design


84/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

6. Double-click the line of the adapter that communicates with CNC of the scanner. The Connection Properties screen is displayed. Set the value if necessary. Push the OK button when the setting ends.

Edit Apprv.Design


85/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

7. Preserve the setting on the Scanlist Configuration screen, and end the screen.

Do not use

Select connection name

Specify RPI

Specify T => O size

Specify O => T size

Transmit the parameter from RSNetWorx to CNC

8. Change the "NETWORK" from ONLINE to OFFLINE on the basic screen of the Scanner setting of CNC. 9. Right click the icon of CNC on the screen of RSNetWorx, and select "Download To Device". Push the yes

button to the confirmation dialog box. 10. The setting that set by RSNetWorx is displayed as "C" in the list screen of the Scanner setting of CNC.

And the "STATE" is displayed as "CHANGING". These mean that setting is not available, because a necessary item such as the PMC address etc. has not been set yet though some value had set by a setting tool.

Setup PMC address in CNC.

11. Move the cursor to the setting of the communication of "C" on the list screen. Press soft key [(OPRT)], [SIMPLE] to display the simple screen.

Edit Apprv.Design


86/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

Edit Apprv.Design


87/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai

12. Set an address of PMC area to the 2nd page of the simple screen.

13. Return to the list screen, and change the "STATE" of the communication setting to ENABLE. The "O" is displayed in the list screen of the Scanner setting of CNC.

14. Turn the CNC power off and on again.

NOTE When a detailed setting concerning the configuration set by RSNetWorx exists, if

the "STATE" of such setting is changed to ENABLE, it is displayed in the list screen as "T". A detailed setting concerning the configuration is preserved in such setting. A detailed setting concerning the configuration cannot be displayed to CNC screen, and cannot be changed from CNC screen. To delete such a communication setting, execute the initializing procedure. Even if the value of items displayed on CNC screen is changed, a detailed setting concerning the configuration remain. Refer to the "G.2.6 Initialize" about details of the procedure of initialization.

Edit Apprv.Design


87/87

Title

DrawNo.

Sheet

B-64014EN/04-3

S.Matsukura



N.Mutai